Partisol PartisolPartisolPartisolPartisolPartisol -FRM Model 2000 -FRM Model 2000-FRM Model 2000-FRM Model 2000-FRM Model 2000-FRM Model

2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler PM-2.5 Air SamplerPM-2.5 Air SamplerPM-2.5 Air SamplerPM-2.5 Air SamplerPM-2.5 A ir Sampler Operating Manual Operating ManualOperating ManualOperating ManualOperating ManualOperating Manual 42-004298 Revision B November 2004

 2007 Thermo Fisher Scientific Inc. All rights reserved. Specifications, terms and pricing are subject to change. Not all products are av ailable in all countries. Please consult your local sales representative for details. Thermo Fisher Scientific Air Quality Instruments 27 Forge Parkway Franklin, MA 02038 1-508-520-0430 www.thermo.com/aqi

WEEE Compliance WEEE ComplianceWEEE ComplianceWEEE ComplianceWEEE ComplianceWEEE Compliance This product is required to comply with the European Union s Waste Electrical & El ectronic Equipment (WEEE) Directive 2002/96/EC. It is marked with the following symbol: Thermo Fisher Scientific has contracted with one or more recycling/disposal comp anies in each EU Member State, and this product should be disposed of or recycled through them. Further information on Thermo Fisher Scientific s compliance with these Directives, the recyclers in your country, and information on Thermo Fisher Scientific products which may assist the detection of substances subject to the RoHS Directive are available at: www.thermo.com/WEEERoHS.

Revision B.003 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler U.S. EP U.S. EPU.S. EPU.S. EPU.S. EPU.S. EPA AAAAA Reference Method Designation Reference Method DesignationReference Method DesignationReference Method Designa tionReference Method DesignationReference Method Designation RFPS-0498-1 RFPS-0498-1RFPS-0498-1RFPS-0498-1RFPS-0498-1RFPS-0498-117 1717171717 Notice is hereby given that the EPA in accordance with 40 CFR 40 Part 53 has designated a new reference method for the measuring mass concentrations of particulate matter as PM-2.5 in ambient air. The new reference method is a gravimetric method which utilizes a specially designed PM-2.5 sampler for partic le collection the designated method is as follows: RFPS-0498-117 Rupprecht & Patashnick Company, Incorporated Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler operated with software version 1.102 or 1.103, for continuous sample periods, in accordance with the Model 2000 Instruction Manual and with the requirements and sample collection filters specified in 40 CFR Part 50 Appendix L. This method is available from Rupprecht & Patashnick Company, Inc. (R&P). PAGE I

Revision B.003 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler Patents, Copyrights and T Patents, Copyrights and TPatents, Copyrights and TPatents, Copyrights and TPaten ts, Copyrights and TPatents, Copyrights and Trademarks rademarksrademarksrademarksrademarksrademarks This instrumentation from Rupprecht & Patashnick Co., Inc. (R&P) is covered by pending patents in the United States of America and other countries. This documentation contains trade secrets and confidential information proprieta ry to R&P. The software supplied with the instrumentation, documentation and any information contained therein may not be used, duplicated or disclosed to anyone , in whole or in part, other than as authorized in a fully executed R&P End User Lice nse Agreement or with the express written permission of R&P. Partisol and the rp logo are registered trademarks of Rupprecht & Patashnick Co., Inc. Other trademarks are the property of their respective holders. Mention of s pecific product names (other than R&P products) in this manual does not constitute an endorsement or recommendation by R&P of that equipment. StreamlineTM is a trademark of Chinook Engineering, LLC. PAGE II

Revision B.003 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler Safety Notice Safety NoticeSafety NoticeSafety NoticeSafety NoticeSafety Notice Repair of instrumentation manufactured by Rupprecht & Patashnick Co., Inc. (R&P) should only be attempted by properly trained service personnel, and should only be conducted in accordance with the R&P system documentation. Do not tamper with this hardware. High voltages may be present in all instrument enclosures. Use established safety precautions when working with this instrument. Instrument is supplied with a grounded three-prong plug designed for interior use only. Do not use this instrument outdoors or in an uncontrolled interior environment without the proper exterior power connection. The Partisol stand must be anchored when installed outdoors to prevent tipping o f the sampler and/or stand in high winds. Some assembly of the sample inlet and WINS impactor is required for installation and regular maintenance. Care should be taken when assembling the WINS impactor or inlet to prevent pinching fingers between the assembly parts. The seller cannot foresee all possible modes of operation in which the user may attempt to utilize this instrumentation. The user assumes all liability associat ed with the use of this instrumentation. The seller further disclaims any responsibility for consequential damages. Use of this product in any manner not intended by the manufacturer will void the safety protection provided by the equipment, and may damage the equipment and subject the user to injury. PAGE III

Revision B.003 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler W WWWWWarranty (U.S.) arranty (U.S.)arranty (U.S.)arranty (U.S.)arranty (U.S.)arranty (U.S.) Unless otherwise agreed upon in writing by authorized personnel of Rupprecht & Patashnick Co., Inc. (R&P) and the purchaser, the following warranty shall be in force for equipment sold and operated in the United States of America. R&P warrants that the R&P-supplied equipment shall be free from defects in mater ial or workmanship for a period of three-hundred sixty-five (365) days after the dat e of shipment. Subject to the conditions of this provision, R&P agrees to repair or r eplace, free of charge, any components of the equipment found to be defective in materia l or workmanship during the warranty period. Purchaser shall notify R&P of any detect ed defects and shall return any equipment believed to be defective to R&P, suitably insured and at the purchaser s expense. In the event R&P determines the equipment returned for warranty correction is not defective within the terms of the warran ty, purchaser shall be responsible for all costs of handling and return transportati on. R&P s sole responsibility under the warranty shall be, at R&P s option, to either repair or replace any component that fails during the warranty period due to a d efect in workmanship and/or material, provided purchaser has promptly reported same to R&P and R&P has, upon inspection, found such components to be defective. The above warranty is contingent upon the proper use of the equipment (i.e., ope ration and maintenance in accordance with the procedures set forth in the provided oper ation manual(s)) and does not cover equipment that has been modified without R&P s approval, or which has been subjected to abuse or unusual physical or electrical stress. This warranty does not cover any optional personal computer equipment or operati ng system software supplied with the equipment beyond the warranty period provided by the manufacturer of the computer. The customer is responsible for obtaining a lo cal, third party service agreement for computer service requirements beyond the warra nty term of the computer. THE ABOVE IS A LIMITED WARRANTY AND IS THE ONLY WARRANTY MADE BY R&P. R&P DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING ALL WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE STATED EXPRESS WARRANTY

IS IN LIEU OF ALL LIABILITIES OR OBLIGATIONS OF R&P FOR DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE DELIVERY, USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THE EQUIPMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL R&P BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, EXEMPLARY OR INDIRECT DAMAGES EVEN IF IT HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. PAGE IV

Revision B.003 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler Equipment Rating Equipment RatingEquipment RatingEquipment RatingEquipment RatingEquipment Rating

The following information can be used to determine the power service requirement s of this product. Line Voltage 115 V ~ 60 Hz 380 VA 230 V ~ 50 Hz 380 VA IMPORTANT: IMPORTANT:IMPORTANT:IMPORTANT:IMPORTANT:IMPORTANT: Disconnect the power cord fro m the power source (output) while servicing the instrument to prevent electrical hazard. Only reach as far as needed to adjust the mass flow controller (MFC) in the pump compartment. There may be a hazardous line (wire) accessible in the rear of the pump compartment. There are two fuses in the transformer wiring harness. Both fuses are in the Sec ondary of the Transformer. The fuse values are T 4A 250V and T 5A 250V. FUSE TABLE Reference designation Transformer Secondary Transformer Secondary Fuse T 4A 250V T 5A 250V Location Transformer Wiring Harness Transformer Wiring Harness Environmental Ranges The instrument operates effectively in the following temperature range: -40 to 50 C. NOTE: If the user operates the instrument in temperatures below -25 C, the unit may require an optional insulating jacket. Contact R&P for further information. Installation Category PAGE V Category 11

Revision B.003 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler Electrical & Safety Conformity Electrical & Safety ConformityElectrical & Safety ConformityElectrical & Safety ConformityElectrical & Safety ConformityElectrical & Safety Conformity This product has been tested by Intertek Testing Services, and has been document ed to be in compliance with the following U.S. and Canadian standards: UL Standard 3101-1 CAN/CSA C22.2 NO. 1010.1 Rupprecht & Patashnick Co., Inc. certifies that this product operates in complia nce with the EC Directive 89/336/EEC in reference to electrical emissions and immuni ty. Specifically, the equipment meets the requirements of EN50081-1:1992, Class B (Emissions) and EN50082-1:1997 (Immunity). In addition, the hardware has been tested for personal or fire safety hazards, a nd meets the requirements of EN61010-1 (Safety) in fulfillment of EC Directive 73/23/EEC. PAGE VI

Revision B.003 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler U. S. EP U. S. EPU. S. EPU. S. EPU. S. EPU. S. EPA AAAAA Quality QualityQualityQualityQualityQuality Assurance Specifications Assurance SpecificationsAssurance SpecificationsAssurance SpecificationsAssuranc e SpecificationsAssurance Specifications The operating manual includes references to U.S. EPA 2.12 Quality Assurance Handbook Volume II, Part II. Partisol-Plus Model 2025 Air Samplers which are installed as part of a U.S. EPA monitoring network, or which must meet U.S. EPA monitoring requirements must follow the procedures found in the 2.12 Quality Assurance Handbook. If there is any conflict between the instructions or procedu res in this operating manual and those found in the 2.12 Quality Assurance Handbook, the 2.12 specifications and procedures take precedence. A copy of U.S. EPA 2.12 Quality Assurance Handbook may be obtained from the AMTIC web site: http://www.epa.gov/ttn/amtic/pmqa.html or the QC coordinator at any EPA Regional Office, or the Monitoring and Quality Assurance Group (MD-14), U.S. EPA, Research Triangle Park, NC 27711. PAGE VII

Revision B.003 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler Section Revision List Section Revision ListSection Revision ListSection Revision ListSection Revision ListSection Revision List As R&P instrumentation changes, so do our operating and service manuals. However , these changes may affect only one aspect of an instrument, while leaving the instrument as a whole unchanged. To explain these individual changes to our customers, R&P will update only those sections of its operating and service manu als that are affected by the instrument updates or improvements. As each manual sect ion changes, so does its revision number, which is located at the top right corner o f each page of each section. To help our customers keep track of the changes to the Partisol-FRM Model 2000 P M 2.5 Air Sampler and its operating manual, following is a list of the manual sect ions with their respective revision numbers: Section Number and Description Revision Number Section 1: Introduction B.002 Section 2: Hardware Installation B.002 Section 3: Filter Handling and Exchange B.001 Section 4: Software Overview B.001 Section 5: Software Setup and Operation B.003 Section 6: Sampler Operation B.001 Section 7: On-Screen Operating Information B.001 Section 8: Viewing and Transmitting Stored Data B.001 Section 9: Data Output B.000 Section 10: Routine Maintenance and Verification B.002 Procedures Section 11: Calibration Procedures B.001 Section 12: Resetting the Sampler B.000 Appendix A: Overview of Software Screens B.001 Appendix B: Program Register Codes B.001 PAGE VIII

Revision B.003 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler Section Revision List continued Section Revision List continuedSection Revision List continuedSection Revision L ist continuedSection Revision List continuedSection Revision List continued Section Number and Description Revision Number Appendix Appendix Appendix Appendix Appendix Appendix Appendix PAGE IX C: D: E: F: G: H: I: Hardware Connections B.000 Two-Way Serial Communication B.000 Installing New System Software B.001 Consumables and Parts B.001 Filter Log B.000 Inlet Maintenance B.001 Inlet Conversion B.001

Revision B.003 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler T TTTTTable of Contents able of Contentsable of Contentsable of Contentsable of Contentsable of Contents SECTION 1: INTRODUCTION......................................................... ...................1-1 1.1. Advanced Features ......................................................... ......... 1-3 1.2. Organization of Manual..................................................... .......1-5 1.3. Flow Schematic............................................................. ...........1-8 SECTION 2: HARDWARE INSTALLATION ............................................... ............. 2-1 2.1. Standard Hardware Configuration ........................................... 2-1 2.2. Setting Up the Sampler..................................................... .......2-2 2.3. Partisol Stand............................................................. ..............2-6 2.4. Hardware Considerations ................................................... ..... 2-8 2.5. Adjusting the Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) .............................. 2 -9 SECTION 3: FILTER HANDLING AND EXCHANGE ........................................ ......... 3-1 3.1. Filter Handling and Initial Inspection .................................... .... 3-1 3.2. Initial Filter Equilibration .............................................. ............. 3-2

3.3. Initial Filter Weighing.................................................... ............3-3 3.4. Filter Exchange ........................................................... ............. 3-6 3.5. Post-Collection Equilibration ............................................. ....... 3-9 3.6. Post-Collection Weighing .................................................. ..... 3-10 3.7. Computation of Mass Concentration ..................................... 3-1 2 SECTION 4: SOFTWARE OVERVIEW ................................................... .............. 4-1 4.1. Turning On the Partisol-FRM Sampler .................................... 41 4.2. Title Screen .............................................................. ................ 4-2 4.3. Main Screen................................................................ .............4-3 4.4. Navigating Among Screens .................................................. ... 4-6 4.5. Edit Mode ................................................................. ................ 4-9 SECTION 5: SOFTWARE SETUP AND OPERATION ........................................ ....... 5-1 5.1. Setup Screen .............................................................. ............. 5-1 5.2. Filter Setup Screen ....................................................... ........... 5-4 5.3. Operational Modes ......................................................... ......... 5-7

5.4. Turning off the Partisol-FRM Sampler ................................... 511 5.5. Automatic Switching of Edit Modes and Screens .................. 5-12 5.6. Operation After Power Failure ............................................. .. 5-13 5.7. Password Protection ....................................................... ....... 5-14 5.7.1. Turning On Password Protection ................................... 5-14 5.7.2. Turning Off Password Protection ................................... 5-14 PAGE X

Revision B.003 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler Table of Contents (continued) SECTION 6: SAMPLER OPERATION ................................................... ............... 6-1 6.1. Pre-Sampling Verification ................................................. ....... 6-1 6.2. Programming Sampler Setup ................................................. . 6-5 6.3. Post Sampling Verification and Data Retrieval ........................ 6-7 SECTION 7: ON-SCREEN OPERATING INFORMATION ..................................... ..... 7-1 7.1. Status Codes .............................................................. ............. 7-1 7.2. Statistics Screen ......................................................... ............. 7-3 7.3. Diagnostics Screen ........................................................ .......... 7-5 SECTION 8: VIEWING AND TRANSMITTING STORED DATA ................................ .... 8-1 8.1. Filter Data ............................................................... ................. 8-2 8.2. Interval Data ............................................................. ............... 8-6 8.3. Downloading Stored Data ................................................... ..... 8-8 8.3.1. Format of Filter Data Records .......................................... 8-9 8.3.2. Format of Interval Data Records .................................... 8-10

SECTION 9: DATA OUTPUT ......................................................... .................. 9-1 9.1. User Analog Output ........................................................ ......... 9-1 9.2. Configuring the RS232 Port ................................................ ..... 9-1 SECTION 10: ROUTINE MAINTENANCE AND VERIFICATION PROCEDURES .............. 10-1 10.1. Routine Maintenance Procedures ......................................... 1 0-1 10.2. Performance Verification Procedures .................................... 1 0-3 10.2.1. Ambient Temperature Audit ........................................... 10 -3 10.2.2. Filter Temperature Audit................................................ . 10-4 10.2.3. Pressure Audit ......................................................... ....... 10-5 10.2.4. External Leak Check .................................................... .. 10-6 10.2.4.1. Automatic External Leak Check ............................... 10-6 10.2.4.2. Manual External Leak Check....................................10-9 10.2.5. Flow Audit ............................................................. ........ 10-11 10.2.6. Internal Leak Test ..................................................... .... 10-14 SECTION 11: CALIBRATION PROCEDURES ............................................. ......... 11-1 11.1. Interface Board Calibration ..............................................

...... 11-1 11.2. Analog Input Calibration.................................................. .......11-4 11.3. Ambient Temperature Calibration .......................................... 11-8 11.4. Filter Temperature Calibration ........................................... .... 11-9 11.5. Ambient Pressure Calibration ............................................. . 11-10 11.6. Flow Calibration ......................................................... .......... 11-11 PAGE XI

Revision B.003 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler Table of Contents (continued) 11.6.1. Single-Point Flow Calibration ....................................... 11 -11 11.6.2. Five-Point Flow Calibration...........................................11 -14 SECTION 12: RESETTING THE SAMPLER .............................................. .......... 12-1 12.1. Resetting Operating Parameters ........................................... 12-1 12.2. Resetting Data Storage ................................................... ...... 12-1 12.3. Performing a Hardware Reset .............................................. . 12-2 12.4. Resetting Password Protection............................................. .12-2 APPENDIX A: OVERVIEW OF SCREENS ................................................ ........... A-1 APPENDIX B: PROGRAM REGISTER CODES ............................................. ........ B-1 APPENDIX C: HARDWARE CONNECTIONS ............................................... ......... C-1 APPENDIX D: TWO-WAY SERIAL COMMUNICATION ....................................... .... D-1 D.1. AK Protocol ............................................................... .............. D-1 APPENDIX E: INSTALLING NEW SYSTEM SOFTWARE ..................................... .... E-1 APPENDIX F: CONSUMABLES AND PARTS ..............................................

...........F-1 F.1. Consumables ............................................................... ............ F-1 F.2. Parts...................................................................... ...................F-3 APPENDIX G: FILTER LOG.......................................................... .................. G-1 APPENDIX H: INLET MAINTENANCE .................................................. .............. H-1 H.1. Maintenance of PM-10 Inlet ................................................ .... H-1 H.1.1. Removing the PM-10 Inlet ............................................... H-1 H.1.2. Maintaining the Top Acceleration Assembly ................... H-3 H.1.3. Maintaining the Lower Collector Assembly ..................... H-4 H.2. Maintenance of the PM-2.5 WINS Impactor ........................... H-5 H.2.1. Removing the WINS Impactor ......................................... H-5 H.2.2. Cleaning the WINS Impactor ........................................... H7 H.2.3. Reinstalling the WINS Impactor .................................... H-10 APPENDIX I: INLET CONVERSION ................................................... ................... I-1 I.1. Partisol-FRM PM-2.5 Components ........................................... I-1 I.2. Partisol-FRM PM-10 Components ............................................ I-3 I.3. Converting the Partisol-FRM from a PM-2.5 Sampler

to a PM-10 Sampler ............................................................. I-5 I.4. Converting the Partisol-FRM from a PM-10 Sampler to a PM-2.5 Sampler .......................................................... I -10 PAGE XII

Revision B.002 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler Section 1: Section 1:Section 1:Section 1:Section 1:Section 1: Introduction IntroductionIntroductionIntroductionIntroductionIntroduction . The Partisol-FRM Sampler builds upon the features first introduced with the original Partisol PM-10 Air Sampler. Figure 1-1. Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler. The Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler (Figure 1-1) is designed to conform to the U.S. EPA Federal Reference Method for fine particulate sampling. Specifically, Rupprecht & Patashnick (R&P) has designed the hardware to exceed o r meet the requirements of CFR 40 Part 50 Appendix L and related drawings supplied by the U.S. EPA. This addition to the Partisol family of samplers builds upon the extensive exper ience gained by R&P in the design and manufacture of the original Partisol PM-10 Air Sampler. This popular sampling platform holds the U.S. EPA reference designation for PM-10 sampling. Many of the design features adopted by the U.S. EPA in the proposed PM-2.5 Federal Reference Method were first introduced into a referenced esignated air sampling method by R&P in the original Partisol Sampler. These include the following: A flow rate of 1 m/h through a single filter. The use of standard 47 mm sample filters with a convenient filter exchange mechanism. Full microprocessor control and data handling. Active volumetric flow control. The Partisol-FRM Sampler contains the U.S. EPA-designed PM-2.5 WINS Impactor, which performs a 2.5 m cut of the incoming particulate matter before the sample stream passes through a 47 mm filter. A modified R&P PM-10 (1st stage) inlet is used at the entrance to the sampler to provide a pre-cut at a 10 m particle size and to protect the sample path against precipitation. The hardware also contains a straightforward filter exchange mechanism, a microprocessor with battery-backed internal data storage, an active volumetric flow control system, and a pump. A fan located in the filter compartment is constantly turned on to ensure that the temperature of the sample filter does not deviate by more than 5 C from the ambient air temperature. Menu-driven software provides convenient access to sampler functions.

As with other manual sampling devices, the filters used in the PartisolFRM Sampler must be conditioned and weighed before exposure, and then conditioned and weighed again after use to determine the mass of the particulate matter collected during the 24-hour exposure time. The Partisol hardware stores the data relevant to each 24-hour collection period in its SECTION 1: INTRODUCTION PAGE 1-1

Revision B.002 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler internal data logger for viewing and/or retrieval after the fact. Such informati on includes the total volume sampled (in volumetric m), total collection time, and t he average ambient temperature and pressure during the collection period. In additi on, the device stores interval data records every five minutes to keep a record of t he temperature of the ambient air and sample filter. SECTION 1: INTRODUCTION PAGE 1-2

Revision B.002 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler . Single-filter trays simplify filter exchange and transportation, and minimize the chances of fingers coming into contact with the 47 mm collection filters. 1.1. 1.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.1. A AAAAADVANCED DVANCEDDVANCEDDVANCEDDVANCEDDVANCED F FFFFFEATURES EATURESEATURESEATURESEATURESEATURES The following is a listing of some of the advanced features contained in the Par tisolFRM Air Sampler: Simplicity of operation, performance audits, and retrieval of stored data are made possible through an embedded microprocessor and menudriven software. An active volumetric flow control system maintains a constant volumetric flow rate at the level specified by the user (default of 16.7 l/min) by incorporating a mass flow controller, and ambient temperature and pressure sensors. Sampled volumes are reported in volumetric terms to conform with U.S. EPA requirements. The U.S. EPA-designated PM-2.5 inlet system provides a 2.5 m cut point by incorporating a 1st stage inlet at the entrance to the hardware and a PM-2.5 WINS impactor inside its enclosure. The sampler uses standard 47 mm filters housed in convenient reusable cassettes. These cassettes are mounted in a single-filter tray for easy exchange and transportation to and from the sampling site. The temperature of the collection filter is maintained within 5 C of the outdoor ambient temperature by a continuous filter compartment ventilation system. Interval data are stored every five minutes, and include the five-minute averages of the filter temperature, ambient temperature, and ambient pressure. Data storage continues both during and after the exposure of the collection filter. The sampler has a capacity of 14 days of five-minute interval data. A record of filter data is stored for each filter used in the device, and includes all U.S. EPA-specified values such as the volume sampled, error condition flagging, and average temperatures and pressures. The sampler has a capacity of 25 filter data records. Low maintenance requirements are made possible through the use of durable components and a proven, long-life vacuum pump. The sampler is easily transported due to its compact form and lightweight

design. Its low noise level makes it appropriate for indoor monitoring. SECTION 1: INTRODUCTION PAGE 1-3

Revision B.002 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler The sampler ships with UL-, CSA- and CE-equivalent electrical and safety approvals. An analog output of 0-5 VDC indicates the current flow rate and the existence of any status conditions. A bidirectional RS232 interface for data transfer to or from a PC or other digital device allows interval and filter data to be retrieved conveniently. The sampler's standard configuration includes basic PC-based communication software for bidirectional information exchange with the system. SECTION 1: INTRODUCTION PAGE 1-4

Revision B.002 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler 1.2. 1.2.1.2.1.2.1.2.1.2. O OOOOORGANIZATION RGANIZATIONRGANIZATIONRGANIZATIONRGANIZATIONRGANIZATION OF OFOFOFOFOF M MMMMMANUAL ANUALANUALANUALANUALANUAL This manual is divided into sections, with each treating a different topic. The first parts deal with the setup of the system's hardware and software, while the later secti ons describe the more-advanced features of the Partisol-FRM Sampler. The user should read and implement the procedures discussed in the earlier sections before using the functions detailed later in the manual. The following listing provides an overvi ew of the topics handled in each section of this manual: Section 1: Introduction This section introduces the user to the advanced features of the Partisol-FRM Sa mpler and describes the flow configuration of the system. It also discusses the flow c ontrol scheme used in the hardware. Section 2: Hardware Installation This section sets forth the instructions for setting up the sampling hardware, a long with its optional stand. Section 3: Filter Handling and Exchange This section describes the handling of the 47 mm collection filters used in the Partisol system, from the initial conditioning of the filter, to the installation of filt er trays in the sampling system, to the post-collection conditioning and weighing of the fil ter. This part also describes how to compute the average particulate concentration ba sed upon the initial and ending filter weights, and the total volume drawn through t he filter. Section 4: Software Overview This section provides an overview of the hierarchy of system screens, along with the instructions for navigating around the software and changing the values of param eters.

Section 5: Software Setup and Operation This section describes the operation of the Partisol-FRM Sampler, including the definition of its sampling program. Section 6: Sampler Operation This section describes the steps involved in verifying the sampler performance characteristics prior to starting a sampling run, programming a sampling run and retreiving data after a sampling run. Section 7: On Screen Operating Information The Partisol-FRM Sampler displays a variety of information regarding the state o f the system, ranging from status codes to screens that display the current values of operating parameters. This section details the types of diagnostic information a vailable to the user. SECTION 1: INTRODUCTION PAGE 1-5

Revision B.002 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler Section 8: Viewing and Transmitting Stored Data Interval and filter data stored internally may be viewed on the sampler's screen , or may be downloaded through the RS232 port. This section describes the type of operati onal information stored internally, as well as the means by which this information ca n be transmitted to external devices. Section 9: Data Output The Partisol-FRM Sampler transmits current flow rate and operational information through an analog output channel, and can provide digital data through its bidir ectional RS232 port. This section provides the information necessary to make effective use of these data output possibilities. Section 10: Routine Maintenance and Verification Procedures This section describes the steps taken to verify the sampler's performance, as w ell as the procedures involved in maintaining the consistent operation of the hardware. Section 11: Calibration Procedures This section sets forth the procedures involved in calibrating the ambient tempe rature sensor, ambient pressure sensor, filter temperature sensor, and the automatic ma ss flow controller of the sampler. Section 12: Resetting the Sampler This section describes the means by which the user can reset the instrument's parameter set points and internal data storage. Appendix A: Overview of Software Screens This appendix displays the menu tree of the Partisol-FRM Sampler, as well as all display screens of the software. Appendix B: Program Register Codes All important system variables, parameters and current results are stored in socalled Program Register Codes (PRCs). These codes, which are listed in this appendix, are important when communicating with the sampler remotely through its RS232 interface. Appendix C: Hardware Connections

This appendix describes the hardware pin-outs of the data connectors incorporate d in the sampler. Appendix D: Two-Way Serial Communication This appendix describes the two-way serial communication capabilities of the hardware. SECTION 1: INTRODUCTION PAGE 1-6

Revision B.002 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler Appendix E: Installing New System Software This appendix sets forth the manner in which EPROM's are replaced in the Partiso lFRM hardware. Appendix F: Consumables and Parts This appendix contains a list of consumables and spare parts available for the M odel 2000 sampler. Appendix G: Filter Log This appendix contains a filter log that can be employed as a quality assurance tool to track the history of each filter used in the sampler. Appendix H: Inlet Maintenance This appendix describes the maintenance procedures for the PM-10 inlet and PM-2. 5 WINS impactor. Appendix I: Inlet Conversion This appendix describes the components of the PM-2.5 WINS impactor sampler configuration and the PM-10 sampler configuration, and the procedures for conver ting the Partisol-FRM from a PM-2.5 to a PM-10 sampler. SECTION 1: INTRODUCTION PAGE 1-7

Revision B.002 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler Figure 1-2. System flow schematic. 1.3. 1.3.1.3.1.3.1.3.1.3. F FFFFFLOW LOWLOWLOWLOWLOW S SSSSSCHEMATIC CHEMATICCHEMATICCHEMATICCHEMATICCHEMATIC The system flow schematic provides an overview of the hardware's flow and electronic connections (Figure 1-2). The schematic shows a PM-10 inlet that is followed by a down tube and WINS PM-2.5 Impactor. The WINS Impactor is located inside the sampler enclosure. A 47 mm Teflon filter is housed in a filter casset te that the user installs in a single-filter tray. The tray makes the easy exchange of f ilters possible in the sampler's filter exchange mechanism, and minimizes the chances o f fingers coming into contact with the collection filter. SECTION 1: INTRODUCTION PAGE 1-8

Revision B.002 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler . The Partisol-FRM Sampler actively maintains a constant volumetric flow rate at the user-defined set point (16.7 l/min by default). An in-line filter downstream of the sample filter protects the mass flow control ler from any particles that may remain in the air flow. The mass flow controller operates under the control of the sampler s microprocessor, and maintains the sample stream at a constant volumetric flow rate (16.7 l/min default) through the use of ambient temperature and pressure sensors. The accumulator minimizes pulsations caused by the vacuum pump, while the pump built into the Partisol-FRM Sampler is the same highly-reliable model built into the original Partisol Model 2000 Air Sampler. The Partisol-FRM Sampler maintains a constant volumetric flow rate at the set po int entered by the user (usually 16.7 l/min), and reports sampled volumes (m) in volumetric terms in accordance with new U.S. EPA guidelines. The sampling system determines the ambient temperature and pressure for flow rat e calculations through the use of sensors that continually provide updated informa tion to the microprocessor system. The mass flow controller in the Partisol-FRM Sampler is calibrated at a temperat ure of 0 C and pressure of 1 atmosphere (1013.2 millibars or 760 mm Hg). For the devi ce to sample at the correct volumetric flow rate, it makes use of the measured ambi ent temperature and pressure. Using this information, the microprocessor calculates the correct mass flow set point (Flow RateSTP) required to achieve the desired volum etric flow setting: 273.15 Ave Pres Flow RateSTP = Flow RateVol x Ave Temp + 273.15 760 where:

Flow RateSTP = Control set point of the mass flow meter (equivalent flow at 0 C and 1 atmosphere). Flow RateVol = Volumetric flow rate set point (l/min) as entered by the user in the Setup Screen (Section 5). This value is 16.7 l/min (1 m3/h) for most applications. Ave Temp =

The current temperature (C) as measured by the temperature sensor mounted on the down tube of the sampler. Ave Pres = The current pressure (mm Hg) as measured by the pressure transducer in the sampler's enclosure. Mass concentration data reported to the U.S. EPA must be in volumetric m, which simply involves integrating the above volumetric flow rate over the sampling per iod, without any further adjustment. The Partisol-FRM Sampler automatically determine s the sampled volume in volumetric m for each filter exposed, and stores this information internally for later viewing or downloading (Section 7). SECTION 1: INTRODUCTION PAGE 1-9

Revision B.002 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler This page left intentionally blank. SECTION 1: INTRODUCTION PAGE 1-10

Revision B.002 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler Section 2: Section 2:Section 2:Section 2:Section 2:Section 2: Hardware Installation Hardware InstallationHardware InstallationHardware InstallationHardware Installa tionHardware Installation This section describes the installation of the Partisol-FRM Sampler, along with the setup of the optional support stand. This part also covers a number of operation al considerations. 2.1. 2.1.2.1.2.1.2.1.2.1. S SSSSSTANDARD TANDARDTANDARDTANDARDTANDARDTANDARD H HHHHHARDWARE ARDWAREARDWAREARDWAREARDWAREARDWARE C CCCCCONFIGURATION ONFIGURATIONONFIGURATIONONFIGURATIONONFIGURATIONONFIGURATION The following is a listing of the standard components provided with a Partisol h ub unit: Partisol-FRM enclosure with WINS PM-2.5 impactor and filter ex change mechanism PM-10 sample inlet 3 rain hoods and associated hardware Sample tube Ambient temperature sensor and cable Dual filter transport container with cassettes and carriers Flow audit adapter Box of 25 glass filters, 37 mm diameter Bottle of WINS impactor oil, 30 ml Analog input calibration cable Mating cable connector for four-pin user-output connector AKCOMM software diskette 9-to-9 pin computer cable 2 Operating Manuals

1 Service Manual 1 Quick Start Guide SECTION 2: HARDWARE INSTALLATION PAGE 2-1

Revision B.002 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler 2.2. 2.2.2.2.2.2.2.2.2.2. S SSSSSETTING ETTINGETTINGETTINGETTINGETTING U UUUUUP PPPPP THE THETHETHETHETHE S SSSSSAMPLER AMPLERAMPLERAMPLERAMPLERAMPLER Follow the procedure below to set up the hub unit: Follow the procedure below to set up the hub unit:Follow the procedure below to set up the hub unit:Follow the procedure below to set up the hub unit:Follow the procedure below to set up the hub unit:Follow the procedure below to set up the hub unit: NOTE: The Partisol-FRM Sampler should be fitted with its optional insulating jacket (10-004146) in the wintertime for locations at which temperatures are expected to drop below -30 C on a regular basis. Refer to Appendix F for a complete listing of part numbers. 1) 1)1)1)1)1) When moving the instrument, be sure to lift the unit by using the When moving the instrument, be sure to lift the unit by using theWhen moving the instrument, be sure to lift the unit by using theWhen moving the instrument, be sure to lift the unit by using theWhen moving the instrument, be sure to lift t he unit by using theWhen moving the instrument, be sure to lift the unit by usin g the two handles. two handles.two handles.two handles.two handles.two handles. 2) 2)2)2)2)2) Cut any tie wraps and remove any transport restraints from inside Cut any tie wraps and remove any transport restraints from insideCut any tie wra ps and remove any transport restraints from insideCut any tie wraps and remove a ny transport restraints from insideCut any tie wraps and remove any transport re straints from insideCut any tie wraps and remove any transport restraints from i nside the sampler enclosure. the sampler enclosure.the sampler enclosure.the sampler enclosure.the sampler en closure.the sampler enclosure. 3) 3)3)3)3)3) Install the large rain hood on the right side of the enclosure (FigInstall the large rain hood on the right side of the enclosure (Fig-Install the large rain hood on the right side of the enclosure (Fig-Install the large rain h ood on the right side of the enclosure (Fig-Install the large rain hood on the r ight side of the enclosure (Fig-Install the large rain hood on the right side of the enclosure (Figure 2-1). The rain hood should cover both air filters. ure 2-1). The rain hood should cover both air filters.ure 2-1). The rain hood sh ould cover both air filters.ure 2-1). The rain hood should cover both air filter s.ure 2-1). The rain hood should cover both air filters.ure 2-1). The rain hood should cover both air filters. a) Peel back the paper facing of the larger gasket and apply it to the larger ra

in hood. b) Place the large rain hood with its gasket attached on the enclosure. c) Secure the rain hood to the unit using four (4) #10-32 x 1/2" thumb screws. Figure 2-1. Partisol-FRM Sampler with a small rain hood (left) and a large rain hood (right). 4) 4)4)4)4)4) Install the two small rain hoods (Figure 2-1). One rain hood is Install the two small rain hoods (Figure 2-1). One rain hood isInstall the two s mall rain hoods (Figure 2-1). One rain hood isInstall the two small rain hoods ( Figure 2-1). One rain hood isInstall the two small rain hoods (Figure 2-1). One rain hood isInstall the two small rain hoods (Figure 2-1). One rain hood is installed on the left side of the enclosure and the other on the installed on the left side of the enclosure and the other on theinstalled on the left side of the enclosure and the other on theinstalled on the left side of th e enclosure and the other on theinstalled on the left side of the enclosure and the other on theinstalled on the left side of the enclosure and the other on the back. Each rain hood covers one fan opening. back. Each rain hood covers one fan opening.back. Each rain hood covers one fan opening.back. Each rain hood covers one fan opening.back. Each rain hood covers one fan opening.back. Each rain hood covers one fan opening. SECTION 2: HARDWARE INSTALLATION PAGE 2-2

Revision B.002 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler a) of b) c) d) Peel back the paper facing of one of the smaller gaskets and apply it to one the smaller rain hoods. Place the small rain hood with its gasket attached hood on the enclosure. Secure the rain hood to the unit using four (4) #10-32 x 1/2" thumb screws. Repeat this procedure for the other small rain hood.

5) 5)5)5)5)5) Install the sample tube and PM-10 inlet (Figure 2-2). Install the sample tube and PM-10 inlet (Figure 2-2).Install the sample tube and PM-10 inlet (Figure 2-2).Install the sample tube and PM-10 inlet (Figure 2-2).I nstall the sample tube and PM-10 inlet (Figure 2-2).Install the sample tube and PM-10 inlet (Figure 2-2). NOTE: Examine the sample tube. Some sample tubes are machined down to a smaller diameter on both ends. The machining on one end extends for 5 cm (2 inches), while the machining on the opposite end extends only 3 cm (1.25 inches). a) Insert the end of the sample tube with the 5 cm (2 inches) machined section into the bulkhead of the sampler. Ensure that the tube is pushed into the enclos ure through the final O-ring until it hits a stop. b) Turn the dome connector on the bulkhead to ensure a tight grip. c) Place the PM-10 inlet on the end with 3 cm (1.25 inches) of machining. Ensure that the tube is pushed past the inlet s two O-rings, which provide some resistance, and hits a stop. In its final sampling configuration, the entrance to the inlet must be approxima tely 2 m above the ground (6 to 7 feet). An optional stand (57-004644) described in Section 2.3 provides a convenient means of installing the sampler. Figure 2-2. Sample tube with the modified PM-10 inlet installed. SECTION 2: HARDWARE INSTALLATION PAGE 2-3

Revision B.002 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler 6) 6)6)6)6)6) Connect the hub to the electric supply in a manner that meets all Connect the hub to the electric supply in a manner that meets allConnect the hub to the electric supply in a manner that meets allConnect the hub to the electri c supply in a manner that meets allConnect the hub to the electric supply in a m anner that meets allConnect the hub to the electric supply in a manner that meet s all safety and regulatory requirements for the hardware s intended safety and regulatory requirements for the hardware s intendedsafety and regulator y requirements for the hardware s intendedsafety and regulatory requirements for t he hardware s intendedsafety and regulatory requirements for the hardware s intended safety and regulatory requirements for the hardware s intended use. use.use.use.use.use. The wires inside the power cord are defined by the following colors, which are different for 115 and 230 VAC configurations: 115 VAC 230 VAC Line Black or Brown Brown Neutral White or Blue Blue Common Ground Green or Green/Yellow Green/Yellow For 115 VAC configurations of the Partisol system, the standard three-pronged U.S. plug is provided at the end of the power cord. or some types of indoor installations, and may have to connecting hardware for certain types of indoor and electrical and other safety requirements. WARNING: WARNING:WARNING:WARNING:WARNING:WARNING: Use of the plug out of doors or in and uncontrolled interior environment may present a hazard. This plug is intended only f be replaced by other outdoor locations to meet supplied 115 VAC three-prong severe electrical shock

For 230 VAC configurations of the Partisol system, the standard two-pronged European plug is provided at the end of the power cord. This plug is intended on ly for some types of indoor installations, and may have to be replaced by other connecting hardware for certain types of indoor and outdoor locations to meet electrical and other safety requirements. WARNING: WARNING:WARNING:WARNING:WARNING:WARNING: Use of the supplied 230 VAC two-prong p lug out of doors or in and uncontrolled interior environment may present a severe electrical shock hazard. 7) 7)7)7)7)7) Install the ambient temperature sensor. Install the ambient temperature sensor.Install the ambient temperature sensor.In stall the ambient temperature sensor.Install the ambient temperature sensor.Inst all the ambient temperature sensor. a) Locate the two screws installed on the left side of the enclosure.

b) Remove the two screws, being careful not to lose the washers, if installed. This will expose two holes. c) Locate the ambient temperature probe assembly in the compilation package. d) Place the ambient temperature probe assembly over the two holes in the left side of the sampler enclosure (Figure 2-3). SECTION 2: HARDWARE INSTALLATION PAGE 2-4

Revision B.002 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler Figure 2-3 (left). Ambient temperature probe assembly mounted on the enclosure. Figure 2-4 (right). Ambient temperature probe plugged into the TEMPERATURE SENSOR connector. e) If R&P supplied the sampler with washers, secure the assembly to the enclosure using the screws and washers previously removed. Place the washers between the ambient temperature bracket and the enclosure not under the head of the screw then insert the screws into the bracket. The washers provide a watertight seal to prevent leakage of water into the electronics compartment. f) If R&P supplied the sampler without washers, secure the assembly to the enclosure using the screws previously removed. In this case, leak tightness is achieved on the inside of the electronics compartment through the use of selfsea ling components. g) Plug the ambient temperature probe into the connector on the back panel of the sampler labeled TEMPERATURE SENSOR (Figure 2-4). 8) 8)8)8)8)8) Prepare the WINS PM-2.5 impactor for use (Appendix H). Prepare the WINS PM-2.5 impactor for use (Appendix H).Prepare the WINS PM-2.5 im pactor for use (Appendix H).Prepare the WINS PM-2.5 impactor for use (Appendix H ).Prepare the WINS PM-2.5 impactor for use (Appendix H).Prepare the WINS PM-2.5 impactor for use (Appendix H). 9) 9)9)9)9)9) Install a 47 mm filter in the sampler (Section 3). Ensure that the Install a 47 mm filter in the sampler (Section 3). Ensure that theInstall a 47 m m filter in the sampler (Section 3). Ensure that theInstall a 47 mm filter in th e sampler (Section 3). Ensure that theInstall a 47 mm filter in the sampler (Sec tion 3). Ensure that theInstall a 47 mm filter in the sampler (Section 3). Ensur e that the sampler is not powered up. sampler is not powered up.sampler is not powered up.sampler is not powered up.sa mpler is not powered up.sampler is not powered up. 10 1010101010) ))))) After the system is powered up according to the instructions in After the system is powered up according to the instructions inAfter the system is powered up according to the instructions inAfter the system is powered up acc ording to the instructions inAfter the system is powered up according to the ins tructions inAfter the system is powered up according to the instructions in Section 4, perform the leak check described in Section 10.2. Section 4, perform the leak check described in Section 10.2.Section 4, perform t he leak check described in Section 10.2.Section 4, perform the leak check descri bed in Section 10.2.Section 4, perform the leak check described in Section 10.2.

Section 4, perform the leak check described in Section 10.2. SECTION 2: HARDWARE INSTALLATION PAGE 2-5

Revision B.002 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler 2.3. 2.3.2.3.2.3.2.3.2.3. P PPPPPARTISOL ARTISOLARTISOLARTISOLARTISOLARTISOL S SSSSSTAND TANDTANDTANDTANDTAND The Partisol Stand (R&P part number 57-004644) aids in the installation of the Partisol-FRM Sampler, and ensures that the inlet is at the appropriate height. F igure 2-5 shows the mounting of the unit on the stand. WARNING: WARNING:WARNING:WARNING:WARNING:WARNING: The Partisol-FRM stand must be anchored or otherwise secured at the monitoring site. The Partisol-FRM/ Stand could present a tipping hazard in high wind conditions if the stand is not properly anchored. Figure 2-5. Partisol-FRM Sampler mounted on optional stand. Figure 2-6 contains a listing of parts, as well as other assembly information fo r the stand. Put this hardware together in accordance with the diagram shown in this f igure. SECTION 2: HARDWARE INSTALLATION PAGE 2-6

Revision B.002 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler Figure 2-6. Assembly information for the optional Partisol Stand. SECTION 2: HARDWARE INSTALLATION PAGE 2-7

Revision B.002 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler . A fan and heater provide cooling and heating for the sampler. 2.4. 2.4.2.4.2.4.2.4.2.4. H HHHHHARDWARE ARDWAREARDWAREARDWAREARDWAREARDWARE C CCCCCONSIDERATIONS ONSIDERATIONSONSIDERATIONSONSIDERATIONSONSIDERATIONSONSIDERATIONS A number of systems internal to the Partisol-FRM Sampler are designed to maintai n acceptable operating conditions within the hardware. Based upon the temperature measured on the interface circuit board in the electr onics compartment, the device either turns on a cooling fan if temperatures become war m or turns on a heater if temperatures drop. This is done according to the followi ng rules. The cooling fan in the pump compartment turns on if the temperature measured on the interface board exceeds 30 C, and turns off again once the temperature falls below 25 C. The heater in the electronics compartment turns on if the temperature measured on the interface board drops below 15 C, and turns off again once the temperature rises above 20 C. The sample pump is always on when sampling takes place. When the device is not sampling, the sample pump turns on under the cold-weather conditions listed belo w. In such a case, the flow through the pump enters the system through a valve that regulates the bypass stream to the flow controller. The pump turns on continuously if the ambient temperature falls below -5 C, and turns off again once the ambient temperature reaches 10 C. If the temperature measured on the interface board drops below a certain level, the system electronics cannot be guaranteed to operate reliably, and the device ente rs a standby condition. This occurs according to the following rule: If the temperature measured on the interface board drops below -5 C, a standby condition is invoked in which the pump and heaters are turned on continuously until the temperature rises above this level. The system microprocessor is turned off during this standby state. SECTION 2: HARDWARE INSTALLATION PAGE 2-8

Revision B.002 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler 2.5. 2.5.2.5.2.5.2.5.2.5. A AAAAADJUSTING DJUSTINGDJUSTINGDJUSTINGDJUSTINGDJUSTING THE THETHETHETHETHE L LLLLLIQUID IQUIDIQUIDIQUIDIQUIDIQUID C CCCCCRYSTAL RYSTALRYSTALRYSTALRYSTALRYSTAL D DDDDDISPLAY ISPLAYISPLAYISPLAYISPLAYISPLAY (LCD) (LCD)(LCD)(LCD)(LCD)(LCD) Turn the knob on the on the lower left-hand side of the keypad to adjust the con trast of the sampler s liquid crystal display. This knob may be turned both clockwise an d counterclockwise (Figure 2-7). Figure 2-7. LCD contrast adjustment knob. SECTION 2: HARDWARE INSTALLATION PAGE 2-9

Revision B.002 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler This page left intentionally blank. SECTION 2: HARDWARE INSTALLATION PAGE 2-10

Revision B.001 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler Section 3: Section 3:Section 3:Section 3:Section 3:Section 3: Filter Handling and Exchange Filter Handling and ExchangeFilter Handling and ExchangeFilter Handling and Exch angeFilter Handling and ExchangeFilter Handling and Exchange . Never touch filters with fingers. This section covers the initial inspection of 47 mm filters used in the Partisol -FRM Sampler, as well as the equilibration and weighing before and after use. Further , it covers their installation and removal in the sampling unit, as well as the compu tation involved in calculating the 24-hour mass concentration average of PM-2.5 as foun d in U. S. EPA 2.12 Quality Assurance Handbook Volume II, Part II Section 7 (Filte r Preparation and Analysis, Section 8 (Field Operation) and Section 11 (Calculatio ns, Validation and Reporting of PM2.5 Monitoring Data). Use the filter log in Append ix G as an aid in record keeping. 3.1. 3.1.3.1.3.1.3.1.3.1. F FFFFFILTER ILTERILTERILTERILTERILTER H HHHHHANDLING ANDLINGANDLINGANDLINGANDLINGANDLING AND ANDANDANDANDAND I IIIIINITIAL NITIALNITIALNITIALNITIALNITIAL I IIIIINSPECTION NSPECTIONNSPECTIONNSPECTIONNSPECTIONNSPECTION The only filter media currently approved by the U.S. EPA for reference method sampling of PM-2.5 in the proposed regulations is Teflon material in a 47 mm diameter size. This is available from R&P in the following form: Teflon Filters, 2.0 m pore size, Box of 50 R&P part number 10-002322-0050 The user must be careful to keep filters clean and never to touch filters with f ingers. Filters should be stored at the laboratory in petri dishes, and should be transp orted to and from the sampling site in the filter transport system supplied by R&P. Only nonserrated forceps should be used to handle the 47 mm filters used in the sampler. Inspect each filter visually for integrity before use. Check for the following: Pinholes Chaff or flashing Loose material Discoloration

Non-uniformity SECTION 3: FILTER HANDLING AND EXCHANGE PAGE 3-1

Revision B.001 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler 3.2. 3.2.3.2.3.2.3.2.3.2. I IIIIINITIAL NITIALNITIALNITIALNITIALNITIAL F FFFFFILTER ILTERILTERILTERILTERILTER E EEEEEQUILIBRATION QUILIBRATIONQUILIBRATIONQUILIBRATIONQUILIBRATIONQUILIBRATION Perform this procedure to equilibrate 47 mm filters before use. Be sure to use p etri dishes to store filters in the laboratory. Follow these steps to equilibriate filters before sampling: Follow these steps to equilibriate filters before sampling:Follow these steps to equilibriate filters before sampling:Follow these steps to equilibriate filters before sampling:Follow these steps to equilibriate filters before sampling:Foll ow these steps to equilibriate filters before sampling: NOTE: Refer to the U.S. EPA 2.12 Quality Assurance Handbook, Section 7, for further information. 1) 1)1)1)1)1) Place a label on the cover of each petri dish and number each Place a label on the cover of each petri dish and number eachPlace a label on th e cover of each petri dish and number eachPlace a label on the cover of each pet ri dish and number eachPlace a label on the cover of each petri dish and number eachPlace a label on the cover of each petri dish and number each dish. dish.dish.dish.dish.dish. 2) 2)2)2)2)2) Place the petri dish cover Place the petri dish coverPlace the petri dish coverPlace the petri dish coverPl ace the petri dish coverPlace the petri dish cover under underunderunderunderunder the bottom half of the dish. the bottom half of the dish.the bottom half of the dish.the bottom half of the d ish.the bottom half of the dish.the bottom half of the dish. 3) 3)3)3)3)3) Place each inspected filter into a separate petri dish. Place each inspected filter into a separate petri dish.Place each inspected filt er into a separate petri dish.Place each inspected filter into a separate petri dish.Place each inspected filter into a separate petri dish.Place each inspected filter into a separate petri dish. 4) 4)4)4)4)4) Record the filter number, relative humidity, temperature, date and Record the filter number, relative humidity, temperature, date andRecord the fil ter number, relative humidity, temperature, date andRecord the filter number, re lative humidity, temperature, date andRecord the filter number, relative humidit y, temperature, date andRecord the filter number, relative humidity, temperature , date and time at the beginning of equilibration. time at the beginning of equilibration.time at the beginning of equilibration.ti me at the beginning of equilibration.time at the beginning of equilibration.time

at the beginning of equilibration. 5) 5)5)5)5)5) Equilibrate each filter for Equilibrate each filter forEquilibrate each filter forEquilibrate each filter fo rEquilibrate each filter forEquilibrate each filter for at least at leastat leastat leastat leastat least 24 hours under the following 24 hours under the following24 hours under the following24 hours under the follo wing24 hours under the following24 hours under the following conditions: conditions:conditions:conditions:conditions:conditions: The equilibration room must be held at a constant relative humidity between 30 and 40% with a variability of not more than 5% relative humidity. The equilibration room must be held at a constant temperature between 20 and 23 C with a variability of not more than 2 C. SECTION 3: FILTER HANDLING AND EXCHANGE PAGE 3-2

Revision B.001 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler . Record the initial filter weight as Wi. . The pre-sampling weighing must take place within 30 days of the sampling period. Figure 3-1. Positioning a 47 mm filter on a balance. 3.3. 3.3.3.3.3.3.3.3.3.3. I IIIIINITIAL NITIALNITIALNITIALNITIALNITIAL F FFFFFILTER ILTERILTERILTERILTERILTER W WWWWWEIGHING EIGHINGEIGHINGEIGHINGEIGHINGEIGHING Follow this procedure to weigh the 47mm collection filters (tare weight) before sampling. Follow these steps to weight the collection filters before sampling: Follow these steps to weight the collection filters before sampling:Follow these steps to weight the collection filters before sampling:Follow these steps to we ight the collection filters before sampling:Follow these steps to weight the col lection filters before sampling:Follow these steps to weight the collection filt ers before sampling: NOTE: Refer to the U.S. EPA 2.12 Quality Assurance Handbook, Section 7, for further information. 1) 1)1)1)1)1) Ensure that each filter has been equilibrated for at least 24 hours Ensure that each filter has been equilibrated for at least 24 hoursEnsure that e ach filter has been equilibrated for at least 24 hoursEnsure that each filter ha s been equilibrated for at least 24 hoursEnsure that each filter has been equili brated for at least 24 hoursEnsure that each filter has been equilibrated for at least 24 hours before weighing. before weighing.before weighing.before weighing.before weighing.before weighing. 2) 2)2)2)2)2) Filters must be weighed on a microbalance with a resolution of at Filters must be weighed on a microbalance with a resolution of atFilters must be weighed on a microbalance with a resolution of atFilters must be weighed on a m icrobalance with a resolution of atFilters must be weighed on a microbalance wit h a resolution of atFilters must be weighed on a microbalance with a resolution of at least 1 g (0.001 mg). Ensure that the balance has been allowed least 1 g (0.001 mg). Ensure that the balance has been allowedleast 1 g (0.001 mg) . Ensure that the balance has been allowedleast 1 g (0.001 mg). Ensure that the b alance has been allowedleast 1 g (0.001 mg). Ensure that the balance has been all owedleast 1 g (0.001 mg). Ensure that the balance has been allowed

to warm up before performing any weighings. to warm up before performing any weighings.to warm up before performing any weig hings.to warm up before performing any weighings.to warm up before performing an y weighings.to warm up before performing any weighings. 3) 3)3)3)3)3) Weigh each filter at least once (three times recommended), reWeigh each filter at least once (three times recommended), re-Weigh each filter at least once (three times recommended), re-Weigh each filter at least once (thr ee times recommended), re-Weigh each filter at least once (three times recommend ed), re-Weigh each filter at least once (three times recommended), recording the mass in grams (Figure 3-1). The average mass cording the mass in grams (Figure 3-1). The average masscording the mass in gram s (Figure 3-1). The average masscording the mass in grams (Figure 3-1). The aver age masscording the mass in grams (Figure 3-1). The average masscording the mass in grams (Figure 3-1). The average mass reading is the initial filter weight, W reading is the initial filter weight, Wreading is the initial filter weight, Wre ading is the initial filter weight, Wreading is the initial filter weight, Wread ing is the initial filter weight, Wi iiiii. Use appropriate techniques . Use appropriate techniques. Use appropriate techniques. Use appropriate techni ques. Use appropriate techniques. Use appropriate techniques to neutralize static charges on the filter. This pre-sampling weighto neutralize static charges on the filter. This pre-sampling weigh-to neutraliz e static charges on the filter. This pre-sampling weigh-to neutralize static cha rges on the filter. This pre-sampling weigh-to neutralize static charges on the filter. This pre-sampling weigh-to neutralize static charges on the filter. This pre-sampling weighing must take place within 30 days of the sampling period, as ing must take place within 30 days of the sampling period, asing must take place within 30 days of the sampling period, asing must take place within 30 days of the sampling period, asing must take place within 30 days of the sampling period , asing must take place within 30 days of the sampling period, as specified in 2.12 Quality Assurance Handbook, Section 7. specified in 2.12 Quality Assurance Handbook, Section 7.specified in 2.12 Qualit y Assurance Handbook, Section 7.specified in 2.12 Quality Assurance Handbook, Se ction 7.specified in 2.12 Quality Assurance Handbook, Section 7.specified in 2.1 2 Quality Assurance Handbook, Section 7. SECTION 3: FILTER HANDLING AND EXCHANGE PAGE 3-3

Revision B.001 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler 4) 4)4)4)4)4) Immediately place each weighed filter into an open filter cassette Immediately place each weighed filter into an open filter cassetteImmediately pl ace each weighed filter into an open filter cassetteImmediately place each weigh ed filter into an open filter cassetteImmediately place each weighed filter into an open filter cassetteImmediately place each weighed filter into an open filte r cassette (R&P part number 59-004648, Figure 3-2) and then close the filter (R&P part number 59-004648, Figure 3-2) and then close the filter(R&P part numbe r 59-004648, Figure 3-2) and then close the filter(R&P part number 59-004648, Fi gure 3-2) and then close the filter(R&P part number 59-004648, Figure 3-2) and t hen close the filter(R&P part number 59-004648, Figure 3-2) and then close the f ilter cassette by snapping its top part onto the bottom section. Ensure cassette by snapping its top part onto the bottom section. Ensurecassette by sna pping its top part onto the bottom section. Ensurecassette by snapping its top p art onto the bottom section. Ensurecassette by snapping its top part onto the bo ttom section. Ensurecassette by snapping its top part onto the bottom section. E nsure that the top and bottom pieces of the cassette are pushed tothat the top and bottom pieces of the cassette are pushed to-that the top and bo ttom pieces of the cassette are pushed to-that the top and bottom pieces of the cassette are pushed to-that the top and bottom pieces of the cassette are pushed to-that the top and bottom pieces of the cassette are pushed together completely. gether completely.gether completely.gether completely.gether completely.gether c ompletely. Figure 3-2. 47 mm filter placed in the bottom section of a filter cassette. The top part of the cassette is shown on the right-hand side. 5) 5)5)5)5)5) Place the filter cassette with its 47 mm filter installed into the fi lter Place the filter cassette with its 47 mm filter installed into the filterPlace t he filter cassette with its 47 mm filter installed into the filterPlace the filt er cassette with its 47 mm filter installed into the filterPlace the filter cass ette with its 47 mm filter installed into the filterPlace the filter cassette wi th its 47 mm filter installed into the filter cassette carrier (55-004847), and place the entire assembly into cassette carrier (55-004847), and place the entire assembly intocassette carrier (55-004847), and place the entire assembly intocassette carrier (55-004847), an d place the entire assembly intocassette carrier (55-004847), and place the enti re assembly intocassette carrier (55-004847), and place the entire assembly into the metal transport container (Figure 3-3) as specified in 2.12 the metal transport container (Figure 3-3) as specified in 2.12the metal transpo rt container (Figure 3-3) as specified in 2.12the metal transport container (Fig ure 3-3) as specified in 2.12the metal transport container (Figure 3-3) as speci fied in 2.12the metal transport container (Figure 3-3) as specified in 2.12

Quality Assurance Handbook, Section 7. The container should be Quality Assurance Handbook, Section 7. The container should beQuality Assurance Handbook, Section 7. The container should beQuality Assurance Handbook, Section 7. The container should beQuality Assurance Handbook, Section 7. The container s hould beQuality Assurance Handbook, Section 7. The container should be identified appropriately using a sticker or other system, and identified appropriately using a sticker or other system, andidentified appropri ately using a sticker or other system, andidentified appropriately using a stick er or other system, andidentified appropriately using a sticker or other system, andidentified appropriately using a sticker or other system, and should contain a foam liner to ensure a snug fit. should contain a foam liner to ensure a snug fit.should contain a foam liner to ensure a snug fit.should contain a foam liner to ensure a snug fit.should contai n a foam liner to ensure a snug fit.should contain a foam liner to ensure a snug fit. Figure 3-3. Filter cassette carrier in transport container.

SECTION 3: FILTER HANDLING AND EXCHANGE PAGE 3-4

Revision B.001 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler 6) 6)6)6)6)6) Document the relative humidity, temperature, date and time of the Document the relative humidity, temperature, date and time of theDocument the re lative humidity, temperature, date and time of theDocument the relative humidity , temperature, date and time of theDocument the relative humidity, temperature, date and time of theDocument the relative humidity, temperature, date and time o f the . Transport the filter to and initial weighing. initial weighing.initial weighing.initial weighing.initial weighing.initial weig hing. from the sampling site using an R&P-supplied transport 7 77777 ) ))))) The zero reading of the microbalance should be verified beThe zero reading of the microbalance should be verified be-The zero reading of the m icrobalance should be verified be-The zero reading of the microbalance should be v erified be-The zero reading of the microbalance should be verified be-The zero readi ng of the microbalance should be verified becontainer. tween each filter weighing. tween each filter weighing.tween each filter weighing.tween each filter weighing .tween each filter weighing.tween each filter weighing. SECTION 3: FILTER HANDLING AND EXCHANGE PAGE 3-5

Revision B.001 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler . Do not exchange sample filters until their sampling program is complete. . The sampler must be in its Stop Operating Mode when removing the currentlyinstalled filter. Figure 3-4 (Left). Gripping handle of filter exchange mechanism to prepare for filter exchange. Figure 3-5 (Right). Pulling back on handle of filter exchange mechanism to disengage and lower the filter platform. 3.4. 3.4.3.4.3.4.3.4.3.4. F FFFFFILTER ILTERILTERILTERILTERILTER E EEEEEXCHANGE XCHANGEXCHANGEXCHANGEXCHANGEXCHANGE Collection filters must be transported carefully in their metal transport contai ners to and from the sampling site, as specified in 2.12 Quality Assurance Handbook, Sec tion 8. Follow these steps to exchange each filter cassette: Follow these steps to exchange each filter cassette:Follow these steps to exchan ge each filter cassette:Follow these steps to exchange each filter cassette:Foll ow these steps to exchange each filter cassette:Follow these steps to exchange e ach filter cassette: 1) 1)1)1)1)1) Determine from the Main screen (Section 4.3) whether the unit is Determine from the Main screen (Section 4.3) whether the unit isDetermine from t he Main screen (Section 4.3) whether the unit isDetermine from the Main screen ( Section 4.3) whether the unit isDetermine from the Main screen (Section 4.3) whe ther the unit isDetermine from the Main screen (Section 4.3) whether the unit is still sampling, i.e., whether it is in the Sampling Operating Mode still sampling, i.e., whether it is in the Sampling Operating Modestill sampling , i.e., whether it is in the Sampling Operating Modestill sampling, i.e., whethe r it is in the Sampling Operating Modestill sampling, i.e., whether it is in the Sampling Operating Modestill sampling, i.e., whether it is in the Sampling Oper ating Mode (SAMP in the upper right-hand corner of the screen, Section 5.3). (SAMP in the upper right-hand corner of the screen, Section 5.3).(SAMP in the up per right-hand corner of the screen, Section 5.3).(SAMP in the upper right-hand corner of the screen, Section 5.3).(SAMP in the upper right-hand corner of the s

creen, Section 5.3).(SAMP in the upper right-hand corner of the screen, Section 5.3). The Main screen displays the current time/date, as well as the The Main screen displays the current time/date, as well as theThe Main screen di splays the current time/date, as well as theThe Main screen displays the current time/date, as well as theThe Main screen displays the current time/date, as wel l as theThe Main screen displays the current time/date, as well as the programmed starting and ending time/date. If the device is still in programmed starting and ending time/date. If the device is still inprogrammed st arting and ending time/date. If the device is still inprogrammed starting and en ding time/date. If the device is still inprogrammed starting and ending time/dat e. If the device is still inprogrammed starting and ending time/date. If the dev ice is still in its Sampling Operating Mode, allow it to complete its current its Sampling Operating Mode, allow it to complete its currentits Sampling Operat ing Mode, allow it to complete its currentits Sampling Operating Mode, allow it to complete its currentits Sampling Operating Mode, allow it to complete its cur rentits Sampling Operating Mode, allow it to complete its current sampling program before executing the steps below. sampling program before executing the steps below.sampling program before execut ing the steps below.sampling program before executing the steps below.sampling p rogram before executing the steps below.sampling program before executing the st eps below. 2) 2)2)2)2)2) If the device is in the Stop or Error Operating Mode, press <F4: If the device is in the Stop or Error Operating Mode, press <F4:If the device is in the Stop or Error Operating Mode, press <F4:If the device is in the Stop or Error Operating Mode, press <F4:If the device is in the Stop or Error Operating Mode, press <F4:If the device is in the Stop or Error Operating Mode, press <F4: Run/Stp> in the Main screen to return the sampler to the Stop Run/Stp> in the Main screen to return the sampler to the StopRun/Stp> in the Mai n screen to return the sampler to the StopRun/Stp> in the Main screen to return the sampler to the StopRun/Stp> in the Main screen to return the sampler to the StopRun/Stp> in the Main screen to return the sampler to the Stop Operating Mode (Section 5.3). This causes the sampler to write Operating Mode (Section 5.3). This causes the sampler to writeOperating Mode (Se ction 5.3). This causes the sampler to writeOperating Mode (Section 5.3). This c auses the sampler to writeOperating Mode (Section 5.3). This causes the sampler to writeOperating Mode (Section 5.3). This causes the sampler to write the final information to the current record of filter data, and must the final information to the current record of filter data, and mustthe final in formation to the current record of filter data, and mustthe final information to the current record of filter data, and mustthe final information to the current record of filter data, and mustthe final information to the current record of f ilter data, and must take place before removing a currently-installed filter. take place before removing a currently-installed filter.take place before removi ng a currently-installed filter.take place before removing a currently-installed filter.take place before removing a currently-installed filter.take place befor e removing a currently-installed filter. 3) 3)3)3)3)3) Pull the handle of the filter exchange mechanism toward the front Pull the handle of the filter exchange mechanism toward the frontPull the handle of the filter exchange mechanism toward the frontPull the handle of the filter exchange mechanism toward the frontPull the handle of the filter exchange mechan ism toward the frontPull the handle of the filter exchange mechanism toward the front

of the instrument to lower the filter platform and expose the filter of the instrument to lower the filter platform and expose the filterof the instr ument to lower the filter platform and expose the filterof the instrument to low er the filter platform and expose the filterof the instrument to lower the filte r platform and expose the filterof the instrument to lower the filter platform a nd expose the filter cassette in its carrier (Figures 3-4 and 3-5). cassette in its carrier (Figures 3-4 and 3-5).cassette in its carrier (Figures 3 -4 and 3-5).cassette in its carrier (Figures 3-4 and 3-5).cassette in its carrie r (Figures 3-4 and 3-5).cassette in its carrier (Figures 3-4 and 3-5). SECTION 3: FILTER HANDLING AND EXCHANGE PAGE 3-6

Revision B.001 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler 4) 4)4)4)4)4) If a filter currently resides in the sampler, remove the filter casIf a filter currently resides in the sampler, remove the filter cas-If a filter currently resides in the sampler, remove the filter cas-If a filter currently re sides in the sampler, remove the filter cas-If a filter currently resides in the sampler, remove the filter cas-If a filter currently resides in the sampler, re move the filter cassette carrier with its installed filter cassette and 47 mm filter, and sette carrier with its installed filter cassette and 47 mm filter, andsette carr ier with its installed filter cassette and 47 mm filter, andsette carrier with i ts installed filter cassette and 47 mm filter, andsette carrier with its install ed filter cassette and 47 mm filter, andsette carrier with its installed filter cassette and 47 mm filter, and place this assembly into the filter transport container (Figure 3-6 place this assembly into the filter transport container (Figure 3-6place this as sembly into the filter transport container (Figure 3-6place this assembly into t he filter transport container (Figure 3-6place this assembly into the filter tra nsport container (Figure 3-6place this assembly into the filter transport contai ner (Figure 3-6 and 3-3). Close the filter transport container and keep it sealed and 3-3). Close the filter transport container and keep it sealedand 3-3). Close the filter transport container and keep it sealedand 3-3). Close the filter tra nsport container and keep it sealedand 3-3). Close the filter transport containe r and keep it sealedand 3-3). Close the filter transport container and keep it s ealed until the assembly arrives at the laboratory. until the assembly arrives at the laboratory.until the assembly arrives at the l aboratory.until the assembly arrives at the laboratory.until the assembly arrive s at the laboratory.until the assembly arrives at the laboratory. NOTE: The filter must be removed from the sampler within 96 hours of the end of sample collection according to the current U.S. EPA guidelines as found in 2.12 Quality Assurance Handbook, Section 7. 5) 5)5)5)5)5) Perform any required maintenance of the system s WINS PM-2.5 Perform any required maintenance of the system s WINS PM-2.5Perform any required m aintenance of the system s WINS PM-2.5Perform any required maintenance of the syst em s WINS PM-2.5Perform any required maintenance of the system s WINS PM-2.5Perform any required maintenance of the system s WINS PM-2.5 Impactor, if necessary (Section 10.1 and Appendix H.2). Impactor, if necessary (Section 10.1 and Appendix H.2).Impactor, if necessary (S ection 10.1 and Appendix H.2).Impactor, if necessary (Section 10.1 and Appendix H.2).Impactor, if necessary (Section 10.1 and Appendix H.2).Impactor, if necessa ry (Section 10.1 and Appendix H.2). 6) 6)6)6)6)6) Remove the filter carrier containing the next 47 mm filter to be Remove the filter carrier containing the next 47 mm filter to beRemove the filte r carrier containing the next 47 mm filter to beRemove the filter carrier contai ning the next 47 mm filter to beRemove the filter carrier containing the next 47 mm filter to beRemove the filter carrier containing the next 47 mm filter to be exposed from its transport container (Figure 3-3). exposed from its transport container (Figure 3-3).exposed from its transport con

tainer (Figure 3-3).exposed from its transport container (Figure 3-3).exposed fr om its transport container (Figure 3-3).exposed from its transport container (Fi gure 3-3). 7) 7)7)7)7)7) Carefully insert the filter cassette carrier with its installed filte r Carefully insert the filter cassette carrier with its installed filterCarefully insert the filter cassette carrier with its installed filterCarefully insert the filter cassette carrier with its installed filterCarefully insert the filter ca ssette carrier with its installed filterCarefully insert the filter cassette car rier with its installed filter cassette and new 47 mm filter into the lower part of filter excassette and new 47 mm filter into the lower part of filter ex-cassette and new 47 mm filter into the lower part of filter ex-cassette and new 47 mm filter into the lower part of filter ex-cassette and new 47 mm filter into the lower part o f filter ex-cassette and new 47 mm filter into the lower part of filter exchange mechanism (Figure 3-6). The carrier contains a slot and change mechanism (Figure 3-6). The carrier contains a slot andchange mechanism ( Figure 3-6). The carrier contains a slot andchange mechanism (Figure 3-6). The c arrier contains a slot andchange mechanism (Figure 3-6). The carrier contains a slot andchange mechanism (Figure 3-6). The carrier contains a slot and hole that fit into the appropriate locations of the lower part of the hole that fit into the appropriate locations of the lower part of thehole that f it into the appropriate locations of the lower part of thehole that fit into the appropriate locations of the lower part of thehole that fit into the appropriat e locations of the lower part of thehole that fit into the appropriate locations of the lower part of the filter exchange mechanism. filter exchange mechanism.filter exchange mechanism.filter exchange mechanism.fi lter exchange mechanism.filter exchange mechanism. Figure 3-6. Inserting/ removing filter cassette in filter cassette carrier. 8) 8)8)8)8)8) Push the handle of the filter exchange mechanism toward the Push the handle of the filter exchange mechanism toward thePush the handle of th e filter exchange mechanism toward thePush the handle of the filter exchange mec hanism toward thePush the handle of the filter exchange mechanism toward thePush the handle of the filter exchange mechanism toward the back of the instrument to raise the filter platform and enclose the back of the instrument to raise the filter platform and enclose theback of the i nstrument to raise the filter platform and enclose theback of the instrument to raise the filter platform and enclose theback of the instrument to raise the fil ter platform and enclose theback of the instrument to raise the filter platform and enclose the filter cassette (Figures 3-4 and 3-5). filter cassette (Figures 3-4 and 3-5).filter cassette (Figures 3-4 and 3-5).filt er cassette (Figures 3-4 and 3-5).filter cassette (Figures 3-4 and 3-5).filter c assette (Figures 3-4 and 3-5). . Perform any required maintenance on the WINS 9) 9)9)9)9)9) Press <F1: FiltSet> in the Main screen to enter the Filter Setup Press <F1: FiltSet> in the Main screen to enter the Filter SetupPress <F1: FiltS

et> in the Main screen to enter the Filter SetupPress <F1: FiltSet> in the Main screen to enter the Filter SetupPress <F1: FiltSet> in the Main screen to enter the Filter SetupPress <F1: FiltSet> in the Main screen to enter the Filter Setup PM-2.5 impactor before screen (Section 5.2). Change the parameters shown in this screen (Section 5.2). Change the parameters shown in thisscreen (Section 5.2). C hange the parameters shown in thisscreen (Section 5.2). Change the parameters sh own in thisscreen (Section 5.2). Change the parameters shown in thisscreen (Sect ion 5.2). Change the parameters shown in this installing the next sample screen to define the sampling program of the newly-installed screen to define the sampling program of the newly-installedscreen to define the sampling program of the newly-installedscreen to define the sampling program of the newly-installedscreen to define the sampling program of the newly-installed screen to define the sampling program of the newly-installed filter. filter. filter.filter.filter.filter.filter. 10) 10)10)10)10)10) Return to the Main screen (Section 4.3) by pressing <ESC> one or Return to the Main screen (Section 4.3) by pressing <ESC> one orReturn to the Ma in screen (Section 4.3) by pressing <ESC> one orReturn to the Main screen (Secti on 4.3) by pressing <ESC> one orReturn to the Main screen (Section 4.3) by press ing <ESC> one orReturn to the Main screen (Section 4.3) by pressing <ESC> one or more times. more times.more times.more times.more times.more times. SECTION 3: FILTER HANDLING AND EXCHANGE PAGE 3-7

Revision B.001 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler 11) 11)11)11)11)11) Press <F4: Run/Stp> to leave the Stop Operating Mode and enter Press <F4: Run/Stp> to leave the Stop Operating Mode and enterPress <F4: Run/Stp > to leave the Stop Operating Mode and enterPress <F4: Run/Stp> to leave the Sto p Operating Mode and enterPress <F4: Run/Stp> to leave the Stop Operating Mode a nd enterPress <F4: Run/Stp> to leave the Stop Operating Mode and enter either the Wait or Sampling Operating Mode (Section 5.3). The either the Wait or Sampling Operating Mode (Section 5.3). Theeither the Wait or Sampling Operating Mode (Section 5.3). Theeither the Wait or Sampling Operating Mode (Section 5.3). Theeither the Wait or Sampling Operating Mode (Section 5.3). Theeither the Wait or Sampling Operating Mode (Section 5.3). The unit will automatically execute the sampling program defined in unit will automatically execute the sampling program defined inunit will automat ically execute the sampling program defined inunit will automatically execute th e sampling program defined inunit will automatically execute the sampling progra m defined inunit will automatically execute the sampling program defined in the Filter Setup screen of step 9 above. the Filter Setup screen of step 9 above.the Filter Setup screen of step 9 above. the Filter Setup screen of step 9 above.the Filter Setup screen of step 9 above. the Filter Setup screen of step 9 above. 12) 12)12)12)12)12) If an exposed filter was removed from the sampler in step 4 If an exposed filter was removed from the sampler in step 4If an exposed filter was removed from the sampler in step 4If an exposed filter was removed from the sampler in step 4If an exposed filter was removed from the sampler in step 4If a n exposed filter was removed from the sampler in step 4 above, press <F3: Data> in the Main screen to view the data for above, press <F3: Data> in the Main screen to view the data forabove, press <F3: Data> in the Main screen to view the data forabove, press <F3: Data> in the Mai n screen to view the data forabove, press <F3: Data> in the Main screen to view the data forabove, press <F3: Data> in the Main screen to view the data for the removed filter in the Filter Data screen (Section 8.1). Press the removed filter in the Filter Data screen (Section 8.1). Pressthe removed fil ter in the Filter Data screen (Section 8.1). Pressthe removed filter in the Filt er Data screen (Section 8.1). Pressthe removed filter in the Filter Data screen (Section 8.1). Pressthe removed filter in the Filter Data screen (Section 8.1). Press <F2: ->, if necessary, to view the appropriate record of filter data. <F2: ->, if necessary, to view the appropriate record of filter data.<F2: ->, if necessary, to view the appropriate record of filter data.<F2: ->, if necessary, to view the appropriate record of filter data.<F2: ->, if necessary, to view th e appropriate record of filter data.<F2: ->, if necessary, to view the appropria te record of filter data. 13) 13)13)13)13)13) Record the information required for data computation and quality Record the information required for data computation and qualityRecord the infor mation required for data computation and qualityRecord the information required for data computation and qualityRecord the information required for data computa tion and qualityRecord the information required for data computation and quality assurance purposes. At a minimum, this would usually include assurance purposes. At a minimum, this would usually includeassurance purposes.

At a minimum, this would usually includeassurance purposes. At a minimum, this w ould usually includeassurance purposes. At a minimum, this would usually include assurance purposes. At a minimum, this would usually include the volume sampled (Vol), the flow rate coefficient of variation the volume sampled (Vol), the flow rate coefficient of variationthe volume sampl ed (Vol), the flow rate coefficient of variationthe volume sampled (Vol), the fl ow rate coefficient of variationthe volume sampled (Vol), the flow rate coeffici ent of variationthe volume sampled (Vol), the flow rate coefficient of variation (%CV), the total sampling time (Tot), the largest difference be(%CV), the total sampling time (Tot), the largest difference be-(%CV), the total sampling time (Tot), the largest difference be-(%CV), the total sampling time ( Tot), the largest difference be-(%CV), the total sampling time (Tot), the larges t difference be-(%CV), the total sampling time (Tot), the largest difference bet ween the ambient and filter temperatures (TempDiff), and the tween the ambient and filter temperatures (TempDiff), and thetween the ambient a nd filter temperatures (TempDiff), and thetween the ambient and filter temperatu res (TempDiff), and thetween the ambient and filter temperatures (TempDiff), and thetween the ambient and filter temperatures (TempDiff), and the status code (Stat). status code (Stat).status code (Stat).status code (Stat).status code (Stat).stat us code (Stat). 14) 14)14)14)14)14) When in When inWhen inWhen inWhen inWhen in the Filter Data screen, press <F4: PwrDat> t o view power the Filter Data screen, press <F4: PwrDat> to view powerthe Filter Data screen, press <F4: PwrDat> to view powerthe Filter Data screen, press <F4: PwrDat> to vi ew powerthe Filter Data screen, press <F4: PwrDat> to view powerthe Filter Data screen, press <F4: PwrDat> to view power outage and filter ID information in the Power Outages screen outage and filter ID information in the Power Outages screenoutage and filter ID information in the Power Outages screenoutage and filter ID information in the Power Outages screenoutage and filter ID information in the Power Outages screen outage and filter ID information in the Power Outages screen (Section 8.1), or press <F5: IntvDat> to gain access to 5-minute (Section 8.1), or press <F5: IntvDat> to gain access to 5-minute(Section 8.1), o r press <F5: IntvDat> to gain access to 5-minute(Section 8.1), or press <F5: Int vDat> to gain access to 5-minute(Section 8.1), or press <F5: IntvDat> to gain ac cess to 5-minute(Section 8.1), or press <F5: IntvDat> to gain access to 5-minute averaged temperature and pressure data in the Interval Data averaged temperature and pressure data in the Interval Dataaveraged temperature and pressure data in the Interval Dataaveraged temperature and pressure data in the Interval Dataaveraged temperature and pressure data in the Interval Dataaver aged temperature and pressure data in the Interval Data screen (Section 8.2). screen (Section 8.2).screen (Section 8.2).screen (Section 8.2).screen (Section 8 .2).screen (Section 8.2). NOTE: The information contained in the Filter Data screen, Power Outages screen and Interval Data screen may be downloaded electronically into a laptop personal computer (PC) using software and a cable provided with the PartisolFRM Sampler (Section 8.3). SECTION 3: FILTER HANDLING AND EXCHANGE PAGE 3-8

Revision B.001 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler 3.5. 3.5.3.5.3.5.3.5.3.5. P PPPPPOST OSTOSTOSTOSTOST-C -C-C-C-C-COLLECTION OLLECTIONOLLECTIONOLLECTIONOLLECTIONOLLECTION E EEEEEQUILIBRATION QUILIBRATIONQUILIBRATIONQUILIBRATIONQUILIBRATIONQUILIBRATION Follow these steps to equilibrate 47 mm filters after sampling: Follow these steps to equilibrate 47 mm filters after sampling:Follow these step s to equilibrate 47 mm filters after sampling:Follow these steps to equilibrate 47 mm filters after sampling:Follow these steps to equilibrate 47 mm filters aft er sampling:Follow these steps to equilibrate 47 mm filters after sampling: 1) 1)1)1)1)1) Carefully remove the 47 mm filter from the filter cassette and Carefully remove the 47 mm filter from the filter cassette andCarefully remove t he 47 mm filter from the filter cassette andCarefully remove the 47 mm filter fr om the filter cassette andCarefully remove the 47 mm filter from the filter cass ette andCarefully remove the 47 mm filter from the filter cassette and place the filter in its petri dish. The cassette can then be used to place the filter in its petri dish. The cassette can then be used toplace the fi lter in its petri dish. The cassette can then be used toplace the filter in its petri dish. The cassette can then be used toplace the filter in its petri dish. The cassette can then be used toplace the filter in its petri dish. The cassette can then be used to hold other filters once it has been cleaned. hold other filters once it has been cleaned.hold other filters once it has been cleaned.hold other filters once it has been cleaned.hold other filters once it h as been cleaned.hold other filters once it has been cleaned. 2) 2)2)2)2)2) Examine the filter for defects that may have occurred during Examine the filter for defects that may have occurred duringExamine the filter f or defects that may have occurred duringExamine the filter for defects that may have occurred duringExamine the filter for defects that may have occurred during Examine the filter for defects that may have occurred during sampling, as well as for evidence of leaks in the filter cassette. sampling, as well as for evidence of leaks in the filter cassette.sampling, as w ell as for evidence of leaks in the filter cassette.sampling, as well as for evi dence of leaks in the filter cassette.sampling, as well as for evidence of leaks in the filter cassette.sampling, as well as for evidence of leaks in the filter cassette. Leaks manifest themselves as pronounced radial streaks that Leaks manifest themselves as pronounced radial streaks thatLeaks manifest themse lves as pronounced radial streaks thatLeaks manifest themselves as pronounced ra dial streaks thatLeaks manifest themselves as pronounced radial streaks thatLeak s manifest themselves as pronounced radial streaks that extend beyond the exposed area of the filter. extend beyond the exposed area of the filter.extend beyond the exposed area of t he filter.extend beyond the exposed area of the filter.extend beyond the exposed area of the filter.extend beyond the exposed area of the filter. 3) 3)3)3)3)3) Place the petri dish cover

Place the petri dish coverPlace the petri dish coverPlace the petri dish coverPl ace the petri dish coverPlace the petri dish cover under underunderunderunderunder the bottom half of the dish. the bottom half of the dish.the bottom half of the dish.the bottom half of the d ish.the bottom half of the dish.the bottom half of the dish. 4) 4)4)4)4)4) Place a paper towel over the open petri dish during equilibration. Place a paper towel over the open petri dish during equilibration.Place a paper towel over the open petri dish during equilibration.Place a paper towel over the open petri dish during equilibration.Place a paper towel over the open petri di sh during equilibration.Place a paper towel over the open petri dish during equi libration. 5) 5)5)5)5)5) Record the filter number, relative humidity, temperature, date and Record the filter number, relative humidity, temperature, date andRecord the fil ter number, relative humidity, temperature, date andRecord the filter number, re lative humidity, temperature, date andRecord the filter number, relative humidit y, temperature, date andRecord the filter number, relative humidity, temperature , date and time at the beginning of this post-collection equilibration. time at the beginning of this post-collection equilibration.time at the beginnin g of this post-collection equilibration.time at the beginning of this post-colle ction equilibration.time at the beginning of this post-collection equilibration. time at the beginning of this post-collection equilibration. 6) 6)6)6)6)6) Equilibrate each filter for Equilibrate each filter forEquilibrate each filter forEquilibrate each filter fo rEquilibrate each filter forEquilibrate each filter for at least at leastat leastat leastat leastat least 24 hours under the following 24 hours under the following24 hours under the following24 hours under the follo wing24 hours under the following24 hours under the following conditions, as specified in 2.12 Quality Assurance Handbook, conditions, as specified in 2.12 Quality Assurance Handbook,conditions, as speci fied in 2.12 Quality Assurance Handbook,conditions, as specified in 2.12 Quality Assurance Handbook,conditions, as specified in 2.12 Quality Assurance Handbook, conditions, as specified in 2.12 Quality Assurance Handbook, Section 7: Section 7:Section 7:Section 7:Section 7:Section 7: The equilibration room must be held at a constant relative humidity between 30 and 40% with a variability of not more than 5% relative humidity. The equilibration room must be held at a constant temperature between 20 and 23 C with a variability of not more than 2 C. SECTION 3: FILTER HANDLING AND EXCHANGE PAGE 3-9

Revision B.001 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler . Record the final filter weight as Wf. . The change in filter weight involves the Wi and Wf weights computed above. Figure 3-7. Placing a used 47 mm filter on a balance. 3.6. 3.6.3.6.3.6.3.6.3.6. P PPPPPOST OSTOSTOSTOSTOST-C -C-C-C-C-COLLECTION OLLECTIONOLLECTIONOLLECTIONOLLECTIONOLLECTION W WWWWWEIGHING EIGHINGEIGHINGEIGHINGEIGHINGEIGHING Follow these steps to weigh the 47 mm collection filters after sampling: Follow these steps to weigh the 47 mm collection filters after sampling:Follow t hese steps to weigh the 47 mm collection filters after sampling:Follow these ste ps to weigh the 47 mm collection filters after sampling:Follow these steps to we igh the 47 mm collection filters after sampling:Follow these steps to weigh the 47 mm collection filters after sampling: 1) 1)1)1)1)1) Ensure that the filter has been equilibrated for at least 24 hours Ensure that the filter has been equilibrated for at least 24 hoursEnsure that th e filter has been equilibrated for at least 24 hoursEnsure that the filter has b een equilibrated for at least 24 hoursEnsure that the filter has been equilibrat ed for at least 24 hoursEnsure that the filter has been equilibrated for at leas t 24 hours before weighing (Section 3.5). before weighing (Section 3.5).before weighing (Section 3.5).before weighing (Sec tion 3.5).before weighing (Section 3.5).before weighing (Section 3.5). 2) 2)2)2)2)2) Filters must be weighed on a microbalance with a resolution of at Filters must be weighed on a microbalance with a resolution of atFilters must be weighed on a microbalance with a resolution of atFilters must be weighed on a m icrobalance with a resolution of atFilters must be weighed on a microbalance wit h a resolution of atFilters must be weighed on a microbalance with a resolution of at least 1 g (0.001 mg). Ensure that the balance has been allowed least 1 g (0.001 mg). Ensure that the balance has been allowedleast 1 g (0.001 mg) . Ensure that the balance has been allowedleast 1 g (0.001 mg). Ensure that the b alance has been allowedleast 1 g (0.001 mg). Ensure that the balance has been all owedleast 1 g (0.001 mg). Ensure that the balance has been allowed to warm up before performing any weighings. to warm up before performing any weighings.to warm up before performing any weig hings.to warm up before performing any weighings.to warm up before performing an y weighings.to warm up before performing any weighings. NOTE: U.S. EPA regulations require that the post-collection weighing be

performed immediately following post-collection conditioning and within 10 days of sampling, and that it be performed by the same person and on the same balance as the initial filter weighing as found in 2.12 Quality Assurance Handbook, Section 7 and Section 11. 3) 3)3)3)3)3) Remove the filter from its petri dish. Remove the filter from its petri dish.Remove the filter from its petri dish.Remo ve the filter from its petri dish.Remove the filter from its petri dish.Remove t he filter from its petri dish. 4) 4)4)4)4)4) Weigh each filter at least once (three times recommended), reWeigh each filter at least once (three times recommended), re-Weigh each filter at least once (three times recommended), re-Weigh each filter at least once (thr ee times recommended), re-Weigh each filter at least once (three times recommend ed), re-Weigh each filter at least once (three times recommended), recording the mass in grams (Figure 3-7). The average mass cording the mass in grams (Figure 3-7). The average masscording the mass in gram s (Figure 3-7). The average masscording the mass in grams (Figure 3-7). The aver age masscording the mass in grams (Figure 3-7). The average masscording the mass in grams (Figure 3-7). The average mass reading is the final filter weight, W reading is the final filter weight, Wreading is the final filter weight, Wreadin g is the final filter weight, Wreading is the final filter weight, Wreading is t he final filter weight, Wf fffff. ..... 5) 5)5)5)5)5) Return the filter to its petri dish, place the petri dish cover over it, Return the filter to its petri dish, place the petri dish cover over it,Return t he filter to its petri dish, place the petri dish cover over it,Return the filte r to its petri dish, place the petri dish cover over it,Return the filter to its petri dish, place the petri dish cover over it,Return the filter to its petri d ish, place the petri dish cover over it, and store it for archival purposes. and store it for archival purposes.and store it for archival purposes.and store it for archival purposes.and store it for archival purposes.and store it for arc hival purposes. 6) 6)6)6)6)6) Document the relative humidity, temperature, date and time of the Document the relative humidity, temperature, date and time of theDocument the re lative humidity, temperature, date and time of theDocument the relative humidity , temperature, date and time of theDocument the relative humidity, temperature, date and time of theDocument the relative humidity, temperature, date and time o f the post-collection weighing. post-collection weighing.post-collection weighing.post-collection weighing.postcollection weighing.post-collection weighing. SECTION 3: FILTER HANDLING AND EXCHANGE PAGE 3-10

Revision B.001 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler 7 77777) ))))) The zero reading of the microbalance should be verified beThe zero reading of the microbalance should be verified be-The zero reading of the m icrobalance should be verified be-The zero reading of the microbalance should be v erified be-The zero reading of the microbalance should be verified be-The zero readi ng of the microbalance should be verified between each filter weighing. tween each filter weighing.tween each filter weighing.tween each filter weighing .tween each filter weighing.tween each filter weighing. 8) 8)8)8)8)8) Determine the net mass filter loading ( Determine the net mass filter loading (Determine the net mass filter loading (De termine the net mass filter loading (Determine the net mass filter loading (Dete rmine the net mass filter loading (D DDDDDW) by subtracting the W) by subtracting theW) by subtracting theW) by subtracting theW) by subtracting theW) by subtracting the average initial filter weight (W average initial filter weight (Waverage initial filter weight (Waverage initial filter weight (Waverage initial filter weight (Waverage initial filter weight (W i iiiii (g) computed in step 3 of Section (g) computed in step 3 of Section(g) computed in step 3 of Section(g) computed i n step 3 of Section(g) computed in step 3 of Section(g) computed in step 3 of Se ction 3.3) from the final filter weight (W 3.3) from the final filter weight (W3.3) from the final filter weight (W3.3) fro m the final filter weight (W3.3) from the final filter weight (W3.3) from the fi nal filter weight (Wf fffff (g) computed in step 4 above). (g) computed in step 4 above).(g) computed in step 4 above).(g) computed in step 4 above).(g) computed in step 4 above).(g) computed in step 4 above). Ensure that the figures used in this computation were obtained Ensure that the figures used in this computation were obtainedEnsure that the fi gures used in this computation were obtainedEnsure that the figures used in this computation were obtainedEnsure that the figures used in this computation were obtainedEnsure that the figures used in this computation were obtained from the from thefrom thefrom thefrom thefrom the same filter and balance same filter and balancesame filter and balancesame filter and balancesame filter and balancesame filter and balance. ..... SECTION 3: FILTER HANDLING AND EXCHANGE PAGE 3-11

Revision B.001 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler 3.7. 3.7.3.7.3.7.3.7.3.7. C CCCCCOMPUTATION OMPUTATIONOMPUTATIONOMPUTATIONOMPUTATIONOMPUTATION OF OFOFOFOFOF M MMMMMASS ASSASSASSASSASS C CCCCCONCENTRATION ONCENTRATIONONCENTRATIONONCENTRATIONONCENTRATIONONCENTRATION Compute the average mass concentration (MC) of PM-2.5 during the sampling period using the following formula with the information assembled above, refer to 2.12 Quality Assurance Handbook, Section 11: .W x 106 MC = V where: DW = the net change in the mass (g) of the 47 mm filter between the initial weighing and the post collection weighing, as computed in step 8 of Section 3.6 above. 106 = Conversion factor from grams (g) to micrograms (g). V = the volume (volumetric m3) drawn through the filter, as recorded in step 12 of Section 3.4 above. For 24-hour PM-2.5 concentration averages to be valid without adjustment for U.S . EPA reporting purposes, the total sampling time (Tot in step 12 of Section 3.4) must be between 23 and 25 hours, and other requirements must also be met as reference d in 2.12 Quality Assurance Handbook, Section 8. The value of the Stat field recor ded in step 12 of Section 3.4 indicates whether the sampler encountered any adverse operational conditions (Section 7.1). SECTION 3: FILTER HANDLING AND EXCHANGE PAGE 3-12

Revision B.001 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler Section 4: Section 4:Section 4:Section 4:Section 4:Section 4: Software Overview Software OverviewSoftware OverviewSoftware OverviewSoftware OverviewSoftware Ove rview . Ensure that all applicable safety standards are met before applying power to the hardware. Figure 4-1. Pressing the on/off button into the ON position. This section describes the steps involved in turning on the Partisol-FRM Sampler , navigating through its basic screens, and in interacting with the device as a us er. The software s menu structure and a complete listing of screens may be found in Append ix A. Implementation of the subject matter covered in this section should only be atte mpted once the sampler is set up in accordance with Sections 2 and 3. 4.1. 4.1.4.1.4.1.4.1.4.1. T TTTTTURNING URNINGURNINGURNINGURNINGURNING O OOOOON NNNNN THE THETHETHETHETHE P PPPPPARTISOL ARTISOLARTISOLARTISOLARTISOLARTISOL-FRM S -FRM S-FRM S-FRM S-FRM S-FRM SAMPLER AMPLERAMPLERAMPLERAMPLERAMPLER Follow the procedures outlined in Sections 2 and 3 carefully before attempting operation of the Model 2000 sampler. Once the sampling system has been wired to a main electrical source of the proper voltage in accordance with local standards, power can be applied to the unit. WARNING: WARNING:WARNING:WARNING:WARNING:WARNING: Use of the suppled 120 VAC three-prong plug out of doors or in an uncontrolled interior environment may present a severe electrical shock hazard Follow these steps to turn on the sampler: Follow these steps to turn on the sampler:Follow these steps to turn on the samp ler:Follow these steps to turn on the sampler:Follow these steps to turn on the sampler:Follow these steps to turn on the sampler:

1) 1)1)1)1)1) Press the power switch on the main panel to its on (1) position Press the power switch on the main panel to its on (1) positionPress the power swi tch on the main panel to its on (1) positionPress the power switch on the main pan el to its on (1) positionPress the power switch on the main panel to its on (1) posi tionPress the power switch on the main panel to its on (1) position to activate the sampler (Figure 4-1). to activate the sampler (Figure 4-1).to activate the sampler (Figure 4-1).to act ivate the sampler (Figure 4-1).to activate the sampler (Figure 4-1).to activate the sampler (Figure 4-1). SECTION 4: SOFTWARE OVERVIEW PAGE 4-1

Revision B.001 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler 2) 2)2)2)2)2) If necessary, turn the adjustment knob on the lower left-hand If necessary, turn the adjustment knob on the lower left-handIf necessary, turn the adjustment knob on the lower left-handIf necessary, turn the adjustment knob on the lower left-handIf necessary, turn the adjustment knob on the lower lefthandIf necessary, turn the adjustment knob on the lower left-hand corner of the keypad to adjust the contrast of the liquid crystal corner of the keypad to adjust the contrast of the liquid crystalcorner of the k eypad to adjust the contrast of the liquid crystalcorner of the keypad to adjust the contrast of the liquid crystalcorner of the keypad to adjust the contrast o f the liquid crystalcorner of the keypad to adjust the contrast of the liquid cr ystal display (LCD). display (LCD).display (LCD).display (LCD).display (LCD).display (LCD). Once the power switch is pressed, the pump in the hub unit may start up momentar ily. This is the default setting of the unit in case it is being turned on under extr eme cold conditions where additional heat is necessary to warm the electronics. 4.2. 4.2.4.2.4.2.4.2.4.2. T TTTTTITLE ITLEITLEITLEITLEITLE S SSSSSCREEN CREENCREENCREENCREENCREEN The Title screen appears on the display of the sampler momentarily to identify t he model number of the hardware and the revision number of the installed software (Figure 4-2). During the time that the sampler displays this screen, the user ha s a chance to reset the hardware by pressing the appropriate keys on the keypad (Sec tion 12). Figure 4-2. Title screen. Partisol-FRM Model 2000 Air Sampler ***Candidate PM-2.5 Reference Method*** Version 1.000 Copyright 1996 Rupprecht & Patashnick Co., Inc. RDefs RData HReset SECTION 4: SOFTWARE OVERVIEW PAGE 4-2

Revision B.001 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler 4.3. 4.3.4.3.4.3.4.3.4.3. M MMMMMAIN AINAINAINAINAIN S SSSSSCREEN CREENCREENCREENCREENCREEN After a few seconds, the Title screen is automatically replaced by the Main scre en (Figure 4-3). This screen shows summary information regarding the sampling program currently defined by the user, the current operating mode, the existence of any status conditions, as well as certain operational information. Figure 4-3. Main screen. Stat:Ok Main Screen Mode:SAMP Current Time: 19.36 96/11/07 Sample Start: 0.00 96/11/07 Sample Stop: 0.00 96/11/08 Amb Temp: 23.2 C Flow Rate: 16.7 l/min Filt Temp: 23.6 C Volume: 19.6 m^3 Amb Pres: 760 mmHg SampTime: 19.36 FiltSet Stats Data Run/Stp Setup The Main screen contains the following information: Status Code The value of the status code in the upper left-hand corner of the Main screen indicates whether or not the hardware is operating properly (Section 7.1). A value of Ok indicates that all functions are proceeding normally. Operating Mode The sampler displays the current operating mode in the upper right-hand corner of the Main screen. Press <F4: Run/Stp> to switch among the Stop, Wait, Sampling, and Done Operating Modes (Section 5.3). Current Time The local time and date are displayed on the second line of the Main screen. These variables should be set to their proper values in the Setup screen (Section 5.1) before commencing operation of the sampler. The Partisol-FRM Sampler expresses time as hh.mm and dates as yy/mm/dd in accordance with U.S. EPA requirements. SECTION 4: SOFTWARE OVERVIEW PAGE 4-3

Revision B.001 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler Sample Start The Sample Start line indicates the time and date at which the sampler is currently programmed to begin sample collection. Press <F1: FiltSet> from the Main screen to enter the Filter Setup screen (Section 5.2). With the device in the Stop Operating Mode (Section 5.3), the user can change the sampling program from this screen. Sample Stop The Sample Stop line indicates the time and date at which the sampler is currently programmed to stop sample collection. Press <F1: FiltSet> from the Main screen to enter the Filter Setup screen (Section 5.2). With the device in the Stop Operating Mode (Section 5.3), the user can change the sampling program from this screen. Amb Temp This field contains the current ambient temperature (C), as measured by the temperature probe mounted on the down tube. Filt Temp This field contains the current filter temperature (C), as measured by a temperature sensor located within 1 cm of the sample filter s center. Amb Pres This field contains the current ambient pressure (absolute mm Hg), as measured by a pressure sensor located within the instrument enclosure. Flow Rate This field contains the current sample flow rate (volumetric l/min). The value of this field is 0 if the sample flow is currently turned off. Volume This field contains the total volume sampled (volumetric m). This field is reset to 0 whenever the user advances from the Done to the Stop Operating Mode (Section 5.3) by pressing <F4: Run/Stp>. The user may view stored data by entering <F3: Data> from the Main Screen (Section 8.1). Sampling Time This field contains the total elapsed sampling time (hh.mm). This field is reset to 0 whenever the user advances from the Done to the Stop Operating Mode (Section 5.3) by pressing <F4: Run/Stp>. The user may view stored data by entering <F3: Data> from the Main Screen (Section 8.1). SECTION 4: SOFTWARE OVERVIEW PAGE 4-4

Revision B.001 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler The function keys labelled F1 to F5 activate the commands shown on the bottom line of virtually every screen in the system. The following parts of this sectio n describe how to navigate among the screens of the system software, as well as how to swit ch between the Browse Mode and Edit Mode to change the value of system parameters. SECTION 4: SOFTWARE OVERVIEW PAGE 4-5

Revision B.001 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler . Use function keys to drop down by one layer in the structure of screens. Pressing <ESC> returns the user to the next highest level. Figure 4-4. Keypad. 4.4. 4.4.4.4.4.4.4.4.4.4. N NNNNNAVIGATING AVIGATINGAVIGATINGAVIGATINGAVIGATINGAVIGATING A AAAAAMONG MONGMONGMONGMONGMONG S SSSSSCREENS CREENSCREENSCREENSCREENSCREENS The system software allows the user to navigate easily through the use of soft f unction keys (<F1> to <F5>) and the <ESC> key (Figure 4-4). The depth of the sampler s menu structure is shallow, making it relatively easy to switch from one display to another (Figure 4-5). From the Main screen, simply press the soft key labelled < F1: FiltSet>, <F2: Stats>, <F3: Data> or <F5: Setup> to drop down one level in the s creen structure. Pressing the <ESC> key causes the current display to be replaced by t he next higher screen in the hierarchy. For example, pressing <ESC> when in the Filter S etup screen returns the user to the Main screen. The definition of the soft function keys changes as different screens appear on the display and different functions are r equired. Appendix A contains an overview of all screens included in the Partisol-FRM software. SECTION 4: SOFTWARE OVERVIEW PAGE 4-6

Revision B.001 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler Figure 4-5. Hierarchy of instrument software screens. Title Screen Main Screen Statistics ScreenFilter Setup Screen Filter Data Screen Setup Screen Power Outages Screen Interval Data Screen Audit ScreenRS232 Setup Screen Diagnostics ScreenCalibration Screen Flow Calibration Screen The <F1: Edit> key is common to many screens. The function of this command, whic h causes the sampler to leave the Browse Mode and enter the Edit Mode, is describe d in the following parts of this section. The <SHIFT> key plays a special role in accessing soft function keys. Certain displays, such as the Setup screen (Figure 4-6), have a > or < indicator on the righ tmost position of the bottom line. The appearance of these symbols indicates that the soft key menu for the current screen is two lines long, and that <SHIFT> can be pressed to toggle between the lines of the menu. This is the case both in the Browse Mod e and the Edit Mode. SECTION 4: SOFTWARE OVERVIEW PAGE 4-7

Revision B.001 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler Figure 4-6. Setup screen. Stat:Ok Setup Mode:SAMP Cur Time: 19.36.37 Def Start: 0.00 Cur Date: 96/11/07 Def Dur: 24.00 Set Flow: 16.7 l/min Std Temp: 99.9 Std Press: 99.9 FTS Const M: 0.0000 Soft Ver: 1.202 FTS Const B: 0.0000 Ser Num: 1001 Edit Calib Diag RS232 Audit > Function Keys in Browse Mode Edit Calib Diag RS232 Audit > Passwd < Function Keys in Edit Mode ---+ ++ Bksp > +/< The following describes the use of the <SHIFT> key to switch between soft key me nu lines: . Press the <SHIFT> key > The first line of the soft key menu is currently being displayed. Press to toggle between the two <SHIFT> to toggle to the second line of the soft key menu. Once this lines of the soft key menu, as indicated by > and <. occurs, the lies when in the Browse Mode and Edit Mode. < The second line of the soft key menu is currently being displayed. Press <SHIFT> to toggle to the first line of the soft key menu. Once this occurs, the > symbol appears in its place. This procedure applies when in the Browse Mode and Edit Mode. For the descriptive purposes of this manual, the soft keys on the second line of the soft key menu are identified as F6 to F10. SECTION 4: SOFTWARE OVERVIEW PAGE 4-8 < symbol appears in its place. This procedure app

Revision B.001 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler . Use the arrow keys to move from one field to another while remaining in the Edit Mode. . Leave the Edit Mode by pressing <ENTER> to save changes or <ESC> to disregard changes. 4.5. 4.5.4.5.4.5.4.5.4.5. E EEEEEDIT DITDITDITDITDIT M MMMMMODE ODEODEODEODEODE The Partisol Sampler normally operates in the Browse Mode, which enables the use r to navigate among all of its screens, but does not allow any changes to be made to system parameters. To enter the Edit Mode, press the <F1: Edit> key. Because many screens contain information, such as flow rate set points that can only be changed when the samp ler is in the Stop Operating Mode, the hardware beeps if it cannot enter the Edit Mo de. In such a case, the user must return to the Main screen and press <F4: Run/Stp> before attempting to enter the Edit Mode in the desired screen. The cursor changes from an underline when it is in the Browse Mode to a large sq uare shape when the sampler is in the Edit Mode. Many screens, such as the Setup screen (Figure 4-6), contain soft keys to decrem ent by larger or smaller amounts (<--> and <->, respectively) and to increment by la rger or smaller amounts (<++> and <+>, respectively). Numeric values can also be entered directly from the keypad. The <Bksp> (backspa ce) key erases previously typed characters. Times expressed as hh.mm (or hh.mm.ss ) are edited as two (or three) separate sections, and can be edited using the <-->, <->, <+> or <++> keys, or through di rect keypad entry. Use the arrow keys on the keypad to move from one part of the time field to another. Dates expressed as yy/mm/dd are edited as three separate sections, and can be changed using the <-->, <->, <+> or <++> keys, or through direct keypad entry. U se

the arrow keys on the keypad to move from one part of the date field to another. To edit multiple parameters while remaining in the Edit Mode, press the arrow ke ys on the keypad after making each change. This moves the cursor to a new field and keeps the Model 2000 unit in its Edit Mode. This does away with the need to togg le between the Browse Mode and Edit Mode for each parameter edited. The following two keystrokes cause the software to leave the Edit Mode and retur n to the Browse Mode: <ENTER> Changes made while in the Edit Mode are retained, and the sampler then returns to the Browse Mode. SECTION 4: SOFTWARE OVERVIEW PAGE 4-9

Revision B.001 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler <ESC> Changes made while in the Edit Mode are not retained, and the sampler then returns to the Browse Mode. The cursor reverts to its underline shape when the software returns to the Brows e Mode. The Filter Setup screen (Figure 4-7) makes special function keys available when the user is in the Edit Mode. The <F8: <-- > and <F9: --> > keys move the editing cu rsor to the left and right, respectively, when making changes to the ID1 and ID2 parameters. New numbers entered by the user overwrite any character that already resides in the current cursor position. Figure 4-7. Filter Setup screen. Stat:Ok Filter Setup Mode:SAMP Current Time: 19.36 96/11/07 Start Time: 0.00 End Time: 0.00 Start Date: 96/11/07 End Date: 96/11/08 Set Flow: 16.7 l/min ID1: "96 " ID2: "00154 " Edit Next Hr NextDay + Day Set Def Function Keys in Browse Mode Edit Next Hr NextDay + Day Set Def Function Keys in Edit Mode -+ ++ Bksp > <---> Bksp < SECTION 4: SOFTWARE OVERVIEW PAGE 4-10

Revision B.003 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler Section 5: Section 5:Section 5:Section 5:Section 5:Section 5: Software Setup and Operation Software Setup and OperationSoftware Setup and OperationSoftware Setup and Opera tionSoftware Setup and OperationSoftware Setup and Operation This section describes the basic setup and operation of the Partisol-FRM Sampler . Do not attempt the procedures described in this section until carrying out the step s in Sections 2, 3 and 4. Appendix A displays all of the sampler s screens, while Appen dix B contains a listing of the hardware s most important Program Register Codes. 5.1. 5.1.5.1.5.1.5.1.5.1. S SSSSSETUP ETUPETUPETUPETUPETUP S SSSSSCREEN CREENCREENCREENCREENCREEN The Setup screen (Figure 5-1) allows the user to define global parameters for th e operation of the Partisol-FRM Sampler, such as the current time and date, defaul t flow rate, and default sampling time parameters. The user must make the desired entri es for the current time, current date and default flow rate in the Stop Operating M ode in the manner described in Section 5.3. Figure 5-1. Setup screen. Stat:Ok Setup Mode:SAMP Cur Time: 19.36.37 Def Start: 0.00 Cur Date: 96/11/07 Def Dur: 24.00 Set Flow: 16.7 l/min Std Temp: 99.9 Std Press: 99.9 FTS Const M: 0.0000 Soft Ver: 1.202 FTS Const B: 0.0000 Ser Num: 1001 Edit Calib Diag RS232 Audit > Function Keys in Browse Mode Edit Calib Diag RS232 Audit > Passwd < Function Keys in Edit Mode ---+ ++ Bksp > +/< Press <F5: Setup> when in the Main screen (Figure 4-3) to enter the Setup screen . All of the fields in the Setup screen with the exception of the software version num ber are editable when the instrument is in the Stop Operating Mode. SECTION 5: SOFTWARE SETUP AND OPERATION PAGE 5-1

Revision B.003 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler . The sampler only allows changes to these parameters if it is in the Stop Operating Mode (Section 5.3). . The DefStart and DefDur parameters simplify the definition of sampling programs in the Filter Setup Screen (Section 5.2). The following fields make up the Setup screen: Cur Time The Cur Time parameter is the current local time (or other standard time selected by the user) expressed as hh.mm.ss. When editing this parameter, treat each part of the time as a separate field. Cur Date The Cur Date parameter is the current local date expressed as yy/mm/dd. When editing this parameter, treat each part of the date as a separate field. Set Flow The Set Flow parameter defines the flow rate (volumetric l/ min) at which the device draws a sample when it is in the Sampling Operating Mode (Section 5.3). This is identical to the Set Flow field in the Filter Setup Screen (Section 5.2). Def Start The Def Start parameter sets the default start time (hh.mm) of samples collected by the unit. The sampler uses this parameter to simplify sample programming in the Filter Setup screen (Section 5.2). The default value of 0 causes sampling to begin at midnight by default. Def Dur The Def Dur parameter establishes the default sampling duration (hh.mm) of samples collected by the Partisol unit. The sampler uses this parameter to simplify sample programming in the Filter Setup Screen (Section 5.2). The default value of 24 causes the sampling duration to be 24 hours by default. FTS Const m The FTS Constant parameter is the Streamline Flow Transfer Standard "m" calibration constant. The Streamline FTS can be used for verifying and calibrating the Partisol-FRM sampler flow. The sampler uses this constant to convert flow from inches H2O into l/min. FTS Const b The FTS Constant b parameter is the Streamline Flow Transfer Standard b calibration constant. The Streamline FTS can be used for verifying and calibrating the PartisolFRM sampler flow. The sampler uses this constant to convert flow from inches H2O into l/min. SECTION 5: SOFTWARE SETUP AND OPERATION PAGE 5-2

Revision B.003 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler . Password protection prevents inadvertent changes to system operations. Soft Ver R&P increments the software version number when it issues new releases of the Partisol-FRM operating software. Refer to Appendix E for instructions to upgrade the system software. This field is not editable. Ser Num The Ser Num field contains a shortened version of the sampler s serial number or other identifying information. The Setup Screen enables users to turn on password protection by pressing <F6: Passwd> when in the Browse Mode. Refer to Section 5.7 for instructions to turn password protection on and off. The Setup screen also provides users access to a variety of other hardware funct ions such as system calibrations (Section 1), diagnostics (Section 7), RS232 setup (S ection 9), and audits (Section 10). SECTION 5: SOFTWARE SETUP AND OPERATION PAGE 5-3

Revision B.003 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler 5.2. 5.2.5.2.5.2.5.2.5.2. F FFFFFILTER ILTERILTERILTERILTERILTER S SSSSSETUP ETUPETUPETUPETUPETUP S SSSSSCREEN CREENCREENCREENCREENCREEN The Filter Setup screen (Figure 5-2) provides a straightforward way for users to define the sampling program to be executed by the sampler. Press <F1: FiltSet> when in the Main screen (Figure 4-3) to enter the Filter Setup screen. Ensure that the sampl er is in the Stop Operating Mode (Section 5.3) before making any changes to the parameters contained in this screen. Figure 5-2. Filter Setup screen. Stat:Ok Filter Setup Mode:SAMP Current Time: 19.36 96/11/07 Start Time: 0.00 End Time: 0.00 Start Date: 96/11/07 End Date: 96/11/08 Set Flow: 16.7 l/min ID1: "96 " ID2: "00154 " Edit Next Hr NextDay + Day Set Def Function Keys in Browse Mode Edit Next Hr NextDay + Day Set Def Function Keys in Edit Mode -+ ++ Bksp > <---> Bksp < The Filter Setup screen contains the following fields to define the sampling pro gram . The sampler automati of the Partisol-FRM unit: cally ensures that the ending time/date is greater than the beginning time/ Start Time The Start Time parameter defines the time of day (hh.mm) date. It beeps if it makes at which sampling is to begin. When editing this para meter, any adjustments to the treat each part of the time as a separate field.

user's inputs. Start Date The Start Date parameter sets forth the date (yy/mm/dd) on which sampling is to begin. When editing this parameter, . Midnight is represented treat each part of the date as a separate field. by time 0. End Time The End Time parameter defines the time of day (hh.mm) at which sampling is to end. When editing this parameter, treat each part of the time as a separate field. SECTION 5: SOFTWARE SETUP AND OPERATION PAGE 5-4

Revision B.003 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler End Date The End Date parameter sets forth the date (yy/mm/dd) on which sampling is to end. When editing this parameter, treat each part of the date as a separate field. NOTE: To sample for an entire 24-hour period starting at midnight, enter 0 for both the Start Time and End Time parameters, and successive days for Start Date and End Date. For example, to sample during the entire day of 15 February 1997, enter 97/02/15 as the Start Date and 97/02/16 as for the End Date. Both the Start Time and End Time settings would be 0 in this case. Set Flow The Set Flow parameter determines the flow rate (volumetric l/min) at which the hardware samples when in the Sampling Mode (Section 5.3). This is identical to the Set Flow field of the Setup screen (Section 5.2). ID1, ID2 The Filter Setup screen contains two user-definable identification fields that are each 32 characters long. Use the special Edit Mode function keys <F8: <-- > (Shift F3:) and <F9: --> > (Shift F4::) to make changes to these fields. The sampler stores these fields in each record of filter data (Section 7.1). A number of function keys in the Browse Mode simplify the process of defining th e . The Browse Mode sampling program: function keys of the Filter Setup screen simplify the <F2: Next Hr> Pressing this key causes the sampler to revise the values of programming of the the Start Time, Start Date, End Time and End Date param sampler. eters. In this case, the start time and date are set so that the unit begins sampling at the start of the next whole hour. It automatically sets the ending time and date so that sampling takes place for the period defined by Def Dur in the Setup screen (Section 5.1). <F3: NextDay> Pressing this key causes the sampler to revise the values of the Start Time, Start Date, End Time and End Date parameters. In this case, these parameters are automatically set so that the unit begins sampling at the time specified by Def

Start and samples for the period defined by Def Dur in the Setup screen (Section 5.1). The unit uses the next available time slot that meets these requirements. SECTION 5: SOFTWARE SETUP AND OPERATION PAGE 5-5

Revision B.003 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler <F4: + Day> Pressing this key advances the values of Start Date and End Date by one day. <F5: Set Def> Pressing this key causes the sampler to revise the Def Start and Def Dur parameters of the Setup screen (Section 5.1) in accordance with the starting time and sampling duration currently set in the Filter Setup screen. NOTE: A convenient way to define the sampling program is to press <F3: Next Day> to define a base sampling period according to the Def Start and Def Dur parameters in the Setup Screen. Then press <F4: +Day> to increment the Start Date and End Date and arrive at the desired date. SECTION 5: SOFTWARE SETUP AND OPERATION PAGE 5-6

Revision B.003 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler 5.3. 5.3.5.3.5.3.5.3.5.3. O OOOOOPERATIONAL PERATIONALPERATIONALPERATIONALPERATIONALPERATIONAL M MMMMMODES ODESODESODESODESODES The Partisol-FRM Sampler displays its current operating mode in the upper righth and corner of the Main screen (Figure 4-3), as well as in the same position of certa in . Pressing <F4: Run/Stp> other screens. Press <F4: Run/Stp> when in the Main screen to switch between the in the Main screen toggles the sampler between the non-sampling Stop Operating Mode and the sampling progra m execution modes Stop Operating Mode and (Wait, Sampling, Done, Error). the system's operational states. The unit s operating modes (Figure 5-3) are defined as follows: Stop Mode In the Stop Operating Mode (STOP), the user exchanges filter cassettes and defines the sampling program using the Filter Setup screen. As this is the only non-operational mode, all user-definable system parameters may be edited with the sampler in this state. Pressing <F4: Run/Stp> in the Main screen with the hardware in this mode causes the sampler to advance to the Wait or Sampling Operating Modes. Wait Mode The Partisol system resides in this operating mode (WAIT) until the user-defined starting time/date is achieved. At that point, the device automatically enters the Sampling Operating Mode and begins sample collection. Pressing <F4: Run/Stp> in the Main screen with the hardware in this mode causes the sampler to return to the Stop Operating Mode. Sampling Mode While in this operating mode (SAMP), the sampler draws ambient air through its sampling system at the volumetric flow rate specified by the user (16.7 l/min by default). Unless the sample flow rate deviates from its set point by 10% or more for more than 60 sec, sampling continues until the ending time/date is reached. Pressing <F4: Run/ Stp> in the Main screen with the hardware in this mode causes the sampler to return to the Stop Operating Mode.

Once the ending time/date is reached, the unit automatically enters the Done Operating Mode if the current status code is Ok, or enters the Error Operating Mode if the sampler has encountered a status condition (Section 6.1). If the measured flow rate deviates from its set point by 10% or more for 60 sec, the sampler automatically enters SECTION 5: SOFTWARE SETUP AND OPERATION PAGE 5-7

Revision B.003 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler Figure 5-3. Overview of the sampler s operating modes. Stop (STOP) Operating Mode Wait (WAIT) Operating Mode Sampling (SAMP) Operating Mode Done (DONE) Operating Mode Error (ERR) Operating Mode Press <F4: Run/Stp> in Main Screen Press <F4: Run/Stp> in Main Screen Press <F4: Run/Stp> in Main Screen Define Sampling Program Define the sampling program in the Filter Setup Screen and exchange the sample filter when the sampler is in the Stop Operating Mode. Wait to Begin Collection The sampler resides in the Wait Operating Mode until the starting time/date is reached. Sample Collection If the current time is between the starting and ending time/ date, the device samples ambient air. Initiate Sampling Program After defining the sampling program, press <F4: Run/Stp> in the Main Screen to initiate the program. The system then enters the Wait or Sampling Operating Modes. Termination Conditions In the absence of any status conditions, the sampler enters the Done Operating Mode after the ending time/date is reached. Otherwise, it enters the Error Operating Mode. The sampler enters the Error Operating Mode before the ending time/date if it encounters status condition X (flow deviation of 10% or more for one minute). Return to Stop Op Mode

Press <F4: Run/Stp> when in the Main Screen to return to the Stop Operating Mode. Wait to exchange the sample filter until after the sampler returns to the Stop Operating Mode. SECTION 5: SOFTWARE SETUP AND OPERATION PAGE 5-8

Revision B.003 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler the Error Operating Mode even if the ending time/date is not yet achieved. In this case, the hardware displays a status code of X to indicate this condition (Section 6.1). Done Mode The sampler enters this mode (DONE) at the completion of its sampling program if it encountered no status conditions during sample collection (status code is Ok ). Pressing <F4: Run/Stp> in the Main screen with the hardware in this mode causes the sampler to return to the Stop Operating Mode. NOTE: Do not exchange filter cassettes with the sampler in this mode. Return to the Stop Operating Mode before exchanging the collection media. Error Mode The sampler proceeds to this mode (ERR) at the completion of its sampling program if it encountered a status condition during sample collection (status code is not Ok ), or if it encounters the flow rate deviation condition, X (Section 6.1). Pressing <F4: Run/Stp> in the Main screen with the hardware in this mode causes the sampler to return to the Stop Operating Mode. NOTE: Do not exchange filter cassettes with the sampler in this mode. Return to the Stop Operating Mode before exchanging the collection media The sequence of steps required to operate the sampler are as follows: Exchange the Filter and Define the Sampling Program With the hardware in the Stop Operating Mode, define the sampling program in the Filter Setup screen (Section 5.2) and install a new filter cassette (Section 3). Press <F4: Run/Stp> to Execute the Sampling Program Press <F4: Run/Stp> in the Main screen to enter the Wait Operating Mode. The sampler automatically advances from this mode to the Sampling Operating Mode when it arrives at the starting time/date. Once sampling is complete, the hardware proceeds to the Done or Error Operating Mode, depending upon the existence of any status codes. Press <F4: Run/Stp> to Return to the Stop Operating Mode With the sampler in either the Done or Error Operating Mode, press <F4: Run/Stp> in the Main screen to return to the Stop Operating Mode. After SECTION 5: SOFTWARE SETUP AND OPERATION PAGE 5-9

Revision B.003 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler returning to this state, exchange the sample filter and define the sampling program for the next filter to be exposed. The sampler completes the information recorded for each exposed filter in the fi lter storage buffer (Section 8.1) when the user returns the sampler to the Stop Opera ting Mode from one of its operational modes (Wait, Sampling, Done, and Error). SECTION 5: SOFTWARE SETUP AND OPERATION PAGE 5-10

Revision B.003 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler 5.4. 5.4.5.4.5.4.5.4.5.4. T TTTTTURNING URNINGURNINGURNINGURNINGURNING OFF OFFOFFOFFOFFOFF THE THETHETHETHETHE P PPPPPARTISOL ARTISOLARTISOLARTISOLARTISOLARTISOL-FRM S -FRM S-FRM S-FRM S-FRM S-FRM SAMPLER AMPLERAMPLERAMPLERAMPLERAMPLER Follow these steps to turn off the hardware: Follow these steps to turn off the hardware:Follow these steps to turn off the h ardware:Follow these steps to turn off the hardware:Follow these steps to turn o ff the hardware:Follow these steps to turn off the hardware: 1) 1)1)1)1)1)Display the Main screen by pressing <ESC> repeatedly, if necesDisplay the Main screen by pressing <ESC> repeatedly, if neces-Display the Main screen by pressing <ESC> repeatedly, if neces-Display the Main screen by pressin g <ESC> repeatedly, if neces-Display the Main screen by pressing <ESC> repeatedl y, if neces-Display the Main screen by pressing <ESC> repeatedly, if necessary. sary.sary.sary.sary.sary. . Ensure that the sampler is in the Stop Operating 2) 2)2)2)2)2) If the device is If the device isIf the device isIf the device isIf the device isIf the device is not notnotnotnotnot in the Stop Operating Mode, press <F4: Run/ in the Stop Operating Mode, press <F4: Run/in the Stop Operating Mode, press <F4 : Run/in the Stop Operating Mode, press <F4: Run/in the Stop Operating Mode, pre ss <F4: Run/in the Stop Operating Mode, press <F4: Run/ Mode before turning off the Stp> to enter the Stop Operating Mode. Stp> to enter the Stop Operating Mode.Stp> to enter the Stop Operating Mode.Stp> to enter the Stop Operating Mode.Stp> to enter the Stop Operating Mode.Stp> to enter the Stop Operating Mode. power.

3) 3)3)3)3)3)Press the power switch on the main panel of the Partisol-FRM Press the power switch on the main panel of the Partisol-FRMPress the power swit ch on the main panel of the Partisol-FRMPress the power switch on the main panel of the Partisol-FRMPress the power switch on the main panel of the Partisol-FRM Press the power switch on the main panel of the Partisol-FRM Sampler into its OFF ( 0 ) position (Figure 4-1). Sampler into its OFF ( 0 ) position (Figure 4-1).Sampler into its OFF ( 0 ) position (Fig 4-1).Sampler into its OFF ( 0 ) position (Figure 4-1).Sampler into its OFF ( 0 ) positio Figure 4-1).Sampler into its OFF ( 0 ) position (Figure 4-1). SECTION 5: SOFTWARE SETUP AND OPERATION PAGE 5-11

Revision B.003 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler . The backlighting of the LCD is turned off when the sampler is left unattended for 15 minutes. 5.5. 5.5.5.5.5.5.5.5.5.5. A AAAAAUTOMATIC UTOMATICUTOMATICUTOMATICUTOMATICUTOMATIC S SSSSSWITCHING WITCHINGWITCHINGWITCHINGWITCHINGWITCHING OF OFOFOFOFOF E EEEEEDIT DITDITDITDITDIT M MMMMMODES ODESODESODESODESODES AND ANDANDANDANDAND S SSSSSCREENS CREENSCREENSCREENSCREENSCREENS The Partisol-FRM Sampler takes a number of actions automatically during periods of inactivity: Anytime more than fifteen (15) minutes pass since the last keystroke was entered on the keypad, the backlighting of the LCD (liquid crystal display) dims. When this occurs, press any key to reactivate the screen s backlighting. If the sampler is left in the Edit Mode for more than five (5) minutes without any user keystrokes, it automatically reverts to the Browse Mode. Whenever the sampler remains in a screen other than the Main screen for longer than fifteen (15) minutes without any user keystrokes, the hardware automatically reverts to the Main screen. SECTION 5: SOFTWARE SETUP AND OPERATION PAGE 5-12

Revision B.003 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler . A large flow deviation spanning more than 60 seconds causes sampling to be cut off prematurely. . Ensure that the sampler is in the Stop Operating Mode before turning off the power. 5.6. 5.6.5.6.5.6.5.6.5.6. O OOOOOPERATION PERATIONPERATIONPERATIONPERATIONPERATION A AAAAAFTER FTERFTERFTERFTERFTER P PPPPPOWER OWEROWEROWEROWEROWER F FFFFFAILURE AILUREAILUREAILUREAILUREAILURE The Partisol-FRM Sampler performs the following actions upon resumption of power if the power failure occurs while the sampler is in its Sampling Operating Mode:

If the power outage is longer than 60 sec, the hardware registers a V status condition (Section 7.1) and stores the starting time of the power failure in hh.mm format in the current record of filter data (Section 8.1). If the ending time/date is not yet reached upon resumption of the power supply, the sampler continues its sampling program in the Sampling Operating Mode. Otherwise, it enters either the Done or Error Operating Modes, depending upon the existence of any status conditions. If the hardware is not in the Sampling Operating Mode at the time of the power f ailure, the unit resumes operation in its pre-outage operating mode upon restoration of power. SECTION 5: SOFTWARE SETUP AND OPERATION PAGE 5-13

Revision B.003 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler 5.7. 5.7.5.7.5.7.5.7.5.7. P PPPPPASSWORD ASSWORDASSWORDASSWORDASSWORDASSWORD P PPPPPROTECTION ROTECTIONROTECTIONROTECTIONROTECTIONROTECTION With password protection turned on, the sampler restricts the user to the Main s creen, and does not allow entry into the Edit Mode. 5.7.1. 5.7.1.5.7.1.5.7.1.5.7.1.5.7.1. T TTTTTURNING URNINGURNINGURNINGURNINGURNING O OOOOON NNNNN P PPPPPASSWORD ASSWORDASSWORDASSWORDASSWORDASSWORD P PPPPPROTECTION ROTECTIONROTECTIONROTECTIONROTECTIONROTECTION Follow these steps to initiate the password protection feature: Follow these steps to initiate the password protection feature:Follow these step s to initiate the password protection feature:Follow these steps to initiate the password protection feature:Follow these steps to initiate the password protect ion feature:Follow these steps to initiate the password protection feature: 1) 1)1)1)1)1)Before initiating password protection, record the instrument's Before initiating password protection, record the instrument'sBefore initiating password protection, record the instrument'sBefore initiating password protectio n, record the instrument'sBefore initiating password protection, record the inst rument'sBefore initiating password protection, record the instrument's five-digit serial number ( Ser Num ) in the Setup screen (Figure five-digit serial number ( Ser Num ) in the Setup screen (Figurefive-digit serial nu mber ( Ser Num ) in the Setup screen (Figurefive-digit serial number ( Ser Num ) in the Setup screen (Figurefive-digit serial number ( Ser Num ) in the Setup screen (Figure five-digit serial number ( Ser Num ) in the Setup screen (Figure 5-1). This is required to turn password protection off. 5-1). This is required to turn password protection off.5-1). This is required to turn password protection off.5-1). This is required to turn password protection off.5-1). This is required to turn password protection off.5-1). This is requir ed to turn password protection off. NOTE: If the sampler s serial number is not five digits long, then enter a value in the Ser Num field that is five characters long prior to turning on password protection. 2) 2)2)2)2)2)Press <F6: Passwd> to begin the password protection process. Press <F6: Passwd> to begin the password protection process.Press <F6: Passwd> t o begin the password protection process.Press <F6: Passwd> to begin the password protection process.Press <F6: Passwd> to begin the password protection process. Press <F6: Passwd> to begin the password protection process. 3)

3)3)3)3)3)Enter "YES" in the confirmation screen to turn password protecEnter "YES" in the confirmation screen to turn password protec-Enter "YES" in th e confirmation screen to turn password protec-Enter "YES" in the confirmation sc reen to turn password protec-Enter "YES" in the confirmation screen to turn pass word protec-Enter "YES" in the confirmation screen to turn password protection on. tion on.tion on.tion on.tion on.tion on. Upon entering password protection, the unit jumps to the Main screen and does no t allow for any keypad interaction except for turning off password protection. 5.7.2. 5.7.2.5.7.2.5.7.2.5.7.2.5.7.2. T TTTTTURNING URNINGURNINGURNINGURNINGURNING O OOOOOFF FFFFFFFFFF P PPPPPASSWORD ASSWORDASSWORDASSWORDASSWORDASSWORD P PPPPPROTECTION ROTECTIONROTECTIONROTECTIONROTECTIONROTECTION Follow these steps to turn off the password protection feature: Follow these steps to turn off the password protection feature:Follow these step s to turn off the password protection feature:Follow these steps to turn off the password protection feature:Follow these steps to turn off the password protect ion feature:Follow these steps to turn off the password protection feature: 1 11111) )))))When in the Main screen with password protection enabled, enter When in the Main screen with password protection enabled, enterWhen in the Main screen with password protection enabled, enterWhen in the Main screen with passw ord protection enabled, enterWhen in the Main screen with password protection en abled, enterWhen in the Main screen with password protection enabled, enter the following keystrokes: the following keystrokes:the following keystrokes:the following keystrokes:the f ollowing keystrokes:the following keystrokes: <ENTER> instrument serial number <ENTER> NOTE: The instrument will beep after each keystroke. 2) 2)2)2)2)2)The sampler will display a message indicating the successful The sampler will display a message indicating the successfulThe sampler will dis play a message indicating the successfulThe sampler will display a message indic ating the successfulThe sampler will display a message indicating the successful The sampler will display a message indicating the successful deactivation of password protection. If this procedure was deactivation of password protection. If this procedure wasdeactivation of passwo rd protection. If this procedure wasdeactivation of password protection. If this procedure wasdeactivation of password protection. If this procedure wasdeactiva tion of password protection. If this procedure was not notnotnotnotnot successful, the unit will beep twice. successful, the unit will beep twice.successful, the unit will beep twice.succes sful, the unit will beep twice.successful, the unit will beep twice.successful, the unit will beep twice.

Refer to Section 12.4 for further information on deactivating password protectio n. SECTION 5: SOFTWARE SETUP AND OPERATION PAGE 5-14

Revision B.001 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler Section 6: Section 6:Section 6:Section 6:Section 6:Section 6: Sampler Operation Sampler OperationSampler OperationSampler OperationSampler OperationSampler Oper ation This section describes the steps involved in verifying sampler performance chara cteristics prior to starting a sampling run, programming a sampling run and retreiving data after a sampling run. 6.1. 6.1.6.1.6.1.6.1.6.1. P PPPPPRE RERERERERE-S -S-S-S-S-SAMPLING AMPLINGAMPLINGAMPLINGAMPLINGAMPLING V VVVVVERIFICATION ERIFICATIONERIFICATIONERIFICATIONERIFICATIONERIFICATION R&P recommends that the user perform the pre-sampling verification tests every three months of routine operation and whenever the sampler is relocated. However , individual monitoring organizations may abide by different standards. Follow these steps to perform the pre-sampling verification procedure: Follow these steps to perform the pre-sampling verification procedure:Follow the se steps to perform the pre-sampling verification procedure:Follow these steps t o perform the pre-sampling verification procedure:Follow these steps to perform the pre-sampling verification procedure:Follow these steps to perform the pre-sa mpling verification procedure: NOTE: Refer to Section 6 of the U.S. EPA 2.12 Quality Assurance Handbook for the U.S. EPA verification schedule requirements. NOTE: Refer to Section 10 of this manual for more detailed information on programming the sampler for performance verification. 1) 1)1)1)1)1) Turn on the sampler by pressing the power switch on the main Turn on the sampler by pressing the power switch on the mainTurn on the sampler by pressing the power switch on the mainTurn on the sampler by pressing the powe r switch on the mainTurn on the sampler by pressing the power switch on the main Turn on the sampler by pressing the power switch on the main panel to its ON position. The sampler must be in the Stop Mode panel to its ON position. The sampler must be in the Stop Modepanel to its ON positi on. The sampler must be in the Stop Modepanel to its ON position. The sampler must be in the Stop Modepanel to its ON position. The sampler must be in the Stop Mode panel to its ON position. The sampler must be in the Stop Mode to perform the verification audits. If the sampler is not in the Stop to perform the verification audits. If the sampler is not in the Stopto perform the verification audits. If the sampler is not in the Stopto perform the verific ation audits. If the sampler is not in the Stopto perform the verification audit s. If the sampler is not in the Stopto perform the verification audits. If the s ampler is not in the Stop Mode, press <F4: Run/Stop> when in the Main screen. Mode, press <F4: Run/Stop> when in the Main screen.Mode, press <F4: Run/Stop> wh

en in the Main screen.Mode, press <F4: Run/Stop> when in the Main screen.Mode, p ress <F4: Run/Stop> when in the Main screen.Mode, press <F4: Run/Stop> when in t he Main screen. 2) 2)2)2)2)2) Verify the sampler s ambient temperature by pressing <F5: Setup> Verify the sampler s ambient temperature by pressing <F5: Setup>Verify the sampler s ambient temperature by pressing <F5: Setup>Verify the sampler s ambient temperatu re by pressing <F5: Setup>Verify the sampler s ambient temperature by pressing <F5 : Setup>Verify the sampler s ambient temperature by pressing <F5: Setup> to access the Setup screen, then press<F5:Audit> to access the to access the Setup screen, then press<F5:Audit> to access theto access the Setu p screen, then press<F5:Audit> to access theto access the Setup screen, then pre ss<F5:Audit> to access theto access the Setup screen, then press<F5:Audit> to ac cess theto access the Setup screen, then press<F5:Audit> to access the Audit screen (Figure 6-1). Determine the current ambient temAudit screen (Figure 6-1). Determine the current ambient tem-Audit screen (Figur e 6-1). Determine the current ambient tem-Audit screen (Figure 6-1). Determine t he current ambient tem-Audit screen (Figure 6-1). Determine the current ambient tem-Audit screen (Figure 6-1). Determine the current ambient temperature (C) at the ambient temperature sensor using an external perature (C) at the ambient temperature sensor using an externalperature (C) at th e ambient temperature sensor using an externalperature (C) at the ambient tempera ture sensor using an externalperature (C) at the ambient temperature sensor using an externalperature (C) at the ambient temperature sensor using an external thermometer. Verify that the value for the temperature displayed thermometer. Verify that the value for the temperature displayedthermometer. Ver ify that the value for the temperature displayedthermometer. Verify that the val ue for the temperature displayedthermometer. Verify that the value for the tempe rature displayedthermometer. Verify that the value for the temperature displayed by the Partisol-FRM in the Audit screen is within 2 C of the by the Partisol-FRM in the Audit screen is within 2 C of theby the Partisol-FRM in the Audit screen is within 2 C of theby the Partisol-FRM in the Audit screen is w ithin 2 C of theby the Partisol-FRM in the Audit screen is within 2 C of theby the P artisol-FRM in the Audit screen is within 2 C of the measured temperature. If this is not the case, the sampler remeasured temperature. If this is not the case, the sampler re-measured temperatu re. If this is not the case, the sampler re-measured temperature. If this is not the case, the sampler re-measured temperature. If this is not the case, the sam pler re-measured temperature. If this is not the case, the sampler requires calibration (Service Manual). quires calibration (Service Manual).quires calibration (Service Manual).quires c alibration (Service Manual).quires calibration (Service Manual).quires calibrati on (Service Manual). Figure 6-1. Audit screen. Audit Amb Temp: 25.4 C Amb Pres: 753 mm Hg Filt Temp: 25.6 C Sys Pres: N/A mm Hg FTS Pres: 0.00 in H2O Cur Flow: -0.3 l/min FTS Flow: 0.00 l/min Edit Valve Pump LeakCk SECTION 6: SAMPLER OPERATION PAGE 6-1

Revision B.001 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler 3) 3)3)3)3)3) Verify the sampler s filter temperature by measuring the temperaVerify the sampler s filter temperature by measuring the tempera-Verify the sample r s filter temperature by measuring the tempera-Verify the sampler s filter temperat ure by measuring the tempera-Verify the sampler s filter temperature by measuring the tempera-Verify the sampler s filter temperature by measuring the temperature (C) at the location of the filter in the Partisol-FRM Sampler ture (C) at the location of the filter in the Partisol-FRM Samplerture (C) at the location of the filter in the Partisol-FRM Samplerture (C) at the location of the filter in the Partisol-FRM Samplerture (C) at the location of the filter in the Partisol-FRM Samplerture (C) at the location of the filter in the Partisol-FRM Sa mpler using an external thermometer. Verify that the value for the using an external thermometer. Verify that the value for theusing an external th ermometer. Verify that the value for theusing an external thermometer. Verify th at the value for theusing an external thermometer. Verify that the value for the using an external thermometer. Verify that the value for the temperature displayed by the sampler in the Audit screen is temperature displayed by the sampler in the Audit screen istemperature displayed by the sampler in the Audit screen istemperature displayed by the sampler in th e Audit screen istemperature displayed by the sampler in the Audit screen istemp erature displayed by the sampler in the Audit screen is within 2 C of the measured temperature. If this is not the case, within 2 C of the measured temperature. If this is not the case,within 2 C of the me asured temperature. If this is not the case,within 2 C of the measured temperature . If this is not the case,within 2 C of the measured temperature. If this is not t he case,within 2 C of the measured temperature. If this is not the case, the sampler requires calibration (Service Manual). the sampler requires calibration (Service Manual).the sampler requires calibrati on (Service Manual).the sampler requires calibration (Service Manual).the sample r requires calibration (Service Manual).the sampler requires calibration (Servic e Manual). 4) 4)4)4)4)4) Verify the sampler s ambient pressure by measuring the current Verify the sampler s ambient pressure by measuring the currentVerify the sampler s a mbient pressure by measuring the currentVerify the sampler s ambient pressure by m easuring the currentVerify the sampler s ambient pressure by measuring the current Verify the sampler s ambient pressure by measuring the current ambient station pressure in mm Hg (i.e., absolute pressure, not ambient station pressure in mm Hg (i.e., absolute pressure, notambient station p ressure in mm Hg (i.e., absolute pressure, notambient station pressure in mm Hg (i.e., absolute pressure, notambient station pressure in mm Hg (i.e., absolute p ressure, notambient station pressure in mm Hg (i.e., absolute pressure, not corrected to sea level). Verify that the value for ambient pressure corrected to sea level). Verify that the value for ambient pressurecorrected to sea level). Verify that the value for ambient pressurecorrected to sea level). V erify that the value for ambient pressurecorrected to sea level). Verify that th e value for ambient pressurecorrected to sea level). Verify that the value for a mbient pressure displayed in the Audit screen is within 10 mm Hg of the meadisplayed in the Audit screen is within 10 mm Hg of the mea-displayed in the Audi t screen is within 10 mm Hg of the mea-displayed in the Audit screen is within 10 mm Hg of the mea-displayed in the Audit screen is within 10 mm Hg of the mea-disp layed in the Audit screen is within 10 mm Hg of the measured

ambient pressure. If this is not the case, the sampler sured ambient pressure. If this is not the case, the samplersured ambient pressu re. If this is not the case, the samplersured ambient pressure. If this is not t he case, the samplersured ambient pressure. If this is not the case, the sampler sured ambient pressure. If this is not the case, the sampler requires calibration (Service Manual). requires calibration (Service Manual).requires calibration (Service Manual).requ ires calibration (Service Manual).requires calibration (Service Manual).requires calibration (Service Manual). 5) 5)5)5)5)5) Install a clean, unused 47 mm filter into the filter cassette. Place Install a clean, unused 47 mm filter into the filter cassette. PlaceInstall a cl ean, unused 47 mm filter into the filter cassette. PlaceInstall a clean, unused 47 mm filter into the filter cassette. PlaceInstall a clean, unused 47 mm filter into the filter cassette. PlaceInstall a clean, unused 47 mm filter into the fi lter cassette. Place the filter cassette with its 47 mm filter installed into the filter the filter cassette with its 47 mm filter installed into the filterthe filter ca ssette with its 47 mm filter installed into the filterthe filter cassette with i ts 47 mm filter installed into the filterthe filter cassette with its 47 mm filt er installed into the filterthe filter cassette with its 47 mm filter installed into the filter cassette carrier. Carefully insert the filter cassette carrier into the cassette carrier. Carefully insert the filter cassette carrier into thecassette carrier. Carefully insert the filter cassette carrier into thecassette carrier. Carefully insert the filter cassette carrier into thecassette carrier. Carefully insert the filter cassette carrier into thecassette carrier. Carefully insert t he filter cassette carrier into the lower part of the filter exchange mechanism. The carrier contains lower part of the filter exchange mechanism. The carrier containslower part of t he filter exchange mechanism. The carrier containslower part of the filter excha nge mechanism. The carrier containslower part of the filter exchange mechanism. The carrier containslower part of the filter exchange mechanism. The carrier con tains a slot and hole that fit into the appropriate locations of the lower a slot and hole that fit into the appropriate locations of the lowera slot and h ole that fit into the appropriate locations of the lowera slot and hole that fit into the appropriate locations of the lowera slot and hole that fit into the ap propriate locations of the lowera slot and hole that fit into the appropriate lo cations of the lower part of the filter exchange mechanism. Push forward on the part of the filter exchange mechanism. Push forward on thepart of the filter exc hange mechanism. Push forward on thepart of the filter exchange mechanism. Push forward on thepart of the filter exchange mechanism. Push forward on thepart of the filter exchange mechanism. Push forward on the handle of the filter exchange mechanism to raise the filter plathandle of the filter exchange mechanism to raise the filter plat-handle of the f ilter exchange mechanism to raise the filter plat-handle of the filter exchange mechanism to raise the filter plat-handle of the filter exchange mechanism to ra ise the filter plat-handle of the filter exchange mechanism to raise the filter platform and enclose the filter cassette. Carefully remove the PM-10 form and enclose the filter cassette. Carefully remove the PM-10form and enclose the filter cassette. Carefully remove the PM-10form and enclose the filter cass ette. Carefully remove the PM-10form and enclose the filter cassette. Carefully remove the PM-10form and enclose the filter cassette. Carefully remove the PM-10 inlet from the sampler and install the supplied flow audit adapter inlet from the sampler and install the supplied flow audit adapterinlet from the

sampler and install the supplied flow audit adapterinlet from the sampler and i nstall the supplied flow audit adapterinlet from the sampler and install the sup plied flow audit adapterinlet from the sampler and install the supplied flow aud it adapter on the end of the sample tube (Figure 6-2). Turn the valve on the on the end of the sample tube (Figure 6-2). Turn the valve on theon the end of t he sample tube (Figure 6-2). Turn the valve on theon the end of the sample tube (Figure 6-2). Turn the valve on theon the end of the sample tube (Figure 6-2). T urn the valve on theon the end of the sample tube (Figure 6-2). Turn the valve o n the flow audit adapter to its closed position. flow audit adapter to its closed position.flow audit adapter to its closed posit ion.flow audit adapter to its closed position.flow audit adapter to its closed p osition.flow audit adapter to its closed position. Figure 6-2. Flow audit adapter installed on the end of the sample tube. SECTION 6: SAMPLER OPERATION PAGE 6-2

Revision B.001 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler 6) 6)6)6)6)6) If you have a unit that supports the automatic leak check function If you have a unit that supports the automatic leak check functionIf you have a unit that supports the automatic leak check functionIf you have a unit that supp orts the automatic leak check functionIf you have a unit that supports the autom atic leak check functionIf you have a unit that supports the automatic leak chec k function (Section 10), go to step 7. If you do not have a unit that supports (Section 10), go to step 7. If you do not have a unit that supports(Section 10), go to step 7. If you do not have a unit that supports(Section 10), go to step 7 . If you do not have a unit that supports(Section 10), go to step 7. If you do n ot have a unit that supports(Section 10), go to step 7. If you do not have a uni t that supports the automatic leak check function, go to Section 10. the automatic leak check function, go to Section 10.the automatic leak check fun ction, go to Section 10.the automatic leak check function, go to Section 10.the automatic leak check function, go to Section 10.the automatic leak check functio n, go to Section 10. 7) 7)7)7)7)7) Perform a leak check by pressing <F5: LeakCk>. Follow the inPerform a leak check by pressing <F5: LeakCk>. Follow the in-Perform a leak chec k by pressing <F5: LeakCk>. Follow the in-Perform a leak check by pressing <F5: LeakCk>. Follow the in-Perform a leak check by pressing <F5: LeakCk>. Follow the in-Perform a leak check by pressing <F5: LeakCk>. Follow the instructions on the screen to begin the automatic leak check cycle. structions on the screen to begin the automatic leak check cycle.structions on t he screen to begin the automatic leak check cycle.structions on the screen to be gin the automatic leak check cycle.structions on the screen to begin the automat ic leak check cycle.structions on the screen to begin the automatic leak check c ycle. (Turn off (Turn off(Turn off(Turn off(Turn off(Turn off the manual shut off valve attached to the large air filter the manual shut off valve attached to the large air filterthe manual shut off va lve attached to the large air filterthe manual shut off valve attached to the la rge air filterthe manual shut off valve attached to the large air filterthe manu al shut off valve attached to the large air filter on the left-hand side of the manifold in the hub. This corresponds on the left-hand side of the manifold in the hub. This correspondson the left-ha nd side of the manifold in the hub. This correspondson the left-hand side of the manifold in the hub. This correspondson the left-hand side of the manifold in t he hub. This correspondson the left-hand side of the manifold in the hub. This c orresponds to location A in Figure 6.3. Wait for the automatic leak check to location A in Figure 6.3. Wait for the automatic leak checkto location A in Figur e 6.3. Wait for the automatic leak checkto location A in Figure 6.3. Wait for the automatic leak checkto location A in Figure 6.3. Wait for the automatic leak check to location A in Figure 6.3. Wait for the automatic leak check cycle to complete. The sampler will display a message at the end cycle to complete. The sampler will display a message at the endcycle to complet e. The sampler will display a message at the endcycle to complete. The sampler w ill display a message at the endcycle to complete. The sampler will display a me ssage at the endcycle to complete. The sampler will display a message at the end

of the cycle indicating the vacuum loss (mm Hg) during the 60 of the cycle indicating the vacuum loss (mm Hg) during the 60of the cycle indica ting the vacuum loss (mm Hg) during the 60of the cycle indicating the vacuum los s (mm Hg) during the 60of the cycle indicating the vacuum loss (mm Hg) during th e 60of the cycle indicating the vacuum loss (mm Hg) during the 60 second leak check, and a pass or fail message. The criteria for a second leak check, and a pass or fail message. The criteria for asecond leak che ck, and a pass or fail message. The criteria for asecond leak check, and a pass or fail message. The criteria for asecond leak check, and a pass or fail message . The criteria for asecond leak check, and a pass or fail message. The criteria for a successful leak test is a drop of less than 127 mm Hg in one successful leak test is a drop of less than 127 mm Hg in onesuccessful leak test is a drop of less than 127 mm Hg in onesuccessful leak test is a drop of less t han 127 mm Hg in onesuccessful leak test is a drop of less than 127 mm Hg in one successful leak test is a drop of less than 127 mm Hg in one minute. Open the manual valve on the sampler then release the minute. Open the manual valve on the sampler then release theminute. Open the ma nual valve on the sampler then release theminute. Open the manual valve on the s ampler then release theminute. Open the manual valve on the sampler then release theminute. Open the manual valve on the sampler then release the vacuum (slowly) by opening the flow audit adapter valve. If the vacuum (slowly) by opening the flow audit adapter valve. If thevacuum (slowly) b y opening the flow audit adapter valve. If thevacuum (slowly) by opening the flo w audit adapter valve. If thevacuum (slowly) by opening the flow audit adapter v alve. If thevacuum (slowly) by opening the flow audit adapter valve. If the leak check fails, refer to Section 10). leak check fails, refer to Section 10).leak check fails, refer to Section 10).le ak check fails, refer to Section 10).leak check fails, refer to Section 10).leak check fails, refer to Section 10). Figure 6-3. Flow control manual valve (A) displayed in its closed position. 8) 8)8)8)8)8) Verify the sampler s flow. If you are using a Streamline Flow Verify the sampler s flow. If you are using a Streamline FlowVerify the sampler s fl ow. If you are using a Streamline FlowVerify the sampler s flow. If you are using a Streamline FlowVerify the sampler s flow. If you are using a Streamline FlowVeri fy the sampler s flow. If you are using a Streamline Flow Transfer Standard (FTS) to measure flow, refer to Section 10 to Transfer Standard (FTS) to measure flow, refer to Section 10 toTransfer Standard (FTS) to measure flow, refer to Section 10 toTransfer Standard (FTS) to measure flow, refer to Section 10 toTransfer Standard (FTS) to measure flow, refer to S ection 10 toTransfer Standard (FTS) to measure flow, refer to Section 10 to program the sampler with the FTS calibration constants. Remove program the sampler with the FTS calibration constants. Removeprogram the sample r with the FTS calibration constants. Removeprogram the sampler with the FTS cal ibration constants. Removeprogram the sampler with the FTS calibration constants . Removeprogram the sampler with the FTS calibration constants. Remove the flow audit adapter and attach the Streamline FTS to the the flow audit adapter and attach the Streamline FTS to thethe flow audit adapte r and attach the Streamline FTS to thethe flow audit adapter and attach the Stre amline FTS to thethe flow audit adapter and attach the Streamline FTS to thethe flow audit adapter and attach the Streamline FTS to the sample tube (Figure 6-4). Other flow meters may require the use sample tube (Figure 6-4). Other flow meters may require the usesample tube (Figu re 6-4). Other flow meters may require the usesample tube (Figure 6-4). Other fl

ow meters may require the usesample tube (Figure 6-4). Other flow meters may req uire the usesample tube (Figure 6-4). Other flow meters may require the use of the flow audit adapter (with its valve in the open position). of the flow audit adapter (with its valve in the open position).of the flow audi t adapter (with its valve in the open position).of the flow audit adapter (with its valve in the open position).of the flow audit adapter (with its valve in the open position).of the flow audit adapter (with its valve in the open position). SECTION 6: SAMPLER OPERATION PAGE 6-3

Revision B.001 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler Figure 6-4. Streamline FTS installed on the end of the sample tube. 9) 9)9)9)9)9) Press <F2: Pump>, then <F1: Valve>. If you are using the StreamPress <F2: Pump>, then <F1: Valve>. If you are using the Stream-Press <F2: Pump> , then <F1: Valve>. If you are using the Stream-Press <F2: Pump>, then <F1: Valv e>. If you are using the Stream-Press <F2: Pump>, then <F1: Valve>. If you are u sing the Stream-Press <F2: Pump>, then <F1: Valve>. If you are using the Streaml ine FTS, press <F1: Edit> then enter the pressure drop (inches line FTS, press <F1: Edit> then enter the pressure drop (inchesline FTS, press < F1: Edit> then enter the pressure drop (inchesline FTS, press <F1: Edit> then en ter the pressure drop (inchesline FTS, press <F1: Edit> then enter the pressure drop (inchesline FTS, press <F1: Edit> then enter the pressure drop (inches H HHHHH2 22222O), and then press the <ENTER> key. The Partisol-FRM will O), and then press the <ENTER> key. The Partisol-FRM willO), and then press the <ENTER> key. The Partisol-FRM willO), and then press the <ENTER> key. The Partis ol-FRM willO), and then press the <ENTER> key. The Partisol-FRM willO), and then press the <ENTER> key. The Partisol-FRM will calculate the flow in l/min. If you are not using the Streamline calculate the flow in l/min. If you are not using the Streamlinecalculate the fl ow in l/min. If you are not using the Streamlinecalculate the flow in l/min. If you are not using the Streamlinecalculate the flow in l/min. If you are not usin g the Streamlinecalculate the flow in l/min. If you are not using the Streamline FTS, determine the flow in actual (volumetric) l/min using the FTS, determine the flow in actual (volumetric) l/min using theFTS, determine the flow in actual (volumetric) l/min using theFTS, determine the flow in actual (v olumetric) l/min using theFTS, determine the flow in actual (volumetric) l/min u sing theFTS, determine the flow in actual (volumetric) l/min using the external flow meter. external flow meter.external flow meter.external flow meter.external flow meter. external flow meter. 10) 10)10)10)10)10) Verify either that the displayed Streamline FTS Flow or the meaVerify either that the displayed Streamline FTS Flow or the mea-Verify either th at the displayed Streamline FTS Flow or the mea-Verify either that the displayed Streamline FTS Flow or the mea-Verify either that the displayed Streamline FTS Flow or the mea-Verify either that the displayed Streamline FTS Flow or the meas ured flow is within 5% of the value displayed in the Flow Rate sured flow is within 5% of the value displayed in the Flow Rate sured flow is within 5% of the value displayed in the Flow Rate sured flow is within 5% of the value disp layed in the Flow Rate sured flow is within 5% of the value displayed in the Flow Rat e sured flow is within 5% of the value displayed in the Flow Rate field of the Audit screen. If this is not the case, the sampler field of the Audit screen. If this is not the case, the samplerfield of the Audi t screen. If this is not the case, the samplerfield of the Audit screen. If this is not the case, the samplerfield of the Audit screen. If this is not the case,

the samplerfield of the Audit screen. If this is not the case, the sampler requires calibration (Service Manual). requires calibration (Service Manual).requires calibration (Service Manual).requ ires calibration (Service Manual).requires calibration (Service Manual).requires calibration (Service Manual). 11) 11)11)11)11)11) The TheTheTheTheThe performance verification is now complete. Return to the Main performance verification is now complete. Return to the Mainperformance verifica tion is now complete. Return to the Mainperformance verification is now complete . Return to the Mainperformance verification is now complete. Return to the Main performance verification is now complete. Return to the Main screen by pressing the <ESC> key twice. screen by pressing the <ESC> key twice.screen by pressing the <ESC> key twice.sc reen by pressing the <ESC> key twice.screen by pressing the <ESC> key twice.scre en by pressing the <ESC> key twice. 12) 12)12)12)12)12) Restore the sampling hardware to its original state by removing Restore the sampling hardware to its original state by removingRestore the sampl ing hardware to its original state by removingRestore the sampling hardware to i ts original state by removingRestore the sampling hardware to its original state by removingRestore the sampling hardware to its original state by removing the flow metering hardware and reinstalling the PM-10 inlet on the flow metering hardware and reinstalling the PM-10 inlet onthe flow metering hardware and reinstalling the PM-10 inlet onthe flow metering hardware and reins talling the PM-10 inlet onthe flow metering hardware and reinstalling the PM-10 inlet onthe flow metering hardware and reinstalling the PM-10 inlet on the sample tube. Remove the filter cassette from the sampler and the sample tube. Remove the filter cassette from the sampler andthe sample tube. Remove the filter cassette from the sampler andthe sample tube. Remove the filt er cassette from the sampler andthe sample tube. Remove the filter cassette from the sampler andthe sample tube. Remove the filter cassette from the sampler and discard the installed filter. discard the installed filter.discard the installed filter.discard the installed filter.discard the installed filter.discard the installed filter. SECTION 6: SAMPLER OPERATION PAGE 6-4

Revision B.001 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler 6.2. 6.2.6.2.6.2.6.2.6.2. P PPPPPROGRAMMING ROGRAMMINGROGRAMMINGROGRAMMINGROGRAMMINGROGRAMMING S SSSSSAMPLER AMPLERAMPLERAMPLERAMPLERAMPLER S SSSSSETUP ETUPETUPETUPETUPETUP This section describes the procedures for programming the sampler for a sampling run. A filter cassette with a 47 mm filter must be installed in the hardware bef ore starting the sampling run. NOTE: Refer to Section 5 of this manual for more detailed information on programming sampler setup. Follow these steps to program the sampler for sampling: Follow these steps to program the sampler for sampling:Follow these steps to pro gram the sampler for sampling:Follow these steps to program the sampler for samp ling:Follow these steps to program the sampler for sampling:Follow these steps t o program the sampler for sampling: 1) 1)1)1)1)1) If the sampler is not in the Stop Mode, press the <RUN/STOP> key If the sampler is not in the Stop Mode, press the <RUN/STOP> keyIf the sampler i s not in the Stop Mode, press the <RUN/STOP> keyIf the sampler is not in the Sto p Mode, press the <RUN/STOP> keyIf the sampler is not in the Stop Mode, press th e <RUN/STOP> keyIf the sampler is not in the Stop Mode, press the <RUN/STOP> key when in the Main screen to enter the Stop Mode. when in the Main screen to enter the Stop Mode.when in the Main screen to enter the Stop Mode.when in the Main screen to enter the Stop Mode.when in the Main sc reen to enter the Stop Mode.when in the Main screen to enter the Stop Mode. 2) 2)2)2)2)2) Press <F5:Setup> to access the Setup screen. Press <F5:Setup> to access the Setup screen.Press <F5:Setup> to access the Setup screen.Press <F5:Setup> to access the Setup screen.Press <F5:Setup> to access t he Setup screen.Press <F5:Setup> to access the Setup screen. 3) 3)3)3)3)3) Confirm that the correct time, date and set flow rate are displayed Confirm that the correct time, date and set flow rate are displayedConfirm that the correct time, date and set flow rate are displayedConfirm that the correct t ime, date and set flow rate are displayedConfirm that the correct time, date and set flow rate are displayedConfirm that the correct time, date and set flow rat e are displayed on the Setup screen. If the correct time, date and set flow rate are on the Setup screen. If the correct time, date and set flow rate areon the Setup screen. If the correct time, date and set flow rate areon the Setup screen. If the correct time, date and set flow rate areon the Setup screen. If the correct time, date and set flow rate areon the Setup screen. If the correct time, date a nd set flow rate are not displayed, re-set the sampler by pressing <F1: Edit>, then

not displayed, re-set the sampler by pressing <F1: Edit>, thennot displayed, reset the sampler by pressing <F1: Edit>, thennot displayed, re-set the sampler by pressing <F1: Edit>, thennot displayed, re-set the sampler by pressing <F1: Edi t>, thennot displayed, re-set the sampler by pressing <F1: Edit>, then enter the correct data using the keypad. Press the <ENTER> key. enter the correct data using the keypad. Press the <ENTER> key.enter the correct data using the keypad. Press the <ENTER> key.enter the correct data using the k eypad. Press the <ENTER> key.enter the correct data using the keypad. Press the <ENTER> key.enter the correct data using the keypad. Press the <ENTER> key. 4) 4)4)4)4)4) Press the <ESC> key to return to the Main screen, then Press the <ESC> key to return to the Main screen, thenPress the <ESC> key to ret urn to the Main screen, thenPress the <ESC> key to return to the Main screen, th enPress the <ESC> key to return to the Main screen, thenPress the <ESC> key to r eturn to the Main screen, then <F1:Setup> to enter the Filter Setup screen (Figure 6-5). <F1:Setup> to enter the Filter Setup screen (Figure 6-5).<F1:Setup> to enter the Filter Setup screen (Figure 6-5).<F1:Setup> to enter the Filter Setup screen (F igure 6-5).<F1:Setup> to enter the Filter Setup screen (Figure 6-5).<F1:Setup> t o enter the Filter Setup screen (Figure 6-5). Figure 6-5 Filter Setup screen. Stat:Ok Filter Setup Mode:SAMP Current Time: 19.36 96/11/07 Start Time: 0.00 End Time: 0.00 Start Date: 96/11/07 End Date: 96/11/08 Set Flow: 16.7 l/min ID1: "96 " ID2: "00154 " Edit Next Hr NextDay + Day Set Def Function Keys in Browse Mode Edit Next Hr NextDay + Day Set Def Function Keys in Edit Mode -+ ++ Bksp > <---> Bksp < SECTION 6: SAMPLER OPERATION PAGE 6-5

Revision B.001 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler 5) 5)5)5)5)5) Press <F1:Edit>, then enter the sample run start time and start Press <F1:Edit>, then enter the sample run start time and startPress <F1:Edit>, then enter the sample run start time and startPress <F1:Edit>, then enter the sa mple run start time and startPress <F1:Edit>, then enter the sample run start ti me and startPress <F1:Edit>, then enter the sample run start time and start date, end time and end date, (and ID1 and ID2 if desired). Press date, end time and end date, (and ID1 and ID2 if desired). Pressdate, end time a nd end date, (and ID1 and ID2 if desired). Pressdate, end time and end date, (an d ID1 and ID2 if desired). Pressdate, end time and end date, (and ID1 and ID2 if desired). Pressdate, end time and end date, (and ID1 and ID2 if desired). Press the <ENTER> key. Press the <ESC> key to return to the Main the <ENTER> key. Press the <ESC> key to return to the Mainthe <ENTER> key. Press the <ESC> key to return to the Mainthe <ENTER> key. Press the <ESC> key to retu rn to the Mainthe <ENTER> key. Press the <ESC> key to return to the Mainthe <ENT ER> key. Press the <ESC> key to return to the Main screen. screen.screen.screen.screen.screen. 6) 6)6)6)6)6) Press the <RUN/STOP> key. The sampler should now enter the Press the <RUN/STOP> key. The sampler should now enter thePress the <RUN/STOP> k ey. The sampler should now enter thePress the <RUN/STOP> key. The sampler should now enter thePress the <RUN/STOP> key. The sampler should now enter thePress th e <RUN/STOP> key. The sampler should now enter the Wait Mode. Verify that the correct sampler run data (start time Wait Mode. Verify that the correct sampler run data (start timeWait Mode. Verify that the correct sampler run data (start timeWait Mode. Verify that the correct sampler run data (start timeWait Mode. Verify that the correct sampler run data (start timeWait Mode. Verify that the correct sampler run data (start time and date, etc.) is displayed on the Main screen. and date, etc.) is displayed on the Main screen.and date, etc.) is displayed on the Main screen.and date, etc.) is displayed on the Main screen.and date, etc.) is displayed on the Main screen.and date, etc.) is displayed on the Main screen. 7) 7)7)7)7)7) When the clock time equals the sample start time, the sampler will When the clock time equals the sample start time, the sampler willWhen the clock time equals the sample start time, the sampler willWhen the clock time equals t he sample start time, the sampler willWhen the clock time equals the sample star t time, the sampler willWhen the clock time equals the sample start time, the sa mpler will automatically enter the Sampling Mode and begin the sampling automatically enter the Sampling Mode and begin the samplingautomatically enter the Sampling Mode and begin the samplingautomatically enter the Sampling Mode an d begin the samplingautomatically enter the Sampling Mode and begin the sampling automatically enter the Sampling Mode and begin the sampling run. run.run.run.run.run. 8) 8)8)8)8)8) When the clock time equals the sample stop time, the sampler will When the clock time equals the sample stop time, the sampler willWhen the clock

time equals the sample stop time, the sampler willWhen the clock time equals the sample stop time, the sampler willWhen the clock time equals the sample stop ti me, the sampler willWhen the clock time equals the sample stop time, the sampler will automatically end the sampling run, and enter the Done Mode. If automatically end the sampling run, and enter the Done Mode. Ifautomatically end the sampling run, and enter the Done Mode. Ifautomatically end the sampling run , and enter the Done Mode. Ifautomatically end the sampling run, and enter the D one Mode. Ifautomatically end the sampling run, and enter the Done Mode. If a status condition occurred during the sampling run, the Error a status condition occurred during the sampling run, the Errora status condition occurred during the sampling run, the Errora status condition occurred during t he sampling run, the Errora status condition occurred during the sampling run, t he Errora status condition occurred during the sampling run, the Error Mode will display instead of the Done Mode. Mode will display instead of the Done Mode.Mode will display instead of the Done Mode.Mode will display instead of the Done Mode.Mode will display instead of th e Done Mode.Mode will display instead of the Done Mode. 9) 9)9)9)9)9) Press <F4: Run/Stop> to enter the Stop Mode before exchanging Press <F4: Run/Stop> to enter the Stop Mode before exchangingPress <F4: Run/Stop > to enter the Stop Mode before exchangingPress <F4: Run/Stop> to enter the Stop Mode before exchangingPress <F4: Run/Stop> to enter the Stop Mode before exchan gingPress <F4: Run/Stop> to enter the Stop Mode before exchanging filter cassettes or retrieving data on the sampling run. filter cassettes or retrieving data on the sampling run.filter cassettes or retr ieving data on the sampling run.filter cassettes or retrieving data on the sampl ing run.filter cassettes or retrieving data on the sampling run.filter cassettes or retrieving data on the sampling run. SECTION 6: SAMPLER OPERATION PAGE 6-6

Revision B.001 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler 6.3. 6.3.6.3.6.3.6.3.6.3. P PPPPPOST OSTOSTOSTOSTOST S SSSSSAMPLING AMPLINGAMPLINGAMPLINGAMPLINGAMPLING V VVVVVERIFICATION ERIFICATIONERIFICATIONERIFICATIONERIFICATIONERIFICATION AND ANDANDANDANDAND D DDDDDATA ATAATAATAATAATA R RRRRRETRIEVAL ETRIEVALETRIEVALETRIEVALETRIEVALETRIEVAL This section describes the procedures for verifying the sampling run status and retrieving the sampling run data. NOTE: Refer to Section 7 and 8 for more complete information on verification and data retrieval. Follow these steps to verify the sampling run and retrieve data from the Follow these steps to verify the sampling run and retrieve data from theFollow t hese steps to verify the sampling run and retrieve data from theFollow these ste ps to verify the sampling run and retrieve data from theFollow these steps to ve rify the sampling run and retrieve data from theFollow these steps to verify the sampling run and retrieve data from the unit: unit:unit:unit:unit:unit: 1) 1)1)1)1)1) After the sampling run is complete, press the <RUN/STOP> key After the sampling run is complete, press the <RUN/STOP> keyAfter the sampling r un is complete, press the <RUN/STOP> keyAfter the sampling run is complete, pres s the <RUN/STOP> keyAfter the sampling run is complete, press the <RUN/STOP> key After the sampling run is complete, press the <RUN/STOP> key when in the Main screen to enter the Stop Mode. when in the Main screen to enter the Stop Mode.when in the Main screen to enter the Stop Mode.when in the Main screen to enter the Stop Mode.when in the Main sc reen to enter the Stop Mode.when in the Main screen to enter the Stop Mode. 2) 2)2)2)2)2) Remove the filter cassette in the carrier from the sampler by Remove the filter cassette in the carrier from the sampler byRemove the filter c assette in the carrier from the sampler byRemove the filter cassette in the carr ier from the sampler byRemove the filter cassette in the carrier from the sample r byRemove the filter cassette in the carrier from the sampler by pulling on the handle of the filter exchange mechanism. Place the pulling on the handle of the filter exchange mechanism. Place thepulling on the handle of the filter exchange mechanism. Place thepulling on the handle of the f ilter exchange mechanism. Place thepulling on the handle of the filter exchange mechanism. Place thepulling on the handle of the filter exchange mechanism. Plac e the entire assembly in a metal transport container. entire assembly in a metal transport container.entire assembly in a metal transp ort container.entire assembly in a metal transport container.entire assembly in a metal transport container.entire assembly in a metal transport container.

3) 3)3)3)3)3) Check the sampling run status on the Main screen. Note any Check the sampling run status on the Main screen. Note anyCheck the sampling run status on the Main screen. Note anyCheck the sampling run status on the Main sc reen. Note anyCheck the sampling run status on the Main screen. Note anyCheck th e sampling run status on the Main screen. Note any status code other than OK. status code other than OK. status code other than OK. status code other than OK. status c ode other than OK. status code other than OK. 4) 4)4)4)4)4) Press <F3: Data> to view the filter data from the sampling run. Press <F3: Data> to view the filter data from the sampling run.Press <F3: Data> to view the filter data from the sampling run.Press <F3: Data> to view the filte r data from the sampling run.Press <F3: Data> to view the filter data from the s ampling run.Press <F3: Data> to view the filter data from the sampling run. Record data from the Filter Data screen (Figure 6-7) onto a samRecord data from the Filter Data screen (Figure 6-7) onto a sam-Record data from the Filter Data screen (Figure 6-7) onto a sam-Record data from the Filter Data screen (Figure 6-7) onto a sam-Record data from the Filter Data screen (Figure 6-7) onto a sam-Record data from the Filter Data screen (Figure 6-7) onto a samp ling run log sheet, if desired. pling run log sheet, if desired.pling run log sheet, if desired.pling run log sh eet, if desired.pling run log sheet, if desired.pling run log sheet, if desired. Figure 6-7. Filter Data screen. Stat:Ok Filter Data Rec: 937 Set: 0.00 96/11/05 Min Ave Max Strt: 0.00 96/11/05 AmbT: 11.5 16.8 21.9 Stop: 0.00 96/11/06 FltT: 11.6 17.0 22.4 Tot: 24.00 Pres: 759 760 761 TempDiff: 0.8 AveFlow: 16.7 Vol: 24.0 14.07 96/11/05 %CV: 0.1 + PwrDat IntvDat > Function Keys in Browse Mode + PwrDat IntvDat > First Last Output < SECTION 6: SAMPLER OPERATION PAGE 6-7

Revision B.001 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler 5) 5)5)5)5)5) If there were any status codes other than OK, verify the validity If there were any status codes other than OK, verify the validityIf there were any status codes other than OK, verify the validityIf there were any status codes oth er than OK, verify the validityIf there were any status codes other than OK, verify the validityIf there were any status codes other than OK, verify the validity of the sampling run from the output of the Filter Data screen. of the sampling run from the output of the Filter Data screen.of the sampling ru n from the output of the Filter Data screen.of the sampling run from the output of the Filter Data screen.of the sampling run from the output of the Filter Data screen.of the sampling run from the output of the Filter Data screen. Press <F4: PwrDat> to view the Power Outage Data screen. Press Press <F4: PwrDat> to view the Power Outage Data screen. PressPress <F4: PwrDat> to view the Power Outage Data screen. PressPress <F4: PwrDat> to view the Power Outage Data screen. PressPress <F4: PwrDat> to view the Power Outage Data scree n. PressPress <F4: PwrDat> to view the Power Outage Data screen. Press the <ESC> key to return to the Filter Data screen. the <ESC> key to return to the Filter Data screen.the <ESC> key to return to the Filter Data screen.the <ESC> key to return to the Filter Data screen.the <ESC> key to return to the Filter Data screen.the <ESC> key to return to the Filter Da ta screen. 6) 6)6)6)6)6) Download stored data from the sampling run onto a personal Download stored data from the sampling run onto a personalDownload stored data f rom the sampling run onto a personalDownload stored data from the sampling run o nto a personalDownload stored data from the sampling run onto a personalDownload stored data from the sampling run onto a personal computer (PC). Connect the PC to the sampler with the 9 pin-to-9 computer (PC). Connect the PC to the sampler with the 9 pin-to-9computer (PC). C onnect the PC to the sampler with the 9 pin-to-9computer (PC). Connect the PC to the sampler with the 9 pin-to-9computer (PC). Connect the PC to the sampler wit h the 9 pin-to-9computer (PC). Connect the PC to the sampler with the 9 pin-to-9 pin RS232 connector cable. pin RS232 connector cable.pin RS232 connector cable.pin RS232 connector cable.pi n RS232 connector cable.pin RS232 connector cable. 7) 7)7)7)7)7) Use AKCOMM or any other data transfer program to transfer data Use AKCOMM or any other data transfer program to transfer dataUse AKCOMM or any other data transfer program to transfer dataUse AKCOMM or any other data transfe r program to transfer dataUse AKCOMM or any other data transfer program to trans fer dataUse AKCOMM or any other data transfer program to transfer data from the sampler to the PC. from the sampler to the PC.from the sampler to the PC.from the sampler to the PC .from the sampler to the PC.from the sampler to the PC. 8) 8)8)8)8)8) Ensure that the sampler is in the Browse Mode. Ensure that the sampler is in the Browse Mode.Ensure that the sampler is in the Browse Mode.Ensure that the sampler is in the Browse Mode.Ensure that the sample r is in the Browse Mode.Ensure that the sampler is in the Browse Mode. 9)

9)9)9)9)9) When in the Filter Data screen, use the function keys <F1> to <F8> When in the Filter Data screen, use the function keys <F1> to <F8>When in the Fi lter Data screen, use the function keys <F1> to <F8>When in the Filter Data scre en, use the function keys <F1> to <F8>When in the Filter Data screen, use the fu nction keys <F1> to <F8>When in the Filter Data screen, use the function keys <F 1> to <F8> to move to the first record of the sampling run. Press the <F5> to move to the first record of the sampling run. Press the <F5>to move to the fi rst record of the sampling run. Press the <F5>to move to the first record of the sampling run. Press the <F5>to move to the first record of the sampling run. Pr ess the <F5>to move to the first record of the sampling run. Press the <F5> function key to access the <F10: Output> function key. All data function key to access the <F10: Output> function key. All datafunction key to a ccess the <F10: Output> function key. All datafunction key to access the <F10: O utput> function key. All datafunction key to access the <F10: Output> function k ey. All datafunction key to access the <F10: Output> function key. All data from the current record displayed in the screen to the last record from the current record displayed in the screen to the last recordfrom the curre nt record displayed in the screen to the last recordfrom the current record disp layed in the screen to the last recordfrom the current record displayed in the s creen to the last recordfrom the current record displayed in the screen to the l ast record will automatically download from the sampler to the PC. will automatically download from the sampler to the PC.will automatically downlo ad from the sampler to the PC.will automatically download from the sampler to th e PC.will automatically download from the sampler to the PC.will automatically d ownload from the sampler to the PC. 10) 10)10)10)10)10) Press <F5:IntvDat> to access the Interval Data screen (Figure 68). Press <F5:IntvDat> to access the Interval Data screen (Figure 6-8).Press <F5:Int vDat> to access the Interval Data screen (Figure 6-8).Press <F5:IntvDat> to acce ss the Interval Data screen (Figure 6-8).Press <F5:IntvDat> to access the Interv al Data screen (Figure 6-8).Press <F5:IntvDat> to access the Interval Data scree n (Figure 6-8). Use the function keys to move to the first record that you wish to Use the function keys to move to the first record that you wish toUse the functi on keys to move to the first record that you wish toUse the function keys to mov e to the first record that you wish toUse the function keys to move to the first record that you wish toUse the function keys to move to the first record that y ou wish to download. Press the <F5> function key to access the <F10: download. Press the <F5> function key to access the <F10:download. Press the <F5 > function key to access the <F10:download. Press the <F5> function key to acces s the <F10:download. Press the <F5> function key to access the <F10:download. Pr ess the <F5> function key to access the <F10: Output> function key. All interval data from the current record Output> function key. All interval data from the current recordOutput> function key. All interval data from the current recordOutput> function key. All interval data from the current recordOutput> function key. All interval data from the cu rrent recordOutput> function key. All interval data from the current record displayed in the screen to the last record will automatically displayed in the screen to the last record will automaticallydisplayed in the sc reen to the last record will automaticallydisplayed in the screen to the last re cord will automaticallydisplayed in the screen to the last record will automatic allydisplayed in the screen to the last record will automatically download from the sampler to the PC. download from the sampler to the PC.download from the sampler to the PC.download from the sampler to the PC.download from the sampler to the PC.download from th

e sampler to the PC. Figure 6-8. Interval Data Screen. Interval Data Rec: 5674 Time: 10.35 96/11/07 Average Amb Temp: 17.2 C Average Filt Temp: 17.4 C Average Amb Pres: 760 mmHg Average Flow: 16.7 l/min -+ ++ FiltDat > Function Keys in Browse Mode -+ ++ FiltDat > First --+++ Last Output < SECTION 6: SAMPLER OPERATION PAGE 6-8

Revision B.001 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler 11) 11)11)11)11)11) Save the transferred data to the PC. Save the transferred data to the PC.Save the transferred data to the PC.Save the transferred data to the PC.Save the transferred data to the PC.Save the transfe rred data to the PC. 12) 12)12)12)12)12) Disconnect the RS232 cable. Disconnect the RS232 cable.Disconnect the RS232 cable.Disconnect the RS232 cable .Disconnect the RS232 cable.Disconnect the RS232 cable. 13) 13)13)13)13)13) Press the <ESC> key twice to return to the Main screen. Press the <ESC> key twice to return to the Main screen.Press the <ESC> key twice to return to the Main screen.Press the <ESC> key twice to return to the Main sc reen.Press the <ESC> key twice to return to the Main screen.Press the <ESC> key twice to return to the Main screen. 14) 14)14)14)14)14) Perform any necessary scheduled maintenance. Perform any necessary scheduled maintenance.Perform any necessary scheduled main tenance.Perform any necessary scheduled maintenance.Perform any necessary schedu led maintenance.Perform any necessary scheduled maintenance. 15) 15)15)15)15)15) Insert a new filter cassette assembly with a 47 mm filter into t he Insert a new filter cassette assembly with a 47 mm filter into theInsert a new f ilter cassette assembly with a 47 mm filter into theInsert a new filter cassette assembly with a 47 mm filter into theInsert a new filter cassette assembly with a 47 mm filter into theInsert a new filter cassette assembly with a 47 mm filte r into the filter exchange mechanism. Push the handle to raise the platfilter exchange mechanism. Push the handle to raise the plat-filter exchange mec hanism. Push the handle to raise the plat-filter exchange mechanism. Push the ha ndle to raise the plat-filter exchange mechanism. Push the handle to raise the p lat-filter exchange mechanism. Push the handle to raise the plat form, and enclose the filter cassette in the sampling position. form, and enclose the filter cassette in the sampling position.form, and enclose the filter cassette in the sampling position.form, and enclose the filter casse tte in the sampling position.form, and enclose the filter cassette in the sampli ng position.form, and enclose the filter cassette in the sampling position. SECTION 6: SAMPLER OPERATION PAGE 6-9

Revision B.001 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler This page left intentionally blank. SECTION 6: SAMPLER OPERATION PAGE 6-10

Revision B.001 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler Section 7: Section 7:Section 7:Section 7:Section 7:Section 7: On-Screen Operating Informati on On-Screen Operating InformationOn-Screen Operating InformationOn-Screen Operatin g InformationOn-Screen Operating InformationOn-Screen Operating Information . The sampler displays the current status code in the upper left-hand corner of the Main Screen and several other screens. . A heater in the instrument electronics compartment ensures that the control zone stays within limits under cold temperature conditions. This section describes the status codes generated by the Partisol-FRM Sampler, a s well as the operating information contained in the Statistics and Diagnostics sc reens. 7.1. 7.1.7.1.7.1.7.1.7.1. S SSSSSTATUS TATUSTATUSTATUSTATUSTATUS C CCCCCODES ODESODESODESODESODES The sampler displays operational status codes in the upper left-hand corner of t he Main screen (Figure 4-3) next to Stat, as well as on several other screens. The hardware resets the status to Ok (no current conditions) after the user presses <F 4: Run/Stp> from the Main screen to return the unit to the Stop Operating Mode. With the occurrence of any status conditions, the sampler displays the single-le tter abbreviation for each flag that applies. The following list details the system s s tatus codes and definitions: Ok No current status conditions. F Flow Rate. The measured sample flow rate deviates by more than 5% from its set point for more than 30 seconds. X Flow Cutoff. The measured sample flow rate deviates by more than 10% from its set point for more than 60 sec. S Ambient Temperature Sensor. The ambient temperature sensor is not plugged in or is indicating an invalid value (less than -150 C or greater than 60 C). P Ambient Pressure Sensor. The ambient pressure sensor is not installed correctly or is indicating an invalid value (less than 300 mm Hg or greater than 900 mm Hg). T Filter Temperature. The measured filter temperature exceeds the

measured ambient temperature by more than 5 C for more than ten consecutive minutes during sampling or post-sampling periods of operation. I Instrument Electronics Temperature. The temperature of the instrument electronics is outside of its usual operating range (less than -5 C or greater than 60 C). V Power Outage (Voltage). A power outage of greater than 60 seconds occurred during sample collection. SECTION 7: ON-SCREEN OPERATING INFORMATION PAGE 7-1

Revision B.001 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler . The current status code is made up of one or more single-letter abbreviations or Ok. E Elapsed Sample Time. The elapsed time of the sample was less than 23 hours or greater than 25 hours. C Coefficient of Variation. The coefficient of variation of the sample flow rate, expressed as a percentage, was greater than 4 (4%) during the sampling interval. In the case of multiple status conditions, the sampler displays the single-lette r abbreviation of all applicable flags in the status field of the Main screen and other screens with a status condition field. For example, the sampler would display FV in the case of simultaneous flow rate and power outage conditions. The hardware stores all status conditions that apply to each exposed filter in t he filter data storage buffer (Section 8.1). SECTION 7: ON-SCREEN OPERATING INFORMATION PAGE 7-2

Revision B.001 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler 7.2. 7.2.7.2.7.2.7.2.7.2. S SSSSSTATISTICS TATISTICSTATISTICSTATISTICSTATISTICSTATISTICS S SSSSSCREEN CREENCREENCREENCREENCREEN The Statistics screen (Figure 7-1) displays more detailed operational informatio n than is shown on the sampler s Main screen. Press <F2: Stats> when in the Main screen t o display the Statistics screen. This screen does not contain any editable fields. Figure 7-1. Statistics Screen. Stat:Ok Statistics Mode:SAMP Current Time: 19.36 96/11/07 Inst Temp: 27.3 Filt Fan: ON Amb Temp: 23.2 Encl Fan: ON Filt Temp: 23.6 Heater: OFF Amb Pres: 760 Cur Flow: 16.7 Version: 1.202 The Statistics screen contains the following fields: Stat The current status code (Section 7.1). Mode The current operating mode (Section 5.3). Current Time The current time and date, as determined by the system s battery-backed clock. The user may reset the time/date in the Setup Screen (Section 5.1) in the Stop Operating Mode. Inst Temp The current temperature (C) of the instrument electronics. Amb Temp The current ambient air temperature (C). Filt Temp The current filter temperature (C), as measured within 1 cm of the center of the sample filter. Amb Pres The current ambient pressure (absolute mm Hg). Cur Flow The current sample flow rate (volumetric l/min). SECTION 7: ON-SCREEN OPERATING INFORMATION PAGE 7-3

Revision B.001 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler Filt Fan The current operating status of the fan in the filter compartment (ON or OFF). Encl Fan The current operating status of the fan in the pump compartment (ON or OFF). Heater The current operating status of the heater in the electronics compartment (ON or OFF). Version The revision number of the system s operating software. Press the <ESC> key to return to the Main screen from the Statistics screen. SECTION 7: ON-SCREEN OPERATING INFORMATION PAGE 7-4

Revision B.001 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler 7.3. 7.3.7.3.7.3.7.3.7.3. D DDDDDIAGNOSTICS IAGNOSTICSIAGNOSTICSIAGNOSTICSIAGNOSTICSIAGNOSTICS S SSSSSCREEN CREENCREENCREENCREENCREEN The Diagnostics screen (Figure 7-2) displays more low-level operational informat ion about the Partisol-FRM Sampler. When in the Main screen, press <F5: Setup> and then <F3: Diag> to display the Diagnostics screen. The Service Manual (42-004278 ) of the Partisol-FRM Sampler contains routines that make use of the Browse and Ed it Mode function keys of the Diagnostics screen. Figure 6-2. Diagnostics Screen. Diagnostics Analog I/O Digital I/O Pres: 4.062 FltT: 3.019 Val:ON FnP:OFF InsT: 3.128 Aux1: 0.000 Aux:OFF Pmp:ON AmbT: 3.016 Aux2: 0.000 Aux:OFF Lcd:ON 3: 2.644 Flow: 3.991 FnF:ON Htr:OFF A/O1: 2.50 A/O2: 1.66 Rev: 1 Edit Off On Function Keys in Browse Mode Edit Off On Function Keys in Edit Mode --+ ++ Bksp The Diagnostics screen contains the Pres The current analog input level pressure sensor. InsT The current analog input level electronics temperature sensor. AmbT The current analog input level temperature sensor. 3 Not used. following fields: (VDC) from the ambient (VDC) from the instrument (VDC) from the ambient

SECTION 7: ON-SCREEN OPERATING INFORMATION PAGE 7-5

Revision B.001 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler FltT The current analog input level (VDC) from the filter temperature sensor. Aux1, Aux2 Not used. Flow The current analog input level (VDC) from the mass flow sensor. A/O1 The current analog output level (VDC) to the valve in the mass flow controller. A/O2 The current analog output level (VDC) to the user analog output port on the back of the sampler (Section 8). Val The current position of the flow cutoff valve (ON or OFF). Aux, Aux Not used. FnF The current operating status of the fan in the filter compartment (ON or OFF). FnP The current operating status of the fan in the pump compartment (ON or OFF). Pmp The current operating status of the sample pump (ON or OFF). Lcd The current operating status of the LCD (liquid crystal display) backlighting (ON or OFF). Htr The current operating status of the heater in the instrument electronics compartment (ON or OFF). When in the Diagnostics screen, press the <ESC> key twice to return to the Main screen. SECTION 7: ON-SCREEN OPERATING INFORMATION PAGE 7-6

Revision B.001 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler Section 8: Section 8:Section 8:Section 8:Section 8:Section 8: V VVVVViewing and T iewing and Tiewing and Tiewing and Tiewing and Tiewing and Transmitting Stored D ata ransmitting Stored Dataransmitting Stored Dataransmitting Stored Dataransmitting Stored Dataransmitting Stored Data . The Partisol-FRM Sampler has a capacity of 25 filter data records and two weeks of interval data records. Data are stored in a circular buffer on a first in, first out basis. The Partisol-FRM Sampler stores two types of data in its internal data logger: f ilter data and interval data. This information is stored in two separate circular buff ers whose contents can be viewed on the screen of the sampler and/or downloaded through the RS232 port. Once these buffers are filled, the oldest data points ar e replaced with the most recent information ( first in, first out ). The following describes the two types of data stored internally in the hardware: Filter Data Each record in this buffer contains information for a different collection filter exposed to the sample stream. The sampler displays records from this buffer in the Filter Data screen (Figure 8-1) and Power Outages screen (Figure 8-2). The Power Outages screen shows detailed information for the current record of filter data that is not included in the Filter Data screen. The Partisol-FRM Sampler has a capacity of 25 records of filter data. Interval Data The sampler writes a new record of interval data every five minutes. Each record contains the latest five-minute average of the ambient temperature, filter temperature, and ambient pressure. The hardware displays records from this buffer in the Interval Data screen (Figure 8-3). The Partisol-FRM Sampler has a capacity of two weeks of interval data. Press <F3: Data> when in the Main screen (Figure 4-3) to access the Filter Data screen (Figure 8-1). From this screen, enter <F4: PwrDat> to view additional data for t he current record of interval data in the Power Outages screen (Figure 8-2). Press <F4: FiltDat> when in the Power Outages screen to return to the Filter Data screen. Press <F5: IntvDat> when in the Filter Data screen to view the Interval Data scr

een (Figure 8-3), or press <F5: FiltDat> when in the Interval Data screen to return to the Filter Data screen. With the exception of the Power Outages screen, the sampler displays the last record of the respective database when the user enters the scr eens. There are no editable fields in any of these displays. SECTION 8: VIEWING AND TRANSMITTING STORED DATA PAGE 8-1

Revision B.001 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler 8.1. 8.1.8.1.8.1.8.1.8.1. F FFFFFILTER ILTERILTERILTERILTERILTER D DDDDDATA ATAATAATAATAATA Data for each filter used in the Partisol-FRM Sampler are stored as a separate r ecord of filter data. For readability, the sampler splits the display of filter data r ecords between two screens: the Filter Data screen (Figure 8-1) and the Power Outages s creen (Figure 8-2). Press <F4> to toggle between these two screens while remaining in the same filter data record. Figure 8-1. Filter Data screen. Stat:Ok Filter Data Rec: 937 Set: 0.00 96/11/05 Min Ave Max Strt: 0.00 96/11/05 AmbT: 11.5 16.8 21.9 Stop: 0.00 96/11/06 FltT: 11.6 17.0 22.4 Tot: 24.00 Pres: 759 760 761 TempDiff: 0.8 AveFlow: 16.7 Vol: 24.0 14.07 96/11/05 %CV: 0.1 + PwrDat IntvDat > Function Keys in Browse Mode + PwrDat IntvDat > First Last Output < The sampler displays the following filter data fields in the Filter Data screen: Stat The Stat field in the upper left-hand corner of the screen shows the status conditions encountered during and after the exposure of the sample filter. A value of Ok indicates that the sampler did not . The hardware stores one encounter any status conditions, and Section 7.1 record of filter data for each collection filter exposed. contains a listing of the single-letter status codes that may be displayed in this field. Rec The number of the current record is displayed in the upper right-hand corner of the screen.

Set The Set field displays the starting time/date (hh.mm yy/mm/dd) entered by the user. SECTION 8: VIEWING AND TRANSMITTING STORED DATA PAGE 8-2

Revision B.001 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler Strt The Strt field shows the actual starting time/date (hh.mm yy/mm/dd) at which the unit began sampling. Stop The Stop field indicates the actual ending time/date ((hh.mm yy/mm/dd) at which the system stopped sampling. Tot The sampler displays the elapsed sampling time (hh.mm) in the Tot field. TempDiff The fields to the right and below the TempDiff title show the maximum difference (C) between the filter and ambient temperatures during and after sample collection, as well as time/date (hh.mm yy/ mm/dd) at which the sampler recorded the deviation. The sampler writes the final information to these fields when the user presses <F4: Run/Stp> in the Main screen to return to the Stop Operating Mode. AmbT The sampler displays the minimum, average and maximum ambient temperatures (C) encountered during sampling in the line labeled AmbT. FltT The sampler shows the minimum, average and maximum filter temperatures (C) encountered during sampling in the line labeled FltT. Pres The sampler indicates the minimum, average and maximum ambient pressures (mm Hg) encountered during sampling in the line labeled Pres. AveFlow The unit shows the average volumetric flow rate (l/ min) during the sampling period in the AveFlow field. Vol The Vol field displays the total volume (m at ambient conditions) sampled through the collection filter. %CV The coefficient of variation is equal to the standard deviation of the five-minute flow rate averages divided by the average flow rate (16.7 l/min by

SECTION 8: VIEWING AND TRANSMITTING STORED DATA PAGE 8-3

Revision B.001 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler default). This value is then divided by 100 to yield the %CV value shown in the Filter Data screen. If this value is greater than 4 (4%), the sampler displays the C status code (Section 6.1). The Power Outages screen (Figure 8-2) contains the following additional informat ion for each record of filter data: Rec The number of the current record is displayed in the upper right-hand corner of the screen. Times The screen contains up to ten time fields (hh.mm) that indicate the starting time of all power outages longer than 60 sec that occur during sampling. ID1, ID2 The ID1 and ID2 fields display the user-defined information entered prior to sampling in the Filter Setup Screen (Section 5.2). Figure 8-2. Power Outages screen. Power Outages/Misc Rec: 937 9.53 xx.xx xx.xx xx.xx xx.xx xx.xx xx.xx xx.xx xx.xx xx.xx ID1: "96 " ID2: "00154 " + FiltDat IntvDat > Function Keys in Browse Mode + FiltDat IntvDat > First Last < The soft keys of the Filter Data screen and Power Outages screen have the follow ing effects upon the location of the viewing pointer: <F6: <F2: <F3: <F9: First> First record. -> One record to the left. +> One record to the right. Last> Last record.

SECTION 8: VIEWING AND TRANSMITTING STORED DATA PAGE 8-4

Revision B.001 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler Pressing <F10: Output> when in the Filter Data screen allows the user to downloa d records from the current position of the viewing pointer to the last record of t he database through the RS232 port of the Partisol-FRM Sampler. Press <F10: Output> again to interrupt the downloading of information before reaching the last recor d. Refer to Section 8.3 for a detailed discussion of this downloading feature. SECTION 8: VIEWING AND TRANSMITTING STORED DATA PAGE 8-5

Revision B.001 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler . The Partisol-FRM Sampler stores one record of interval data every five minutes whenever the unit is turned on. Figure 8-3. Interval Data screen. 8.2. 8.2.8.2.8.2.8.2.8.2. I IIIIINTERVAL NTERVALNTERVALNTERVALNTERVALNTERVAL D DDDDDATA ATAATAATAATAATA The sampler stores five-minute averaged ambient temperature, filter temperature and ambient pressure as interval data. It writes a new record of interval data every five minutes on a continuous basis, and has a capacity of two weeks before it overwri tes the oldest records. The sampler displays interval data records in the Interval D ata screen (Figure 8-3). Interval Data Rec: 5674 Time: 10.35 96/11/07 Average Amb Temp: 17.2 C Average Filt Temp: 17.4 C Average Amb Pres: 760 mmHg Average Flow: 16.7 l/min -+ ++ FiltDat > Function Keys in Browse Mode -+ ++ FiltDat > First --+++ Last Output < The sampler displays the following information in the Interval Data screen: Rec The number of the current record is displayed in the upper right-hand corner of the screen. Time The ending time/date (hh.mm yy/mm/dd) of the five minute interval whose information is being displayed. Amb Temp The Amb Temp field displays the five-minute average of the ambient temperature (C). Filt Temp

The Filt Temp field displays the five-minute average of the filter temperature (C). Amb Pres The Amb Pres field displays the five-minute average of the ambient pressure (mm Hg). SECTION 8: VIEWING AND TRANSMITTING STORED DATA PAGE 8-6

Revision B.001 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler Ave Flow The Flow field displays the five-minute average of the sample flow rate (volumetric l/min). The soft keys of the Interval Data screen have the following effects upon the lo cation of the viewing pointer (remember to use the shift key to access F6-F10): <F6: <F7: <F1: <F2: <F3: <F4: <F8: <F9: First> First record. ---> One hundred records to the --> Ten records to the left. -> One record to the left. +> One record to the right. ++> Ten records to the right. +++> One hundred records to the Last> Last record. left.

right.

Pressing (Shift ,F:5>) <F10: Output> when in the Interval Data screen allows the user to download records from the current position of the viewing pointer to the last record of the database through the RS232 port of the Partisol-FRM Sampler. Press <F10: Output> again to interrupt the downloading of information before reaching the la st record. Refer to Section 8.3 for a detailed discussion of this downloading featu re. SECTION 8: VIEWING AND TRANSMITTING STORED DATA PAGE 8-7

Revision B.001 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler . Pressing <F10: Output> while in the Filter Data or Interval Data Screen is a convenient way to download stored information. 8.3. 8.3.8.3.8.3.8.3.8.3. D DDDDDOWNLOADING OWNLOADINGOWNLOADINGOWNLOADINGOWNLOADINGOWNLOADING S SSSSSTORED TOREDTOREDTOREDTOREDTORED D DDDDDATA ATAATAATAATAATA The Filter Data screen (Figure 8-1) and Interval Data screen (Figure 8-3) contai n the <F10: Output> key to download stored data through the sampler s RS232 port to another serial device. R&P supplies the Partisol-FRM Sampler with AKCOMM software (41-004001) and a 9-to-9 pin computer cable (07-000587) to enable the creation of data files con taining stored information on a personal computer. The AKCOMM software diskette contains an instructional data file describing the program s use. Alternately, oth er commercially-available software may be used to receive and store transferred information on a personal computer (PC). Attach the ends of the 9-to-9 pin computer cable to the RS232 port of the Partis ol-FRM Sampler and the RS232 connector of a PC to link the two devices. Then ensure tha t the Baud Rate, Config and XON/XOff Cont RS232 parameters displayed in the RS232 Setup screen (Section 9.2) are appropriately defined for the software bein g employed. The <F10: Output> keystroke allows the user to download records from the current position of the viewing pointer to the last record when in the Filter Data scree n (Figure 8-1) or Interval Data screen (Figure 8-3). Pressing <F10: Output> again prior to completing the download cancels the data transfer. The following text describes the format of the fields contained in each record o f filter and interval data downloaded by the sampler. SECTION 8: VIEWING AND TRANSMITTING STORED DATA PAGE 8-8

Revision B.001 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler . The sampler includes the status codes field and/or power interruption fields only for the number of events that occurred. 8.3.1. 8.3.1.8.3.1.8.3.1.8.3.1.8.3.1. F FFFFFORMAT ORMATORMATORMATORMATORMAT OF OFOFOFOFOF F FFFFFILTER ILTERILTERILTERILTERILTER D DDDDDATA ATAATAATAATAATA R RRRRRECORDS ECORDSECORDSECORDSECORDSECORDS Each record of filter data contains the comma-delimited data fields shown below. Records are separated from each other by the feed (ASCII 010) characters. carriage return (ASCII 013) and line

ID1 ( or xx ) ID2 ( or xx ) Set Start Date ("yy/mm/dd") Set Start Time (hh.mm) Actual Start Date ("yy/mm/dd") Actual Start Time (hh.mm) Set Stop Date ("yy/mm/dd") Set Stop Time (hh.mm) Total Sample Time (hh.mm) Average Flow Rate (l/min) Flow Coefficient of Variation (%) Sampled Volume (m) Minimum Ambient Temperature (C) Average Ambient Temperature (C) Maximum Ambient Temperature (C) Minimum Filter Temperature (C) Average Filter Temperature (C) Maximum Filter Temperature (C) Minimum Ambient Pressure (mm Hg) Average Ambient Pressure (mm Hg) Maximum Ambient Pressure (mm Hg) Maximum Temperature Differential (C) Date of Maximum Temp Differential ("yy/mm/dd") Time of Maximum Temp Differential (hh.mm) Status Codes ( xxx ) Beginning Time of Power Interruption 1 (hh.mm), Beginning Time of Power Interruption 2 (hh.mm), Beginning Time of Power Interruption 3 (hh.mm), Beginning Time of Power Interruption 4 (hh.mm), Beginning Time of Power Interruption 5 (hh.mm), Beginning Time of Power Interruption 6 (hh.mm), Beginning Time of Power Interruption 7 (hh.mm), Beginning Time of Power Interruption 8 (hh.mm),

see see see see see see see see

below below below below below below below below

Beginning Time of Power Interruption 9 (hh.mm), see below Beginning Time of Power Interruption 10 (hh.mm), see below SECTION 8: VIEWING AND TRANSMITTING STORED DATA PAGE 8-9

Revision B.001 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler The number of fields in each record of filter data varies, depending upon the nu mber of status codes and/or power interruptions recorded. If the sampler did not expe rience any status codes or power interruptions during sampling, the sampler omits all o f the status codes and power interruption fields. Otherwise, filter data records conta in fields for only the number of status codes and/or power interruptions encountered. 8.3.2. 8.3.2.8.3.2.8.3.2.8.3.2.8.3.2. F FFFFFORMAT ORMATORMATORMATORMATORMAT OF OFOFOFOFOF I IIIIINTERVAL NTERVALNTERVALNTERVALNTERVALNTERVAL D DDDDDATA ATAATAATAATAATA R RRRRRECORDS ECORDSECORDSECORDSECORDSECORDS Each record of interval data contains the comma-delimited data fields shown belo w. Records are separated from each other by the carriage return (ASCII 013) and line feed (ASCII 010) characters. Date at End of 5-Minute Period ("yy/mm/dd") Time at End of 5-Minute Period (hh.mm) 5-Minute Average Ambient Temperature (C) 5-Minute Average Filter Temperature (C) 5-Minute Average Ambient Pressure (mm Hg) 5-Minute Average Sample Flow Rate (volumetric l/min) SECTION 8: VIEWING AND TRANSMITTING STORED DATA PAGE 8-10

Revision B.000 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler Section 9: Section 9:Section 9:Section 9:Section 9:Section 9: Data Output Data OutputData OutputData OutputData OutputData Output . The sampler s analog voltage output provides a continuous feedback of the unit's current sample flow rate and status condition. This section describes the continuous analog voltage signal generated by the Par tisolFRM Sampler to indicate flow rate and the existence of any status conditions, as well as the setup of the hardware s RS232 interface. The bidirectional AK communication protocol (Appendix D) implemented in the sampler s RS232 port allows users to retrieve the current values of system variables, set new values for operating pa rameters, as well as retrieve stored filter and interval data (Section 8). 9.1. 9.1.9.1.9.1.9.1.9.1. U UUUUUSER SERSERSERSERSER A AAAAANALOG NALOGNALOGNALOGNALOGNALOG O OOOOOUTPUT UTPUTUTPUTUTPUTUTPUTUTPUT The four-pin connector on the back panel of the Partisol-FRM Sampler labeled User Output transmits a continuous 0-5 VDC analog voltage signal whose level reflects the current sample flow rate and the existence of any status conditions. The vol tage output is determined in the following manner: 0-2.0 VDC No status conditions. If there are no current status conditions, the voltage output equals the current sample flow rate divided by 10. Therefore, if the current flow rate is 0 l/min, the output is 0 VDC. At the default sampling flow rate of 16.7 l/min, the analog output is 1.67 VDC. 2.5-4.5 VDC Existence of one or more status conditions. If there is a current status condition, the voltage output equals 2.5 VDC plus the current sample flow rate divided by 10. Therefore, if the current flow rate is 0 l/min, the output is 2.5 VDC. At the default sampling flow rate of 16.7 l/min, the analog output is 4.17 VDC. Appendix C details the pin assignments of the four-pin User Output connector, as well

as the assembly diagram for the mating connector (06-002453) supplied with each sampler. 9.2. 9.2.9.2.9.2.9.2.9.2. C CCCCCONFIGURING ONFIGURINGONFIGURINGONFIGURINGONFIGURINGONFIGURING THE THETHETHETHETHE RS232 P RS232 PRS232 PRS232 PRS232 PRS232 PORT ORTORTORTORTORT The settings in the RS232 Setup screen (Figure 9-1) define the hardware and soft ware configuration of the system s RS232 port. When in the Main screen, press <F5: Setup> and then <F4: RS232> to display the RS232 Setup screen. The fields of thi s screen are editable in any of the unit s operating modes. Appendix C contains a listing of the pin assignments of the sampler s 9-pin RS232 port. SECTION 9: DATA OUTPUT PAGE 9-1

Revision B.000 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler Figure 9-1. RS232 Setup screen. RS232 Setup Baud Rate: 9600 Config: 8-N-1 XOn/XOff Cont: OFF AK Station: 52 "4" AK Channel: 75048 "K0" AK Append: 13010 Edit Function Keys in Browse Mode Edit Function Keys in Edit Mode -+ ++ Bksp The RS232 Setup screen (Figure 9-1) contains the following user-definable fields . Baud Rate This is the data transmission rate (baud, bits per second). Use the <F2: -> and <F3: +> keys to select the appropriate . The Baud Rate, Config baud rate when in the Edit Mode. The default setting of this and XOn/XOff Cont param parameter is 9600. eters must match the settings of the personal computer or other serial Config This parameter represents the data transfer form at (data device connected to the bits-parity-stop bits). Use the <F2: -> and <F3: +> keys tosampler. select between 8-N-1 and 7-E-1 when in the Edit Mode. The default setting of this parameter is 8-N-1 stop bits, no parity, 1 stop bit). (8

XOn/XOff Cont The user may turn software data flow control on or off by pressing the <F2: -> and <F3: +> keys when in the Edit Mode. The default setting of this parameter is OFF. AK Station This is the ASCII code for the one-digit Station Number . The sampler only uses used by the AK Protocol (Appendix D). The default valuet he AK Station, AK Channel of this parameter in the sampler and AKCOMM software and AK Append parameters

is 52, which is the ASCII representation for when using the AK Protocol

4.

This

parameter is not used when performing the data down described in Appendix D. loading described in Section 7.3. SECTION 9: DATA OUTPUT PAGE 9-2

Revision B.000 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler AK Channel This is the ASCII code representation of the two-digit Channel number used by the AK Protocol (Appendix D). The default value of this parameter in the sampler and AKCOMM software is 75048, which is the ASCII representation for K0 (the capital letter K and the number 0 ). This parameter is not used when performing the data downloading described in Section 8.3. AK Append This is the ASCII code representation of characters added between response lines from the sampler when using the AK Protocol (Appendix D). This parameter is optional, and should have a value of 0 if nothing is to be appended. The default value of this parameter is 13010, which represents CR (carriage return) and LF (line feed). This parameter is not used when performing the data downloading described in Section 8.3. The Baud Rate, Config, and XOn/XOff Cont parameters above not only define data transmission when using the AK Protocol, but are also used by the Partisol-FRM Sampler when downloading data directly from the Filter Data screen and Interval Data screen (Section 8.3). The AK Protocol described in Appendix D provides a means of communicating with the hardware from a connected personal computer (PC) or by modem from a remote location. When using the AK Protocol to download stored filter or interval data from the sampler, set the value of program register code (PRC) 38 to either 1 or 2 using the EREG command to point to the filter data buffer and interval data buffer, respectively. The fields that are contained in the filter and interval data reco rds downloaded using the AK Protocol s ASTO command are listed in Section 8.3, and are the same as when the user downloads data records directly. SECTION 9: DATA OUTPUT PAGE 9-3

Revision B.000 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler This page left intentionally blank SECTION 9: DATA OUTPUT PAGE 9-4

Revision B.002 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler Section 10: Section 10:Section 10:Section 10:Section 10:Section 10: Routine Maintenance and V Routine Maintenance and VRoutine Maintenance and VRoutine Maintenance and VRouti ne Maintenance and VRoutine Maintenance and Verification erificationerificationerificationerificationerification Procedures ProceduresProceduresProceduresProceduresProcedures This section describes the routine maintenance and performance verification proc edures required to maintain the consistent operation of the Partisol-FRM Sampler. 10.1. 10.1.10.1.10.1.10.1.10.1. R RRRRROUTINE OUTINEOUTINEOUTINEOUTINEOUTINE M MMMMMAINTENANCE AINTENANCEAINTENANCEAINTENANCEAINTENANCEAINTENANCE P PPPPPROCEDURES ROCEDURESROCEDURESROCEDURESROCEDURESROCEDURES The routine maintenance of the Partisol-FRM Sampler consists of the following procedures performed at the indicated intervals (U.S. EPA 2.12 Quality Handbook, Section 9): Filter cassettes Inspect filter cassettes for contamination after every use. Wipe with a clean dry cloth as required. Additional filter cassettes can be ordered from R&P (59-004648-0001). Upper and lower cassette Inspect the seals that rest against the filter cassette seals every time a filter is exchanged. Wipe the seals with a clean dry cloth as required. Inspect the seals once a year for drying and cracking, and replace them if necessary (22-002182). External leak check Perform an external leak check after every 5 days of inlet usage (Section 10.2.4). Internal leak check Perform an internal leak check after every 4 weeks or every month of inlet usage (Section 10.2.6). WINS PM-2.5 impactor Clean the greased impactor section of the WINS PM-2.5 impactor after every 5 days of inlet usage (Appendix H.2). The impactor must be cleaned when the unit is not sampling. PM-10 inlet Clean the PM-10 inlet after every 14 days of inlet usage (Appendix H.1). The inlet must be cleaned when the unit is not sampling. Large in-line filter Exchange the large in-line filter in the sampler every six months of operation (32-002643). Turn off the sampler (Section 5.4) to replace the large in-line filter. Air screens Clean the air screens located under the sampler s rain hoods every 6 months of operation. SECTION 10: ROUTINE MAINTENANCE AND VERIFICATION PROCEDURES PAGE 10-1

Revision B.002 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler Battery voltage Check the voltage level of the batteries on the main computer board in the electronics compartment every six months (Appendix F.1). The pump in the Partisol-FRM Sampler has a limited lifetime of approximately 2 years. If the pump s performance deteriorates, it should be rebuilt using the Part isol Pump Rebuild Kit (32-W8419) or replaced with a new pump (Appendix F). SECTION 10: ROUTINE MAINTENANCE AND VERIFICATION PROCEDURES PAGE 10-2

Revision B.002 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler 10.2. 10.2.10.2.10.2.10.2.10.2. P PPPPPERFORMANCE ERFORMANCEERFORMANCEERFORMANCEERFORMANCEERFORMANCE V VVVVVERIFICATION ERIFICATIONERIFICATIONERIFICATIONERIFICATIONERIFICATION P PPPPPROCEDURES ROCEDURESROCEDURESROCEDURESROCEDURESROCEDURES R&P recommends that the user perform the routine maintenance procedures de scribed in Section 10.1 at the same time as the audits explained below. NOTE: The user can access the Audit screen (Figure 10-1) only when the sampler is in the Stop Operating Mode. Refer to Section 5.3 for an explanation of the sampler s operating modes. 10.2.1. 10.2.1.10.2.1.10.2.1.10.2.1.10.2.1. A AAAAAMBIENT MBIENTMBIENTMBIENTMBIENTMBIENT T TTTTTEMPERATURE EMPERATUREEMPERATUREEMPERATUREEMPERATUREEMPERATURE A AAAAAUDIT UDITUDITUDITUDITUDIT Follow these steps to perform an ambient temperature audit: Follow these steps to perform an ambient temperature audit:Follow these steps to perform an ambient temperature audit:Follow these steps to perform an ambient t emperature audit:Follow these steps to perform an ambient temperature audit:Foll ow these steps to perform an ambient temperature audit: NOTE: Refer to Section 6 of the U.S. EPA 2.12 Quality Assurance Handbook for further information on the ambient temperature sensor audit. 1) 1)1)1)1)1)When in the Setup screen, press <F5: Audit> to display the Audit When in the Setup screen, press <F5: Audit> to display the AuditWhen in the Setu p screen, press <F5: Audit> to display the AuditWhen in the Setup screen, press <F5: Audit> to display the AuditWhen in the Setup screen, press <F5: Audit> to d isplay the AuditWhen in the Setup screen, press <F5: Audit> to display the Audit screen (Figure 10-1). screen (Figure 10-1).screen (Figure 10-1).screen (Figure 10-1).screen (Figure 10 -1).screen (Figure 10-1). Figure 10-1. Audit screen. Audit Amb Temp: 25.4C Amb Pres: 753 mm Hg Filt Temp: 25.6C Sys Pres: N/A mm Hg FTS Pres: 0.00in H2O CurFlow: -0.3l/min FTS Flow: 0.00l/min Edit Valve Pump LeakCk

2) 2)2)2)2)2)Determine the current temperature (C) at the ambient temperaDetermine the current temperature (C) at the ambient tempera-Determine the curren t temperature (C) at the ambient tempera-Determine the current temperature (C) at the ambient tempera-Determine the current temperature (C) at the ambient temperaDetermine the current temperature (C) at the ambient temperature sensor using an external thermometer (C = 5/9 x (F - 32)). ture sensor using an external thermometer (C = 5/9 x (F - 32)).ture sensor using a n external thermometer (C = 5/9 x (F - 32)).ture sensor using an external thermome ter (C = 5/9 x (F - 32)).ture sensor using an external thermometer (C = 5/9 x (F - 3 2)).ture sensor using an external thermometer (C = 5/9 x (F - 32)). 3) 3)3)3)3)3)Verify that the value for temperature displayed as Ambient Verify that the value for temperature displayed as AmbientVerify that the value f or temperature displayed as AmbientVerify that the value for temperature displaye d as AmbientVerify that the value for temperature displayed as AmbientVerify that the value for temperature displayed as Ambient Temp in the Audit screen is within 2 C of the measured temTemp in the Audit screen is within 2 C of the measured tem-Temp in the Audit screen is within 2 C of the measured tem-Temp in the Audit screen is within 2 C of the measu red tem-Temp in the Audit screen is within 2 C of the measured tem-Temp in the Audit screen is within 2 C of the measured temperature. perature.perature.perature.perature.perature. If this is not the case, perform t he ambient temperature If this is not the case, perform the ambient temperatureIf this is not the case, perform the ambient temperatureIf this is not the case, perform the ambient tem peratureIf this is not the case, perform the ambient temperatureIf this is not t he case, perform the ambient temperature calibration procedure (Section 11). calibration procedure (Section 11).calibration procedure (Section 11).calibratio n procedure (Section 11).calibration procedure (Section 11).calibration procedur e (Section 11). SECTION 10: ROUTINE MAINTENANCE AND VERIFICATION PROCEDURES PAGE 10-3

Revision B.002 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler 10.2.2. 10.2.2.10.2.2.10.2.2.10.2.2.10.2.2. F FFFFFILTER ILTERILTERILTERILTERILTER T TTTTTEMPERATURE EMPERATUREEMPERATUREEMPERATUREEMPERATUREEMPERATURE A AAAAAUDIT UDITUDITUDITUDITUDIT Follow these steps to perform a filter temperature audit: Follow these steps to perform a filter temperature audit:Follow these steps to p erform a filter temperature audit:Follow these steps to perform a filter tempera ture audit:Follow these steps to perform a filter temperature audit:Follow these steps to perform a filter temperature audit: NOTE: Refer to Section 6 of the U.S. EPA 2.12 Quality Assurance Handbook for further information on the filter temperature audit. 1) 1)1)1)1)1)When in the Setup screen, press <F5:Audit> to display the Audit When in the Setup screen, press <F5:Audit> to display the AuditWhen in the Setup screen, press <F5:Audit> to display the AuditWhen in the Setup screen, press <F 5:Audit> to display the AuditWhen in the Setup screen, press <F5:Audit> to displ ay the AuditWhen in the Setup screen, press <F5:Audit> to display the Audit screen (Figure 10-1) screen (Figure 10-1)screen (Figure 10-1)screen (Figure 10-1)screen (Figure 10-1) screen (Figure 10-1) 2) 2)2)2)2)2)Determine the current temperature (C) at the location of the Determine the current temperature (C) at the location of theDetermine the current temperature (C) at the location of theDetermine the current temperature (C) at th e location of theDetermine the current temperature (C) at the location of theDete rmine the current temperature (C) at the location of the sample filter in the Partisol-FRM Sampler using an external sample filter in the Partisol-FRM Sampler using an externalsample filter in the Partisol-FRM Sampler using an externalsample filter in the Partisol-FRM Sampler using an externalsample filter in the Partisol-FRM Sampler using an externalsamp le filter in the Partisol-FRM Sampler using an external thermometer (C = 5/9 x (F - 32)). thermometer (C = 5/9 x (F - 32)).thermometer (C = 5/9 x (F - 32)).thermometer (C = 5/ 9 x (F - 32)).thermometer (C = 5/9 x (F - 32)).thermometer (C = 5/9 x (F - 32)). 3) 3)3)3)3)3)Verify that the value for temperature displayed as Filter Temp Verify that the value for temperature displayed as Filter Temp Verify that the valu e for temperature displayed as Filter Temp Verify that the value for temperature di splayed as Filter Temp Verify that the value for temperature displayed as Filter Tem p Verify that the value for temperature displayed as Filter Temp in the Audit screen is within 2 C of the measured temperature. in the Audit screen is within 2 C of the measured temperature.in the Audit screen is within 2 C of the measured temperature.in the Audit screen is within 2 C of the m easured temperature.in the Audit screen is within 2 C of the measured temperature. in the Audit screen is within 2 C of the measured temperature. If this is not the case, perform the filter temperature calibration If this is not the case, perform the filter temperature calibrationIf this is no

t the case, perform the filter temperature calibrationIf this is not the case, p erform the filter temperature calibrationIf this is not the case, perform the fi lter temperature calibrationIf this is not the case, perform the filter temperat ure calibration procedure (Section 11). procedure (Section 11).procedure (Section 11).procedure (Section 11).procedure ( Section 11).procedure (Section 11). SECTION 10: ROUTINE MAINTENANCE AND VERIFICATION PROCEDURES PAGE 10-4

Revision B.002 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler 10 1010101010.2.3. .2.3..2.3..2.3..2.3..2.3. P PPPPPRESSURE RESSURERESSURERESSURERESSURERESSURE A AAAAAUDIT UDITUDITUDITUDITUDIT Follow these steps to perform an ambient pressure audit: Follow these steps to perform an ambient pressure audit:Follow these steps to pe rform an ambient pressure audit:Follow these steps to perform an ambient pressur e audit:Follow these steps to perform an ambient pressure audit:Follow these ste ps to perform an ambient pressure audit: 1) 1)1)1)1)1)When in the Setup screen, press <F5: Audit> to display the Audit When in the Setup screen, press <F5: Audit> to display the AuditWhen in the Setu p screen, press <F5: Audit> to display the AuditWhen in the Setup screen, press <F5: Audit> to display the AuditWhen in the Setup screen, press <F5: Audit> to d isplay the AuditWhen in the Setup screen, press <F5: Audit> to display the Audit screen (Figure 10-1). screen (Figure 10-1).screen (Figure 10-1).screen (Figure 10-1).screen (Figure 10 -1).screen (Figure 10-1). 2) 2)2)2)2)2)Determine the current ambient station pressure in mm Hg (absoDetermine the current ambient station pressure in mm Hg (abso-Determine the curr ent ambient station pressure in mm Hg (abso-Determine the current ambient statio n pressure in mm Hg (abso-Determine the current ambient station pressure in mm H g (abso-Determine the current ambient station pressure in mm Hg (absolute pressure, not corrected to sea level). lute pressure, not corrected to sea level).lute pressure, not corrected to sea l evel).lute pressure, not corrected to sea level).lute pressure, not corrected to sea level).lute pressure, not corrected to sea level). To convert from Atmospheres @ 0 C to mm Hg, multiply by 760. To convert from millibars to mm Hg, multiply by 0.75012. To convert from inches Hg @ 32 F to mm Hg, multiply by 25.4. 3) 3)3)3)3)3)Verify that the value for Ambient Pres in the Audit screen is Verify that the value for Ambient Pres in the Audit screen isVerify that the value for Ambient Pres in the Audit screen isVerify that the value for Ambient Pres in th e Audit screen isVerify that the value for Ambient Pres in the Audit screen isVeri fy that the value for Ambient Pres in the Audit screen is within 10 mm Hg of the measured ambient pressure. If this is within 10 mm Hg of the measured ambient pressure. If this iswithin 10 mm Hg of the measured ambient pressure. If this iswithin 10 mm Hg of the measured ambient pre ssure. If this iswithin 10 mm Hg of the measured ambient pressure. If this iswith in 10 mm Hg of the measured ambient pressure. If this is not the case, perform the ambient pressure calibration procedure not the case, perform the ambient pressure calibration procedurenot the case, pe rform the ambient pressure calibration procedurenot the case, perform the ambien t pressure calibration procedurenot the case, perform the ambient pressure calib ration procedurenot the case, perform the ambient pressure calibration procedure

(Section 11). (Section 11).(Section 11).(Section 11).(Section 11).(Section 11). SECTION 10: ROUTINE MAINTENANCE AND VERIFICATION PROCEDURES PAGE 10-5

Revision B.002 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler 10.2.4. 10.2.4.10.2.4.10.2.4.10.2.4.10.2.4. E EEEEEXTERNAL XTERNALXTERNALXTERNALXTERNALXTERNAL L LLLLLEAK EAKEAKEAKEAKEAK C CCCCCHECK HECKHECKHECKHECKHECK Although the Audit screen (Figure 10-1) contains a <F5: LeakCk> soft function ke y, your Partisol-FRM Sampler may not support the automatic leak check function. Follow the instructions in Section 10.2.4.1 to determine whether your unit suppo rts this function. 10.2.4.1. AUTOMATIC EXTERNAL LEAK CHECK Follow these steps to perform an automatic external leak check: Follow these steps to perform an automatic external leak check:Follow these step s to perform an automatic external leak check:Follow these steps to perform an a utomatic external leak check:Follow these steps to perform an automatic external leak check:Follow these steps to perform an automatic external leak check: 1) 1)1)1)1)1)When in the Setup screen, press <F5: Audit> to display the Audit When in the Setup screen, press <F5: Audit> to display the AuditWhen in the Setu p screen, press <F5: Audit> to display the AuditWhen in the Setup screen, press <F5: Audit> to display the AuditWhen in the Setup screen, press <F5: Audit> to d isplay the AuditWhen in the Setup screen, press <F5: Audit> to display the Audit screen (Figure 10-1). screen (Figure 10-1).screen (Figure 10-1).screen (Figure 10-1).screen (Figure 10 -1).screen (Figure 10-1). 2) 2)2)2)2)2)Remove Remove the PM-10 Remove the PM-10 Remove the PM-10 the PM-10 inlet from the sampler. inlet from the sampler.Remove the PM-10 inlet from the sampler. inlet from the sampler.Remove the PM-10 inlet from the sampler. inlet from the sampler.

3) 3)3)3)3)3)Install a filter cassette containing a new 47 mm filter into the unit. Install a filter cassette containing a new 47 mm filter into the unit.Install a filter cassette containing a new 47 mm filter into the unit.Install a filter cas sette containing a new 47 mm filter into the unit.Install a filter cassette cont aining a new 47 mm filter into the unit.Install a filter cassette containing a n ew 47 mm filter into the unit. 4) 4)4)4)4)4)Install the flow audit adapter (Figure 10-2) (57-000618) onto the end Install the flow audit adapter (Figure 10-2) (57-000618) onto the endInstall the flow audit adapter (Figure 10-2) (57-000618) onto the endInstall the flow audit adapter (Figure 10-2) (57-000618) onto the endInstall the flow audit adapter (F igure 10-2) (57-000618) onto the endInstall the flow audit adapter (Figure 10-2) (57-000618) onto the end

of the sample tube of the sampler. Ensure that the valve on the flow of the sample tube of the sampler. Ensure that the valve on the flowof the sampl e tube of the sampler. Ensure that the valve on the flowof the sample tube of th e sampler. Ensure that the valve on the flowof the sample tube of the sampler. E nsure that the valve on the flowof the sample tube of the sampler. Ensure that t he valve on the flow audit adapter is in the open position. audit adapter is in the open position.audit adapter is in the open position.audi t adapter is in the open position.audit adapter is in the open position.audit ad apter is in the open position. Figure 10-2. Flow audit adapter installed onto the end of the sample tube. ..... ..... SECTION 10: ROUTINE MAINTENANCE AND VERIFICATION PROCEDURES PAGE 10-6

Revision B.002 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler 5) 5)5)5)5)5)Press the <F5: LeakCk> soft function key. If the sampler does not Press the <F5: LeakCk> soft function key. If the sampler does notPress the <F5: LeakCk> soft function key. If the sampler does notPress the <F5: LeakCk> soft fu nction key. If the sampler does notPress the <F5: LeakCk> soft function key. If the sampler does notPress the <F5: LeakCk> soft function key. If the sampler doe s not support the automatic external leak check function, it will display a support the automatic external leak check function, it will display asupport the automatic external leak check function, it will display asupport the automatic external leak check function, it will display asupport the automatic external le ak check function, it will display asupport the automatic external leak check fu nction, it will display a System does not support auto leak check message (Figure 10-3). System does not support auto leak check message (Figure 10-3). System does not suppo rt auto leak check message (Figure 10-3). System does not support auto leak check me ssage (Figure 10-3). System does not support auto leak check message (Figure 10-3). S ystem does not support auto leak check message (Figure 10-3). If your sampler displays this message, go to Section 10.2.4.2. If the If your sampler displays this message, go to Section 10.2.4.2. If theIf your sam pler displays this message, go to Section 10.2.4.2. If theIf your sampler displa ys this message, go to Section 10.2.4.2. If theIf your sampler displays this mes sage, go to Section 10.2.4.2. If theIf your sampler displays this message, go to Section 10.2.4.2. If the sampler does support an automatic external leak check function, go sampler does support an automatic external leak check function, gosampler does s upport an automatic external leak check function, gosampler does support an auto matic external leak check function, gosampler does support an automatic external leak check function, gosampler does support an automatic external leak check fu nction, go to step 6. to step 6.to step 6.to step 6.to step 6.to step 6. Figure 10-3. Audit screen with System does not support auto leak check message. Audit Amb Temp: 25.4 C Amb Pres: 753 mm Hg Filt Temp: 25.6 C Sys Pres: N/A mm Hg FTS Pres: 0.00 in H2O Cur Flow: -0.3 l/min FTS Flow: 0.00 l/min System does not support auto leak check. Edit Valve Pump LeakCk 6) 6)6)6)6)6) Press the <ENTER> Press the <ENTER> ER> key.Press the 7) 7)7)7)7)7) Turn the valve on Turn the valve on

key. key.Press the <ENTER> key.Press the <ENTER> key.Press the <ENT <ENTER> key. the flow audit adapter to its closed position (Figure the flow audit adapter to its closed position (FigureTurn the

valve on the flow audit adapter to its closed position (FigureTurn the valve on the flow audit adapter to its closed position (FigureTurn the valve on the flow audit adapter to its closed position (FigureTurn the valve on the flow audit ada pter to its closed position (Figure 10-2). 10-2).10-2).10-2).10-2).10-2). 8) 8)8)8)8)8) Press the <ENTER> key. Press the <ENTER> key.Press the <ENTER> key.Press the <ENTER> key.Press the <ENT ER> key.Press the <ENTER> key. 9) 9)9)9)9)9) Shut off the flow to the flow controller assembly by turning the Shut off the flow to the flow controller assembly by turning theShut off the flo w to the flow controller assembly by turning theShut off the flow to the flow co ntroller assembly by turning theShut off the flow to the flow controller assembl y by turning theShut off the flow to the flow controller assembly by turning the manual shut-off valve (flow control manual valve) that is attached to manual shut-off valve (flow control manual valve) that is attached tomanual shut -off valve (flow control manual valve) that is attached tomanual shut-off valve (flow control manual valve) that is attached tomanual shut-off valve (flow contr ol manual valve) that is attached tomanual shut-off valve (flow control manual v alve) that is attached to the large air filter on the left-hand side of the manifold in the hub. the large air filter on the left-hand side of the manifold in the hub.the large air filter on the left-hand side of the manifold in the hub.the large air filter on the left-hand side of the manifold in the hub.the large air filter on the le ft-hand side of the manifold in the hub.the large air filter on the left-hand si de of the manifold in the hub. This corresponds to location A in Figure 10-4. This corresponds to location A in Figure 10-4.This corresponds to location A in Figu re 10-4.This corresponds to location A in Figure 10-4.This corresponds to location A in Figure 10-4.This corresponds to location A in Figure 10-4. SECTION 10: ROUTINE MAINTENANCE AND VERIFICATION PROCEDURES PAGE 10-7

Revision B.002 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler Figure 10-4. Flow control manual valve (A) in the closed position. 10) 10)10)10)10)10) Press the <ENTER> key. The system will now pull a vacuum and Press the <ENTER> key. The system will now pull a vacuum andPress the <ENTER> ke y. The system will now pull a vacuum andPress the <ENTER> key. The system will n ow pull a vacuum andPress the <ENTER> key. The system will now pull a vacuum and Press the <ENTER> key. The system will now pull a vacuum and begin a 30 second leak check cycle. At the end of the cycle, a Leak begin a 30 second leak check cycle. At the end of the cycle, a Leakbegin a 30 sec ond leak check cycle. At the end of the cycle, a Leakbegin a 30 second leak check cycle. At the end of the cycle, a Leakbegin a 30 second leak check cycle. At the end of the cycle, a Leakbegin a 30 second leak check cycle. At the end of the cy cle, a Leak Check Pass or Leak Check Fail message will display on the Check Pass or Leak Check Fail message will display on theCheck Pass or Leak Check Fai l message will display on theCheck Pass or Leak Check Fail message will display on t heCheck Pass or Leak Check Fail message will display on theCheck Pass or Leak Check F ail message will display on the screen. If the leak check fails, the unit will display the actual measure screen. If the leak check fails, the unit will display the actual measurescreen. If the leak check fails, the unit will display the actual measurescreen. If the leak check fails, the unit will display the actual measurescreen. If the leak c heck fails, the unit will display the actual measurescreen. If the leak check fa ils, the unit will display the actual measure of vacuum loss. The pass criteria is a loss of 15 inches (381 mm Hg) of vacuum loss. The pass criteria is a loss of 15 inches (381 mm Hg)of vacuum lo ss. The pass criteria is a loss of 15 inches (381 mm Hg)of vacuum loss. The pass criteria is a loss of 15 inches (381 mm Hg)of vacuum loss. The pass criteria is a loss of 15 inches (381 mm Hg)of vacuum loss. The pass criteria is a loss of 1 5 inches (381 mm Hg) or less. If the leak check fails, go to step 11. If the leak check passes, or less. If the leak check fails, go to step 11. If the leak check passes,or les s. If the leak check fails, go to step 11. If the leak check passes,or less. If the leak check fails, go to step 11. If the leak check passes,or less. If the le ak check fails, go to step 11. If the leak check passes,or less. If the leak che ck fails, go to step 11. If the leak check passes, go to step 12. go to step 12.go to step 12.go to step 12.go to step 12.go to step 12. 11) 11)11)11)11)11) Replace the filter cassette with a new filter cassette and repea t the Replace the filter cassette with a new filter cassette and repeat theReplace the filter cassette with a new filter cassette and repeat theReplace the filter cas sette with a new filter cassette and repeat theReplace the filter cassette with a new filter cassette and repeat theReplace the filter cassette with a new filte r cassette and repeat the leak check procedure. If the leak check fails a second time, refer to leak check procedure. If the leak check fails a second time, refer toleak check procedure. If the leak check fails a second time, refer toleak check procedure. If the leak check fails a second time, refer toleak check procedure. If the leak

check fails a second time, refer toleak check procedure. If the leak check fail s a second time, refer to Section 11. Section 11.Section 11.Section 11.Section 11.Section 11. 12) 12)12)12)12)12) Open the flow controller manual valve that you closed in step 9. Open the flow controller manual valve that you closed in step 9.Open the flow co ntroller manual valve that you closed in step 9.Open the flow controller manual valve that you closed in step 9.Open the flow controller manual valve that you c losed in step 9.Open the flow controller manual valve that you closed in step 9. 13) 13)13)13)13)13) Slowly open the valve of the flow audit adapter. Slowly open the valve of the flow audit adapter.Slowly open the valve of the flo w audit adapter.Slowly open the valve of the flow audit adapter.Slowly open the valve of the flow audit adapter.Slowly open the valve of the flow audit adapter. 14) 14)14)14)14)14) If you will be performing a flow audit (Section 10.2.5) immediat ely, If you will be performing a flow audit (Section 10.2.5) immediately,If you will be performing a flow audit (Section 10.2.5) immediately,If you will be performin g a flow audit (Section 10.2.5) immediately,If you will be performing a flow aud it (Section 10.2.5) immediately,If you will be performing a flow audit (Section 10.2.5) immediately, go to Section 10.2.5. If you will not be performing a flow audit, go to go to Section 10.2.5. If you will not be performing a flow audit, go togo to Sec tion 10.2.5. If you will not be performing a flow audit, go togo to Section 10.2 .5. If you will not be performing a flow audit, go togo to Section 10.2.5. If yo u will not be performing a flow audit, go togo to Section 10.2.5. If you will no t be performing a flow audit, go to step 15. step 15.step 15.step 15.step 15.step 15. 15) 15)15)15)15)15) Remove the flow audit adapter from the end of the sample tube. Remove the flow audit adapter from the end of the sample tube.Remove the flow au dit adapter from the end of the sample tube.Remove the flow audit adapter from t he end of the sample tube.Remove the flow audit adapter from the end of the samp le tube.Remove the flow audit adapter from the end of the sample tube. 16) 16)16)16)16)16) Install the PM-10 inlet onto the end of the sample tube. Install the PM-10 inlet onto the end of the sample tube.Install the PM-10 inlet onto the end of the sample tube.Install the PM-10 inlet onto the end of the samp le tube.Install the PM-10 inlet onto the end of the sample tube.Install the PM-1 0 inlet onto the end of the sample tube. 17) 17)17)17)17)17) Remove the filter cassette from the sampler and discard the Remove the filter cassette from the sampler and discard theRemove the filter cas sette from the sampler and discard theRemove the filter cassette from the sample r and discard theRemove the filter cassette from the sampler and discard theRemo ve the filter cassette from the sampler and discard the 47mm filter used during the external leak check. 47mm filter used during the external leak check.47mm filter used during the exte

rnal leak check.47mm filter used during the external leak check.47mm filter used during the external leak check.47mm filter used during the external leak check. SECTION 10: ROUTINE MAINTENANCE AND VERIFICATION PROCEDURES PAGE 10-8

Revision B.002 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler 10.2.4.2. MANUAL EXTERNAL LEAK CHECK Follow these steps to perform a manual external leak test: Follow these steps to perform a manual external leak test:Follow these steps to perform a manual external leak test:Follow these steps to perform a manual exter nal leak test:Follow these steps to perform a manual external leak test:Follow t hese steps to perform a manual external leak test: 1) 1)1)1)1)1)When in the Setup screen, press <F5: Audit> to display the Audit When in the Setup screen, press <F5: Audit> to display the AuditWhen in the Setu p screen, press <F5: Audit> to display the AuditWhen in the Setup screen, press <F5: Audit> to display the AuditWhen in the Setup screen, press <F5: Audit> to d isplay the AuditWhen in the Setup screen, press <F5: Audit> to display the Audit screen (Figure 10-1). screen (Figure 10-1).screen (Figure 10-1).screen (Figure 10-1).screen (Figure 10 -1).screen (Figure 10-1). 2) 2)2)2)2)2)Remove Remove the PM-10 Remove the PM-10 Remove the PM-10 the PM-10 inlet from the sampler. inlet from the sampler.Remove the PM-10 inlet from the sampler. inlet from the sampler.Remove the PM-10 inlet from the sampler. inlet from the sampler.

3) 3)3)3)3)3)Install a filter cassette containing a new 47 mm filter into the unit. Install a filter cassette containing a new 47 mm filter into the unit.Install a filter cassette containing a new 47 mm filter into the unit.Install a filter cas sette containing a new 47 mm filter into the unit.Install a filter cassette cont aining a new 47 mm filter into the unit.Install a filter cassette containing a n ew 47 mm filter into the unit. 4) 4)4)4)4)4)Install the flow audit adapter (Figure 10-2) (57-000618) onto the end Install the flow audit adapter (Figure 10-2) (57-000618) onto the endInstall the flow audit adapter (Figure 10-2) (57-000618) onto the endInstall the flow audit adapter (Figure 10-2) (57-000618) onto the endInstall the flow audit adapter (F igure 10-2) (57-000618) onto the endInstall the flow audit adapter (Figure 10-2) (57-000618) onto the end of the sample tube of the sampler. Ensure that the valve on the flow of the sample tube of the sampler. Ensure that the valve on the flowof the sampl e tube of the sampler. Ensure that the valve on the flowof the sample tube of th e sampler. Ensure that the valve on the flowof the sample tube of the sampler. E nsure that the valve on the flowof the sample tube of the sampler. Ensure that t he valve on the flow audit adapter is in the open position. audit adapter is in the open position.audit adapter is in the open position.audi t adapter is in the open position.audit adapter is in the open position.audit ad apter is in the open position. 5) 5)5)5)5)5)Press <F2: Valve>. Press <F2: Valve>.Press <F2: Valve>.Press <F2: Valve>.Press <F2: Valve>.Press <F 2: Valve>.

6) 6)6)6)6)6)Press <F3: Pump>. Press <F3: Pump>.Press <F3: Pump>.Press <F3: Pump>.Press <F3: Pump>.Press <F3: P ump>. 7) 7)7)7)7)7)Turn the valve on the flow audit adapter to its closed position (Figur e Turn the valve on the flow audit adapter to its closed position (FigureTurn the valve on the flow audit adapter to its closed position (FigureTurn the valve on the flow audit adapter to its closed position (FigureTurn the valve on the flow audit adapter to its closed position (FigureTurn the valve on the flow audit ada pter to its closed position (Figure 10-2). 10-2).10-2).10-2).10-2).10-2). 8) 8)8)8)8)8)Shut off the flow to the flow controller assembly by turning the Shut off the flow to the flow controller assembly by turning theShut off the flo w to the flow controller assembly by turning theShut off the flow to the flow co ntroller assembly by turning theShut off the flow to the flow controller assembl y by turning theShut off the flow to the flow controller assembly by turning the manual shut-off valve (flow control manual valve) that is attached to manual shut-off valve (flow control manual valve) that is attached tomanual shut -off valve (flow control manual valve) that is attached tomanual shut-off valve (flow control manual valve) that is attached tomanual shut-off valve (flow contr ol manual valve) that is attached tomanual shut-off valve (flow control manual v alve) that is attached to the large air filter on the left-hand side of the manifold in the hub. the large air filter on the left-hand side of the manifold in the hub.the large air filter on the left-hand side of the manifold in the hub.the large air filter on the left-hand side of the manifold in the hub.the large air filter on the le ft-hand side of the manifold in the hub.the large air filter on the left-hand si de of the manifold in the hub. This corresponds to location A in Figure 10-4. This corresponds to location A in Figure 10-4.This corresponds to location A in Figu re 10-4.This corresponds to location A in Figure 10-4.This corresponds to location A in Figure 10-4.This corresponds to location A in Figure 10-4. 9) 9)9)9)9)9)Watch the vacuum gauge and record the reading on the vacuum Watch the vacuum gauge and record the reading on the vacuumWatch the vacuum gaug e and record the reading on the vacuumWatch the vacuum gauge and record the read ing on the vacuumWatch the vacuum gauge and record the reading on the vacuumWatc h the vacuum gauge and record the reading on the vacuum gauge when it becomes stable. The gauge should read at least 15 gauge when it becomes stable. The gauge should read at least 15gauge when it bec omes stable. The gauge should read at least 15gauge when it becomes stable. The gauge should read at least 15gauge when it becomes stable. The gauge should read at least 15gauge when it becomes stable. The gauge should read at least 15 inches H inches Hinches Hinches Hinches Hinches H2 22222O (381 mm Hg). O (381 mm Hg).O (381 mm Hg).O (381 mm Hg).O (381 mm Hg).O (381 mm Hg). 10) 10)10)10)10)10) Shut off the flow to the pump by turning the other manual shut-o ff

Shut off the flow to the pump by turning the other manual shut-offShut off the f low to the pump by turning the other manual shut-offShut off the flow to the pum p by turning the other manual shut-offShut off the flow to the pump by turning t he other manual shut-offShut off the flow to the pump by turning the other manua l shut-off valve (pump manual valve) located on the bottom of the manifold in valve (pump manual valve) located on the bottom of the manifold invalve (pump ma nual valve) located on the bottom of the manifold invalve (pump manual valve) lo cated on the bottom of the manifold invalve (pump manual valve) located on the b ottom of the manifold invalve (pump manual valve) located on the bottom of the m anifold in the hub. the hub.the hub.the hub.the hub.the hub. 11) 11)11)11)11)11) Press <F3: Pump>. Press <F3: Pump>.Press <F3: Pump>.Press <F3: Pump>.Press <F3: Pump>.Press <F3: P ump>. 12) 12)12)12)12)12) Record the reading on the vacuum gauge. This reading should not Record the reading on the vacuum gauge. This reading should notRecord the readin g on the vacuum gauge. This reading should notRecord the reading on the vacuum g auge. This reading should notRecord the reading on the vacuum gauge. This readin g should notRecord the reading on the vacuum gauge. This reading should not drop by more than 8.5 inches Hg during this 30 second period. This drop by more than 8.5 inches Hg during this 30 second period. Thisdrop by more t han 8.5 inches Hg during this 30 second period. Thisdrop by more than 8.5 inches Hg during this 30 second period. Thisdrop by more than 8.5 inches Hg during thi s 30 second period. Thisdrop by more than 8.5 inches Hg during this 30 second pe riod. This corresponds to a leak of 80 ml/min. If the reading does drop by more corresponds to a leak of 80 ml/min. If the reading does drop by morecorresponds to a leak of 80 ml/min. If the reading does drop by morecorresponds to a leak of 80 ml/min. If the reading does drop by morecorresponds to a leak of 80 ml/min. If the reading does drop by morecorresponds to a leak of 80 ml/min. If the readi ng does drop by more than 8.5 inches Hg during this 30 second period, trace the internal than 8.5 inches Hg during this 30 second period, trace the internalthan 8.5 inch es Hg during this 30 second period, trace the internalthan 8.5 inches Hg during this 30 second period, trace the internalthan 8.5 inches Hg during this 30 secon d period, trace the internalthan 8.5 inches Hg during this 30 second period, tra ce the internal (and external) flow paths to identify problems in tubing or connec(and external) flow paths to identify problems in tubing or connec-(and external ) flow paths to identify problems in tubing or connec-(and external) flow paths to identify problems in tubing or connec-(and external) flow paths to identify p roblems in tubing or connec-(and external) flow paths to identify problems in tu bing or connections. tions.tions.tions.tions.tions. 13) 13)13)13)13)13) Open the flow controller manual valve and pump manual valve that Open the flow controller manual valve and pump manual valve thatOpen the flow co ntroller manual valve and pump manual valve thatOpen the flow controller manual valve and pump manual valve thatOpen the flow controller manual valve and pump m anual valve thatOpen the flow controller manual valve and pump manual valve that you closed in steps 8 and 10.

you closed in steps 8 and 10.you closed in steps 8 and 10.you closed in steps 8 and 10.you closed in steps 8 and 10.you closed in steps 8 and 10. 14) 14)14)14)14)14) Slowly open the valve of the flow audit adapter. Slowly open the valve of the flow audit adapter.Slowly open the valve of the flo w audit adapter.Slowly open the valve of the flow audit adapter.Slowly open the valve of the flow audit adapter.Slowly open the valve of the flow audit adapter. 15) 15)15)15)15)15) Press <F2: Valve>. Press <F2: Valve>.Press <F2: Valve>.Press <F2: Valve>.Press <F2: Valve>.Press <F 2: Valve>. SECTION 10: ROUTINE MAINTENANCE AND VERIFICATION PROCEDURES PAGE 10-9

Revision B.002 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler 16) 16)16)16)16)16) If you will be performing a flow audit (Section 10.2.5) immediat ely, If you will be performing a flow audit (Section 10.2.5) immediately,If you will be performing a flow audit (Section 10.2.5) immediately,If you will be performin g a flow audit (Section 10.2.5) immediately,If you will be performing a flow aud it (Section 10.2.5) immediately,If you will be performing a flow audit (Section 10.2.5) immediately, go to Section 10.2.5. If you will not be performing a flow audit, go to go to Section 10.2.5. If you will not be performing a flow audit, go togo to Sec tion 10.2.5. If you will not be performing a flow audit, go togo to Section 10.2 .5. If you will not be performing a flow audit, go togo to Section 10.2.5. If yo u will not be performing a flow audit, go togo to Section 10.2.5. If you will no t be performing a flow audit, go to step 17. step 17.step 17.step 17.step 17.step 17. 17) 17)17)17)17)17) Remove the flow audit adapter from the end of the sample tube. Remove the flow audit adapter from the end of the sample tube.Remove the flow au dit adapter from the end of the sample tube.Remove the flow audit adapter from t he end of the sample tube.Remove the flow audit adapter from the end of the samp le tube.Remove the flow audit adapter from the end of the sample tube. 18) 18)18)18)18)18) Install the PM-10 inlet onto the end of the sample tube. Install the PM-10 inlet onto the end of the sample tube.Install the PM-10 inlet onto the end of the sample tube.Install the PM-10 inlet onto the end of the samp le tube.Install the PM-10 inlet onto the end of the sample tube.Install the PM-1 0 inlet onto the end of the sample tube. 19 1919191919) ))))) Remove the filter cassette from the sampler and discard the Remove the filter cassette from the sampler and discard theRemove the filter cas sette from the sampler and discard theRemove the filter cassette from the sample r and discard theRemove the filter cassette from the sampler and discard theRemo ve the filter cassette from the sampler and discard the 47mm filter used during the external leak check. 47mm filter used during the external leak check.47mm filter used during the exte rnal leak check.47mm filter used during the external leak check.47mm filter used during the external leak check.47mm filter used during the external leak check. SECTION 10: ROUTINE MAINTENANCE AND VERIFICATION PROCEDURES PAGE 10-10

Revision B.002 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler 10.2.5. 10.2.5.10.2.5.10.2.5.10.2.5.10.2.5. F FFFFFLOW LOWLOWLOWLOWLOW A AAAAAUDIT UDITUDITUDITUDITUDIT Perform the ambient temperature audit (Section 10.2.1), filter temperature audit (Section 10.2.2), pressure audit (Section 10.2.3) and external leak check (Secti on 10.2.4) before executing the flow audit procedure. Follow these steps Follow these steps audit:Follow these flow audit:Follow to perform a flow audit: to perform a flow audit:Follow these steps to perform a flow steps to perform a flow audit:Follow these steps to perform a these steps to perform a flow audit:

1) 1)1)1)1)1)When in the Setup screen, press <F5: Audit> to display the Audit When in the Setup screen, press <F5: Audit> to display the AuditWhen in the Setu p screen, press <F5: Audit> to display the AuditWhen in the Setup screen, press <F5: Audit> to display the AuditWhen in the Setup screen, press <F5: Audit> to d isplay the AuditWhen in the Setup screen, press <F5: Audit> to display the Audit screen (Figure 10-1). screen (Figure 10-1).screen (Figure 10-1).screen (Figure 10-1).screen (Figure 10 -1).screen (Figure 10-1). 2) 2)2)2)2)2)Install a filter cassette containing a 47 mm filter into the hardInstall a filter cassette containing a 47 mm filter into the hard-Install a filt er cassette containing a 47 mm filter into the hard-Install a filter cassette co ntaining a 47 mm filter into the hard-Install a filter cassette containing a 47 mm filter into the hard-Install a filter cassette containing a 47 mm filter into the hardware. This filter will be thrown away at the end of this flow audit. ware. This filter will be thrown away at the end of this flow audit.ware. This f ilter will be thrown away at the end of this flow audit.ware. This filter will b e thrown away at the end of this flow audit.ware. This filter will be thrown awa y at the end of this flow audit.ware. This filter will be thrown away at the end of this flow audit. 3) 3)3)3)3)3)Remove the PM-10 inlet from the end of the sample tube. Remove the PM-10 inlet from the end of the sample tube.Remove the PM-10 inlet fr om the end of the sample tube.Remove the PM-10 inlet from the end of the sample tube.Remove the PM-10 inlet from the end of the sample tube.Remove the PM-10 inl et from the end of the sample tube. 4) 4)4)4)4)4)If you are using the Streamline Flow Transfer Standard (FTS) to If you are using the Streamline Flow Transfer Standard (FTS) toIf you are using the Streamline Flow Transfer Standard (FTS) toIf you are using the Streamline Fl ow Transfer Standard (FTS) toIf you are using the Streamline Flow Transfer Stand ard (FTS) toIf you are using the Streamline Flow Transfer Standard (FTS) to

audit the flow of the Partisol-FRM Sampler, go to step 5. If you audit the flow of the Partisol-FRM Sampler, go to step 5. If youaudit the flow o f the Partisol-FRM Sampler, go to step 5. If youaudit the flow of the Partisol-F RM Sampler, go to step 5. If youaudit the flow of the Partisol-FRM Sampler, go t o step 5. If youaudit the flow of the Partisol-FRM Sampler, go to step 5. If you are not using the Streamline FTS to audit the flow of the Partisolare not using the Streamline FTS to audit the flow of the Partisol-are not using the Streamline FTS to audit the flow of the Partisol-are not using the Streamli ne FTS to audit the flow of the Partisol-are not using the Streamline FTS to aud it the flow of the Partisol-are not using the Streamline FTS to audit the flow o f the PartisolFRM Sampler, go to step 13. FRM Sampler, go to step 13.FRM Sampler, go to step 13.FRM Sampler, go to step 13 .FRM Sampler, go to step 13.FRM Sampler, go to step 13. 5) 5)5)5)5)5)Press the <ESC> key to display the Setup screen. Press the <ESC> key to display the Setup screen.Press the <ESC> key to display t he Setup screen.Press the <ESC> key to display the Setup screen.Press the <ESC> key to display the Setup screen.Press the <ESC> key to display the Setup screen. 6) 6)6)6)6)6)When in the Setup screen, press <F1:EDIT>. When in the Setup screen, press <F1:EDIT>.When in the Setup screen, press <F1:ED IT>.When in the Setup screen, press <F1:EDIT>.When in the Setup screen, press <F 1:EDIT>.When in the Setup screen, press <F1:EDIT>. 7) 7)7)7)7)7)Press the down (< Press the down (<Press the down (<Press the down (<Press the down (<Press the do wn (<. .....>) arrow to display the FTS CONST m field. >) arrow to display the FTS CONST m field.>) arrow to display the FTS CONST m >) arrow to display the FTS CONST m field.>) arrow to display the FTS CONST m >) arrow to display the FTS CONST m field.

field. field.

8) 8)8)8)8)8)Locate the m constant on the FTS Calibration sheet, and enter Locate the m constant on the FTS Calibration sheet, and enterLocate the m constant o n the FTS Calibration sheet, and enterLocate the m constant on the FTS Calibration sheet, and enterLocate the m constant on the FTS Calibration sheet, and enterLoca te the m constant on the FTS Calibration sheet, and enter it into the FTS CONST m field. it into the FTS CONST m field.it into the FTS CONST m field.it into the FTS CONST m eld.it into the FTS CONST m field.it into the FTS CONST m field. 9) 9)9)9)9)9)Press the down (< Press the down (<Press the down (<Press the down (<Press the down (<Press the do wn (<. .....>) arrow to display the FTS CONST b field. >) arrow to display the FTS CONST b field.>) arrow to display the FTS CONST b >) arrow to display the FTS CONST b field.>) arrow to display the FTS CONST b >) arrow to display the FTS CONST b field.

fi

field. field.

10) 10)10)10)10)10) Locate the b constant on the FTS Calibration sheet, and enter it Locate the b constant on the FTS Calibration sheet, and enter itLocate the b constan

t on the FTS Calibration sheet, and enter itLocate the b constant on the FTS Calib ration sheet, and enter itLocate the b constant on the FTS Calibration sheet, and enter itLocate the b constant on the FTS Calibration sheet, and enter it into the FTS CONST b field. into the FTS CONST b field.into the FTS CONST b field.into the FTS CONST b field.into the FTS CONST b field.into the FTS CONST b field. 11) 11)11)11)11)11) Press the <ENTER> key. Press the <ENTER> key.Press the <ENTER> key.Press the <ENTER> key.Press the <ENT ER> key.Press the <ENTER> key. 12) 12)12)12)12)12) Press <F5: Audit> to display the Audit screen. Go to step 13. Press <F5: Audit> to display the Audit screen. Go to step 13.Press <F5: Audit> t o display the Audit screen. Go to step 13.Press <F5: Audit> to display the Audit screen. Go to step 13.Press <F5: Audit> to display the Audit screen. Go to step 13.Press <F5: Audit> to display the Audit screen. Go to step 13. 13) 13)13)13)13)13) If you are using the Streamline FTS to audit the flow of the If you are using the Streamline FTS to audit the flow of theIf you are using the Streamline FTS to audit the flow of theIf you are using the Streamline FTS to a udit the flow of theIf you are using the Streamline FTS to audit the flow of the If you are using the Streamline FTS to audit the flow of the Partisol-FRM Sampler, install the Streamline FTS onto the end of Partisol-FRM Sampler, install the Streamline FTS onto the end ofPartisol-FRM Sam pler, install the Streamline FTS onto the end ofPartisol-FRM Sampler, install th e Streamline FTS onto the end ofPartisol-FRM Sampler, install the Streamline FTS onto the end ofPartisol-FRM Sampler, install the Streamline FTS onto the end of the sample tube (Figure 10-5). If you are not using the Streamline the sample tube (Figure 10-5). If you are not using the Streamlinethe sample tub e (Figure 10-5). If you are not using the Streamlinethe sample tube (Figure 10-5 ). If you are not using the Streamlinethe sample tube (Figure 10-5). If you are not using the Streamlinethe sample tube (Figure 10-5). If you are not using the Streamline FTS to audit the flow of the Partisol-FRM Sampler, you may need FTS to audit the flow of the Partisol-FRM Sampler, you may needFTS to audit the flow of the Partisol-FRM Sampler, you may needFTS to audit the flow of the Parti sol-FRM Sampler, you may needFTS to audit the flow of the Partisol-FRM Sampler, you may needFTS to audit the flow of the Partisol-FRM Sampler, you may need to install the flow audit adapter (57-000618) onto the end of the to install the flow audit adapter (57-000618) onto the end of theto install the flow audit adapter (57-000618) onto the end of theto install the flow audit adap ter (57-000618) onto the end of theto install the flow audit adapter (57-000618) onto the end of theto install the flow audit adapter (57-000618) onto the end o f the sample tube (Figure 10-2). If you will be using the flow audit sample tube (Figure 10-2). If you will be using the flow auditsample tube (Figur e 10-2). If you will be using the flow auditsample tube (Figure 10-2). If you wi ll be using the flow auditsample tube (Figure 10-2). If you will be using the fl ow auditsample tube (Figure 10-2). If you will be using the flow audit adapter, ensure that you install it onto the end of the sample tube adapter, ensure that you install it onto the end of the sample tubeadapter, ensu re that you install it onto the end of the sample tubeadapter, ensure that you i nstall it onto the end of the sample tubeadapter, ensure that you install it ont o the end of the sample tubeadapter, ensure that you install it onto the end of the sample tube with its valve in the open position.

with its valve in the open position.with its valve in the open position.with its valve in the open position.with its valve in the open position.with its valve i n the open position. SECTION 10: ROUTINE MAINTENANCE AND VERIFICATION PROCEDURES PAGE 10-11

Revision B.002 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler Figure 10-5. Streamline FTS installed onto the end of the sample tube. 14) 14)14)14)14)14) Press <F3:Pump>. Press <F3:Pump>.Press <F3:Pump>.Press <F3:Pump>.Press <F3:Pump>.Press <F3:Pump>. 15) 15)15)15)15)15) Press <F2: Valve>. Press <F2: Valve>.Press <F2: Valve>.Press <F2: Valve>.Press <F2: Valve>.Press <F 2: Valve>. 16) 16)16)16)16)16) If you are using the Streamline FTS, go to step 17. If you are n ot If you are using the Streamline FTS, go to step 17. If you are notIf you are usi ng the Streamline FTS, go to step 17. If you are notIf you are using the Streaml ine FTS, go to step 17. If you are notIf you are using the Streamline FTS, go to step 17. If you are notIf you are using the Streamline FTS, go to step 17. If y ou are not using using using using the the the the Streamline Streamline Streamline Streamline FTS, FTS, FTS, FTS, go go go go to to to to step step step step 19. 19.using the Streamline FTS, go to step 19. 19.using the Streamline FTS, go to step 19. 19.

17) 17)17)17)17)17) Press <F1: Edit>. Press <F1: Edit>.Press <F1: Edit>.Press <F1: Edit>.Press <F1: Edit>.Press <F1: E dit>. 18) 18)18)18)18)18) Enter the pressure drop (inches H Enter the pressure drop (inches HEnter the pressure drop (inches HEnter the pres sure drop (inches HEnter the pressure drop (inches HEnter the pressure drop (inc hes H2 22222O) in the FTS Pres field, and O) in the FTS Pres field, andO) in the FTS Pres field, andO) in the FTS Pres field, an dO) in the FTS Pres field, andO) in the FTS Pres field, and then press the <ENTER> key. The unit will automatically calculate then press the <ENTER> key. The unit will automatically calculatethen press the <ENTER> key. The unit will automatically calculatethen press the <ENTER> key. Th e unit will automatically calculatethen press the <ENTER> key. The unit will aut omatically calculatethen press the <ENTER> key. The unit will automatically calc ulate the flow (l/min) and display it in the FTS Flow field. Go to step the flow (l/min) and display it in the FTS Flow field. Go to stepthe flow (l/min) and display it in the FTS Flow field. Go to stepthe flow (l/min) and display it in the FTS Flow field. Go to stepthe flow (l/min) and display it in the FTS Flow field . Go to stepthe flow (l/min) and display it in the FTS Flow field. Go to step 21. 21.21.21.21.21. 19) 19)19)19)19)19) Determine the flow in units of actual (volumetric) l/min using t

he Determine the flow in units of actual (volumetric) l/min using theDetermine the flow in units of actual (volumetric) l/min using theDetermine the flow in units of actual (volumetric) l/min using theDetermine the flow in units of actual (vol umetric) l/min using theDetermine the flow in units of actual (volumetric) l/min using the external flow meter. external flow meter.external flow meter.external flow meter.external flow meter. external flow meter. 20) 20)20)20)20)20) Verify that this flow matches the value displayed in the Flow Verify that this flow matches the value displayed in the FlowVerify that this flo w matches the value displayed in the FlowVerify that this flow matches the value displayed in the FlowVerify that this flow matches the value displayed in the Flow Verify that this flow matches the value displayed in the Flow Rate field to within 4%. If the flow rate measured on the flow Rate field to within 4%. If the flow rate measured on the flowRate field to within 4 %. If the flow rate measured on the flowRate field to within 4%. If the flow rate measured on the flowRate field to within 4%. If the flow rate measured on the flow Rate field to within 4%. If the flow rate measured on the flow meter matches the value displayed in the Flow Rate field to meter matches the value displayed in the Flow Rate field tometer matches the value displayed in the Flow Rate field tometer matches the value displayed in the Flow R ate field tometer matches the value displayed in the Flow Rate field tometer matche s the value displayed in the Flow Rate field to within 4%, go to step 21. If the flow rate measured on the flow within 4%, go to step 21. If the flow rate measured on the flowwithin 4%, go to st ep 21. If the flow rate measured on the flowwithin 4%, go to step 21. If the flow rate measured on the flowwithin 4%, go to step 21. If the flow rate measured on the flowwithin 4%, go to step 21. If the flow rate measured on the flow meter does not match the value displayed in the Flow Rate field meter does not match the value displayed in the Flow Rate fieldmeter does not matc h the value displayed in the Flow Rate fieldmeter does not match the value display ed in the Flow Rate fieldmeter does not match the value displayed in the Flow Rate f ieldmeter does not match the value displayed in the Flow Rate field to within 4%, perform the flow calibration procedure (Section to within 4%, perform the flow calibration procedure (Sectionto within 4%, perform the flow calibration procedure (Sectionto within 4%, perform the flow calibratio n procedure (Sectionto within 4%, perform the flow calibration procedure (Section to within 4%, perform the flow calibration procedure (Section 11). 11).11).11).11).11). SECTION 10: ROUTINE MAINTENANCE AND VERIFICATION PROCEDURES PAGE 10-12

Revision B.002 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler 21 2121212121Verify that the flow rate measured on the flow meter matches the Verify that the flow rate measured on the flow meter matches theVerify that the flow rate measured on the flow meter matches theVerify that the flow rate measur ed on the flow meter matches theVerify that the flow rate measured on the flow m eter matches theVerify that the flow rate measured on the flow meter matches the sampler s original flow design value (16.7 l/min) to within 5%. If sampler s original flow design value (16.7 l/min) to within 5%. Ifsampler s original flow design value (16.7 l/min) to within 5%. Ifsampler s original flow design value (16.7 l/min) to within 5%. Ifsampler s original flow design value (16.7 l/min) to within 5%. Ifsampler s original flow design value (16.7 l/min) to within 5%. If the flow rate measured on the flow meter matches the sampler s the flow rate measured on the flow meter matches the sampler sthe flow rate measur ed on the flow meter matches the sampler sthe flow rate measured on the flow meter matches the sampler sthe flow rate measured on the flow meter matches the sampler s the flow rate measured on the flow meter matches the sampler s original flow design value (16.7 l/min) to within 5%, go to step original flow design value (16.7 l/min) to within 5%, go to steporiginal flow des ign value (16.7 l/min) to within 5%, go to steporiginal flow design value (16.7 l /min) to within 5%, go to steporiginal flow design value (16.7 l/min) to within 5% , go to steporiginal flow design value (16.7 l/min) to within 5%, go to step 22. If the flow rate measured on the flow meter does not match 22. If the flow rate measured on the flow meter does not match22. If the flow ra te measured on the flow meter does not match22. If the flow rate measured on the flow meter does not match22. If the flow rate measured on the flow meter does n ot match22. If the flow rate measured on the flow meter does not match the sampler s original flow design value (16.7 l/min) to within the sampler s original flow design value (16.7 l/min) to withinthe sampler s origina l flow design value (16.7 l/min) to withinthe sampler s original flow design value (16.7 l/min) to withinthe sampler s original flow design value (16.7 l/min) to wi thinthe sampler s original flow design value (16.7 l/min) to within 5%, calibrate the external flow meter. 5%, calibrate the external flow meter.5%, calibrate the external flow meter.5%, cal ibrate the external flow meter.5%, calibrate the external flow meter.5%, calibrate the external flow meter. 22) 22)22)22)22)22) Return to the Main screen by pressing the <ESC> key twice. Return to the Main screen by pressing the <ESC> key twice.Return to the Main scr een by pressing the <ESC> key twice.Return to the Main screen by pressing the <E SC> key twice.Return to the Main screen by pressing the <ESC> key twice.Return t o the Main screen by pressing the <ESC> key twice. 23) 23)23)23)23)23) Remove the flow metering hardware. Remove the flow metering hardware.Remove the flow metering hardware.Remove the f low metering hardware.Remove the flow metering hardware.Remove the flow metering hardware. 24) 24)24)24)24)24) Install the PM-10 inlet onto the end of the sample tube. Install the PM-10 inlet onto the end of the sample tube.Install the PM-10 inlet onto the end of the sample tube.Install the PM-10 inlet onto the end of the samp le tube.Install the PM-10 inlet onto the end of the sample tube.Install the PM-1 0 inlet onto the end of the sample tube. 25)

25)25)25)25)25) Remove the filter cassette from the sampler and discard the 47 Remove the filter cassette from the sampler and discard the 47Remove the filter cassette from the sampler and discard the 47Remove the filter cassette from the sampler and discard the 47Remove the filter cassette from the sampler and discar d the 47Remove the filter cassette from the sampler and discard the 47 mm filter. mm filter.mm filter.mm filter.mm filter.mm filter. SECTION 10: ROUTINE MAINTENANCE AND VERIFICATION PROCEDURES PAGE 10-13

Revision B.002 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler 10.2.6. 10.2.6.10.2.6.10.2.6.10.2.6.10.2.6. I IIIIINTERNAL NTERNALNTERNALNTERNALNTERNALNTERNAL L LLLLLEAK EAKEAKEAKEAKEAK T TTTTTEST ESTESTESTESTEST Follow these steps to perform an internal leak check: Follow these steps to perform an internal leak check:Follow these steps to perfo rm an internal leak check:Follow these steps to perform an internal leak check:F ollow these steps to perform an internal leak check:Follow these steps to perfor m an internal leak check: 1) 1)1)1)1)1)Clean the filter cassette with a clean cloth and alcohol to remove Clean the filter cassette with a clean cloth and alcohol to removeClean the filt er cassette with a clean cloth and alcohol to removeClean the filter cassette wi th a clean cloth and alcohol to removeClean the filter cassette with a clean clo th and alcohol to removeClean the filter cassette with a clean cloth and alcohol to remove any oil or other material. any oil or other material.any oil or other material.any oil or other material.an y oil or other material.any oil or other material. 2) 2)2)2)2)2)Insert a leak check disk (36-004768) into the filter cassette. Insert a leak check disk (36-004768) into the filter cassette.Insert a leak chec k disk (36-004768) into the filter cassette.Insert a leak check disk (36-004768) into the filter cassette.Insert a leak check disk (36-004768) into the filter c assette.Insert a leak check disk (36-004768) into the filter cassette. 3) 3)3)3)3)3)Install the filter cassette into the sampler and push on the handle Install the filter cassette into the sampler and push on the handleInstall the f ilter cassette into the sampler and push on the handleInstall the filter cassett e into the sampler and push on the handleInstall the filter cassette into the sa mpler and push on the handleInstall the filter cassette into the sampler and pus h on the handle to move the filter cassette into the sampling position. to move the filter cassette into the sampling position.to move the filter casset te into the sampling position.to move the filter cassette into the sampling posi tion.to move the filter cassette into the sampling position.to move the filter c assette into the sampling position. 4) 4)4)4)4)4)When in the Setup screen, press <F5: Audit> to display the Audit When in the Setup screen, press <F5: Audit> to display the AuditWhen in the Setu p screen, press <F5: Audit> to display the AuditWhen in the Setup screen, press <F5: Audit> to display the AuditWhen in the Setup screen, press <F5: Audit> to d isplay the AuditWhen in the Setup screen, press <F5: Audit> to display the Audit screen (Figure 10-1). screen (Figure 10-1).screen (Figure 10-1).screen (Figure 10-1).screen (Figure 10 -1).screen (Figure 10-1).

5) 5)5)5)5)5)Press <F2: Valve>. Press <F2: Valve>.Press <F2: Valve>.Press <F2: Valve>.Press <F2: Valve>.Press <F 2: Valve>. 6) 6)6)6)6)6)Press <F3: Pump>. Press <F3: Pump>.Press <F3: Pump>.Press <F3: Pump>.Press <F3: Pump>.Press <F3: P ump>. 7) 7)7)7)7)7)Shut off the flow to the flow controller assembly by turning the Shut off the flow to the flow controller assembly by turning theShut off the flo w to the flow controller assembly by turning theShut off the flow to the flow co ntroller assembly by turning theShut off the flow to the flow controller assembl y by turning theShut off the flow to the flow controller assembly by turning the manual shut-off valve (flow control manual valve) that is attached to manual shut-off valve (flow control manual valve) that is attached tomanual shut -off valve (flow control manual valve) that is attached tomanual shut-off valve (flow control manual valve) that is attached tomanual shut-off valve (flow contr ol manual valve) that is attached tomanual shut-off valve (flow control manual v alve) that is attached to the large air filter on the left-hand side of the manifold in the hub. the large air filter on the left-hand side of the manifold in the hub.the large air filter on the left-hand side of the manifold in the hub.the large air filter on the left-hand side of the manifold in the hub.the large air filter on the le ft-hand side of the manifold in the hub.the large air filter on the left-hand si de of the manifold in the hub. This corresponds to location A in Figure 10-4. This corresponds to location A in Figure 10-4.This corresponds to location A in Figu re 10-4.This corresponds to location A in Figure 10-4.This corresponds to location A in Figure 10-4.This corresponds to location A in Figure 10-4. 8) 8)8)8)8)8)Record the reading on the vacuum gauge. Record the reading on the vacuum gauge.Record the reading on the vacuum gauge.Re cord the reading on the vacuum gauge.Record the reading on the vacuum gauge.Reco rd the reading on the vacuum gauge. 9) 9)9)9)9)9)Shut off the flow to the pump by turning the other manual shut-off Shut off the flow to the pump by turning the other manual shut-offShut off the f low to the pump by turning the other manual shut-offShut off the flow to the pum p by turning the other manual shut-offShut off the flow to the pump by turning t he other manual shut-offShut off the flow to the pump by turning the other manua l shut-off valve (pump manual valve) located on the bottom of the manifold in valve (pump manual valve) located on the bottom of the manifold invalve (pump ma nual valve) located on the bottom of the manifold invalve (pump manual valve) lo cated on the bottom of the manifold invalve (pump manual valve) located on the b ottom of the manifold invalve (pump manual valve) located on the bottom of the m anifold in the hub. the hub.the hub.the hub.the hub.the hub. 10) 10)10)10)10)10) Press <F3: Pump>.

Press <F3: Pump>.Press <F3: Pump>.Press <F3: Pump>.Press <F3: Pump>.Press <F3: P ump>. 11) 11)11)11)11)11) Record the reading on the vacuum gauge. This reading should not Record the reading on the vacuum gauge. This reading should notRecord the readin g on the vacuum gauge. This reading should notRecord the reading on the vacuum g auge. This reading should notRecord the reading on the vacuum gauge. This readin g should notRecord the reading on the vacuum gauge. This reading should not drop by more than 8.5 inches Hg during this 30 second period. This drop by more than 8.5 inches Hg during this 30 second period. Thisdrop by more t han 8.5 inches Hg during this 30 second period. Thisdrop by more than 8.5 inches Hg during this 30 second period. Thisdrop by more than 8.5 inches Hg during thi s 30 second period. Thisdrop by more than 8.5 inches Hg during this 30 second pe riod. This corresponds to a leak of 80 ml/min. If the reading does drop by more corresponds to a leak of 80 ml/min. If the reading does drop by morecorresponds to a leak of 80 ml/min. If the reading does drop by morecorresponds to a leak of 80 ml/min. If the reading does drop by morecorresponds to a leak of 80 ml/min. If the reading does drop by morecorresponds to a leak of 80 ml/min. If the readi ng does drop by more than 8.5 inches Hg during this 30 second period, trace the internal than 8.5 inches Hg during this 30 second period, trace the internalthan 8.5 inch es Hg during this 30 second period, trace the internalthan 8.5 inches Hg during this 30 second period, trace the internalthan 8.5 inches Hg during this 30 secon d period, trace the internalthan 8.5 inches Hg during this 30 second period, tra ce the internal flow paths to identify problems in tubing or connections. flow paths to identify problems in tubing or connections.flow paths to identify problems in tubing or connections.flow paths to identify problems in tubing or c onnections.flow paths to identify problems in tubing or connections.flow paths t o identify problems in tubing or connections. 12) 12)12)12)12)12) Press <F2: Valve>. Press <F2: Valve>.Press <F2: Valve>.Press <F2: Valve>.Press <F2: Valve>.Press <F 2: Valve>. 13) 13)13)13)13)13) Open the flow controller manual valve and pump manual valve that Open the flow controller manual valve and pump manual valve thatOpen the flow co ntroller manual valve and pump manual valve thatOpen the flow controller manual valve and pump manual valve thatOpen the flow controller manual valve and pump m anual valve thatOpen the flow controller manual valve and pump manual valve that you closed in steps 7 and 9. you closed in steps 7 and 9.you closed in steps 7 and 9.you closed in steps 7 an d 9.you closed in steps 7 and 9.you closed in steps 7 and 9. 14) 14)14)14)14)14) Slowly open the valve of the flow audit adapter. Slowly open the valve of the flow audit adapter.Slowly open the valve of the flo w audit adapter.Slowly open the valve of the flow audit adapter.Slowly open the valve of the flow audit adapter.Slowly open the valve of the flow audit adapter. 15) 15)15)15)15)15) Remove the flow audit adapter from the end of the sample tube.

Remove the flow audit adapter from the end of the sample tube.Remove the flow au dit adapter from the end of the sample tube.Remove the flow audit adapter from t he end of the sample tube.Remove the flow audit adapter from the end of the samp le tube.Remove the flow audit adapter from the end of the sample tube. 16) 16)16)16)16)16) Install the PM-10 inlet onto the end of the sample tube. Install the PM-10 inlet onto the end of the sample tube.Install the PM-10 inlet onto the end of the sample tube.Install the PM-10 inlet onto the end of the samp le tube.Install the PM-10 inlet onto the end of the sample tube.Install the PM-1 0 inlet onto the end of the sample tube. 17 1717171717) ))))) Remove the filter cassette from the sampler. Remove the filter cassette from the sampler.Remove the filter cassette from the sampler.Remove the filter cassette from the sampler.Remove the filter cassette f rom the sampler.Remove the filter cassette from the sampler. 18 1818181818) ))))) Remove the leak check disk from the filter cassette. Remove the leak check disk from the filter cassette.Remove the leak check disk f rom the filter cassette.Remove the leak check disk from the filter cassette.Remo ve the leak check disk from the filter cassette.Remove the leak check disk from the filter cassette. SECTION 10: ROUTINE MAINTENANCE AND VERIFICATION PROCEDURES PAGE 10-14

Revision B.001 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler Section 1 Section 1Section 1Section 1Section 1Section 11: 1:1:1:1:1: Calibration Procedures Calibration ProceduresCalibration ProceduresCalibration ProceduresCalibration Pr oceduresCalibration Procedures This section contains instructions for performing an interface board, ambient te mperature, filter temperature, ambient pressure, and flow calibration of the Partisol-FRM Sampler. The temperature and pressure calibrations must be done before the flow calibration. R&P recommends that these procedures be executed on an annual basis. Individual monitoring organizations, however, may have different guidelines. 11.1. 11.1.11.1.11.1.11.1.11.1. I IIIIINTERFACE NTERFACENTERFACENTERFACENTERFACENTERFACE B BBBBBOARD OARDOARDOARDOARDOARD C CCCCCALIBRATION ALIBRATIONALIBRATIONALIBRATIONALIBRATIONALIBRATION IMPORTANT: IMPORTANT:IMPORTANT:IMPORTANT:IMPORTANT:IMPORTANT: Use proper anti-static protec tion when the door to the electronics compartment is open and when taking measurements on any electronic components. Failure to use anti-static protection could result in damage to electronic components. Follow these steps to calibrate the interface board: Follow these steps to calibrate the interface board:Follow these steps to calibr ate the interface board:Follow these steps to calibrate the interface board:Foll ow these steps to calibrate the interface board:Follow these steps to calibrate the interface board: 1) 1)1)1)1)1) Locate the interface board on the bottom panel of the sampler s Locate the interface board on the bottom panel of the sampler sLocate the interfac e board on the bottom panel of the sampler sLocate the interface board on the bott om panel of the sampler sLocate the interface board on the bottom panel of the sam pler sLocate the interface board on the bottom panel of the sampler s electronics compartment (Figure 11-1). electronics compartment (Figure 11-1).electronics compartment (Figure 11-1).elec tronics compartment (Figure 11-1).electronics compartment (Figure 11-1).electron ics compartment (Figure 11-1). Figure 11-1. Location of interface board (A) inside the electronics compartment.

SECTION 11: CALIBRATION PROCEDURES PAGE 11-1

Revision B.001 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler 2 22222) ))))) Locate the test point labeled +6V in the front section of the Locate the test point labeled +6V in the front section of theLocate the test point labeled +6V in the front section of theLocate the test point labeled +6V in the fro nt section of theLocate the test point labeled +6V in the front section of theLoca te the test point labeled +6V in the front section of the interface board (Figure 11-2), and the +2.5V and +10V test interface board (Figure 11-2), and the +2.5V and +10V testinterface board (Figure 11 -2), and the +2.5V and +10V testinterface board (Figure 11-2), and the +2.5V and +10V stinterface board (Figure 11-2), and the +2.5V and +10V testinterface board (Figure 11-2), and the +2.5V and +10V test point in the back part. All three test points are red. point in the back part. All three test points are red.point in the back part. Al l three test points are red.point in the back part. All three test points are re d.point in the back part. All three test points are red.point in the back part. All three test points are red. Figure 11-1. Interface board layout. 3 33333) ))))) Locate the black ground test point labeled GND in the front Locate the black ground test point labeled GND in the frontLocate the black ground test point labeled GND in the frontLocate the black ground test point labeled GND n the frontLocate the black ground test point labeled GND in the frontLocate the b lack ground test point labeled GND in the front portion of the interface board. portion of the interface board.portion of the interface board.portion of the int erface board.portion of the interface board.portion of the interface board. SECTION 11: CALIBRATION PROCEDURES PAGE 11-2

Revision B.001 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler 4 44444) ))))) Ensure that the sampler is turned on and that the display backEnsure that the sampler is turned on and that the display back-Ensure that the s ampler is turned on and that the display back-Ensure that the sampler is turned on and that the display back-Ensure that the sampler is turned on and that the d isplay back-Ensure that the sampler is turned on and that the display backlight is on. The backlight light is on. The backlightlight is on. The backlightlight is on. The backlightli ght is on. The backlightlight is on. The backlight must mustmustmustmustmust be on during the +6 V calibration. be on during the +6 V calibration.be on during the +6 V calibration.be on during the +6 V calibration.be on during the +6 V calibration.be on during the +6 V ca libration. If the backlight is off, press any key on the keypad to turn it on. If the backlight is off, press any key on the keypad to turn it on.If the backli ght is off, press any key on the keypad to turn it on.If the backlight is off, p ress any key on the keypad to turn it on.If the backlight is off, press any key on the keypad to turn it on.If the backlight is off, press any key on the keypad to turn it on. 5 55555) ))))) Place the positive lead of a multimeter on the +6 V test point. Place the positive lead of a multimeter on the +6 V test point.Place the positiv e lead of a multimeter on the +6 V test point.Place the positive lead of a multi meter on the +6 V test point.Place the positive lead of a multimeter on the +6 V test point.Place the positive lead of a multimeter on the +6 V test point. 6 66666) ))))) Place the ground lead on the ground test point. Place the ground lead on the ground test point.Place the ground lead on the grou nd test point.Place the ground lead on the ground test point.Place the ground le ad on the ground test point.Place the ground lead on the ground test point. 7 77777) ))))) Locate R21 on the rear section of the interface board. R21 is a Locate R21 on the rear section of the interface board. R21 is aLocate R21 on the rear section of the interface board. R21 is aLocate R21 on the rear section of the interface board. R21 is aLocate R21 on the rear section of the interface boa rd. R21 is aLocate R21 on the rear section of the interface board. R21 is a horizontal pot, and its designation R21 is silk-screened on the horizontal pot, and its designation R21 is silk-screened on thehorizontal pot, and its designation R21 is silk-screened on thehorizontal pot, and its designation R21 is silk-screened on thehorizontal pot, and its designation R21 is silk-screened on thehorizontal pot, and its designation R21 is silk-screened on the board. board.board.board.board.board. 8 88888) ))))) Adjust R21 until the multimeter reads 6.00 VDC 0.05 V.

Adjust R21 until the multimeter reads 6.00 VDC 0.05 V.Adjust R21 until the multi meter reads 6.00 VDC 0.05 V.Adjust R21 until the multimeter reads 6.00 VDC 0.05 V.Adjust R21 until the multimeter reads 6.00 VDC 0.05 V.Adjust R21 until the mul timeter reads 6.00 VDC 0.05 V. 9 99999) ))))) Place the positive lead on the +2.5V test point. Place the positive lead on the +2.5V test point.Place the positive lead on the + 2.5V test point.Place the positive lead on the +2.5V test point.Place the positi ve lead on the +2.5V test point.Place the positive lead on the +2.5V test point. 10 1010101010) ))))) Locate R53 on the rear section of the interface board. R53 is a Locate R53 on the rear section of the interface board. R53 is aLocate R53 on the rear section of the interface board. R53 is aLocate R53 on the rear section of the interface board. R53 is aLocate R53 on the rear section of the interface boa rd. R53 is aLocate R53 on the rear section of the interface board. R53 is a blue vertical pot, and its R53 designation is silkscreened on the blue vertical pot, and its R53 designation is silkscreened on theblue vertical p ot, and its R53 designation is silkscreened on theblue vertical pot, and its R53 designation is silkscreened on theblue vertical pot, and its R53 designation is silkscreened on theblue vertical pot, and its R53 designation is silkscreened o n the board. board.board.board.board.board. 11) 11)11)11)11)11) Adjust R53 until the multimeter reads 2.500 VDC 0.002 V Adjust R53 until the multimeter reads 2.500 VDC 0.002 VAdjust R53 until the mult imeter reads 2.500 VDC 0.002 VAdjust R53 until the multimeter reads 2.500 VDC 0. 002 VAdjust R53 until the multimeter reads 2.500 VDC 0.002 VAdjust R53 until the multimeter reads 2.500 VDC 0.002 V 12) 12)12)12)12)12) Place the positive lead of the multimeter on the +10 V test poin t. Place the positive lead of the multimeter on the +10 V test point.Place the posi tive lead of the multimeter on the +10 V test point.Place the positive lead of t he multimeter on the +10 V test point.Place the positive lead of the multimeter on the +10 V test point.Place the positive lead of the multimeter on the +10 V t est point. 13) 13)13)13)13)13) Locate R44 on the rear section of the interface board. Locate R44 on the rear section of the interface board.Locate R44 on the rear sec tion of the interface board.Locate R44 on the rear section of the interface boar d.Locate R44 on the rear section of the interface board.Locate R44 on the rear s ection of the interface board. R44 is a R44 is aR44 is aR44 is aR44 is aR44 is a blue vertical pot, and its designation R44 is silk-screened on blue vertical pot, and its designation R44 is silk-screened onblue vertical pot, a nd its designation R44 is silk-screened onblue vertical pot, and its designation R4 4 is silk-screened onblue vertical pot, and its designation R44 is silk-screened on blue vertical pot, and its designation R44 is silk-screened on the board. the board.the board.the board.the board.the board.

14) 14)14)14)14)14) Adjust R44 until the multimeter reads 10.000 VDC 0.002 V. Adjust R44 until the multimeter reads 10.000 VDC 0.002 V.Adjust R44 until the mu ltimeter reads 10.000 VDC 0.002 V.Adjust R44 until the multimeter reads 10.000 V DC 0.002 V.Adjust R44 until the multimeter reads 10.000 VDC 0.002 V.Adjust R44 u ntil the multimeter reads 10.000 VDC 0.002 V. SECTION 11: CALIBRATION PROCEDURES PAGE 11-3

Revision B.001 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler 11.2. 11.2.11.2.11.2.11.2.11.2. A AAAAANALOG NALOGNALOGNALOGNALOGNALOG I IIIIINPUT NPUTNPUTNPUTNPUTNPUT C CCCCCALIBRATION ALIBRATIONALIBRATIONALIBRATIONALIBRATIONALIBRATION Please note that the following procedure must be performed after the interface b oard calibration and before the temperature, pressure and flow calibrations. IMPORTANT: IMPORTANT:IMPORTANT:IMPORTANT:IMPORTANT:IMPORTANT: Use proper anti-static protec tion when the door to the electronics compartment is open and when taking measurements on any electronic components. Failure to use anti-static protection could result in damage to electronic components. Follow these steps to perform an analog input calibration: Follow these steps to perform an analog input calibration:Follow these steps to perform an analog input calibration:Follow these steps to perform an analog inpu t calibration:Follow these steps to perform an analog input calibration:Follow t hese steps to perform an analog input calibration: 1) 1)1)1)1)1) Return the sampler to the Main screen (Section 4.3). Return the sampler to the Main screen (Section 4.3).Return the sampler to the Ma in screen (Section 4.3).Return the sampler to the Main screen (Section 4.3).Retu rn the sampler to the Main screen (Section 4.3).Return the sampler to the Main s creen (Section 4.3). 2) 2)2)2)2)2) The device must be in the Stop Operating Mode (Section 5.3) to The device must be in the Stop Operating Mode (Section 5.3) toThe device must be in the Stop Operating Mode (Section 5.3) toThe device must be in the Stop Opera ting Mode (Section 5.3) toThe device must be in the Stop Operating Mode (Section 5.3) toThe device must be in the Stop Operating Mode (Section 5.3) to perform an analog input calibration. perform an analog input calibration.perform an analog input calibration.perform an analog input calibration.perform an analog input calibration.perform an analo g input calibration. 3) 3)3)3)3)3) When in the Main screen, press <F5: Setup> and then <F2: Calib> When in the Main screen, press <F5: Setup> and then <F2: Calib>When in the Main screen, press <F5: Setup> and then <F2: Calib>When in the Main screen, press <F5 : Setup> and then <F2: Calib>When in the Main screen, press <F5: Setup> and then <F2: Calib>When in the Main screen, press <F5: Setup> and then <F2: Calib> to display the Calibration screen (Figure 11-3). to display the Calibration screen (Figure 11-3).to display the Calibration scree n (Figure 11-3).to display the Calibration screen (Figure 11-3).to display the C alibration screen (Figure 11-3).to display the Calibration screen (Figure 11-3).

Figure 11-4. Calibration screen. Stat:Ok Calibration Mode:SAMP Calc Act Offset Span A/I: 0.000 0.000 0.0000 1.0000 A/O:0.00 AmbT: 23.2 0.0 0.0000 FltT: 23.6 0.0 0.0000 FTS Pres: Pres: 760 0 0.0000 0.00 Flow: 16.7 0.0 0.0000 1.0000 Edit FlowCal > Function Keys in Browse Mode Edit FlowCal > Edit Flow DecFlow HldFlow IncFlow < Function Keys in Edit Mode --+ ++ Bksp > +/< SECTION 11: CALIBRATION PROCEDURES PAGE 11-4

Revision B.001 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler 4) 4)4)4)4)4) Locate connector P18 in the back section of the interface board. Locate connector P18 in the back section of the interface board.Locate connector P18 in the back section of the interface board.Locate connector P18 in the back section of the interface board.Locate connector P18 in the back section of the interface board.Locate connector P18 in the back section of the interface board. Unplug the cable connected to P18. Unplug the cable connected to P18.Unplug the cable connected to P18.Unplug the c able connected to P18.Unplug the cable connected to P18.Unplug the cable connect ed to P18. 5) 5)5)5)5)5) Plug the analog input calibration cable into P18. Plug the analog input calibration cable into P18.Plug the analog input calibrati on cable into P18.Plug the analog input calibration cable into P18.Plug the anal og input calibration cable into P18.Plug the analog input calibration cable into P18. 6) 6)6)6)6)6) Attach the positive lead from a multimeter with four-digit resoluAttach the positive lead from a multimeter with four-digit resolu-Attach the pos itive lead from a multimeter with four-digit resolu-Attach the positive lead fro m a multimeter with four-digit resolu-Attach the positive lead from a multimeter with four-digit resolu-Attach the positive lead from a multimeter with four-dig it resolution to the green test point labeled PWM1 on the interface tion to the green test point labeled PWM1 on the interfacetion to the green test p oint labeled PWM1 on the interfacetion to the green test point labeled PWM1 on the i nterfacetion to the green test point labeled PWM1 on the interfacetion to the gree n test point labeled PWM1 on the interface board. Attach the ground lead to the ground test point (Figure 11board. Attach the ground lead to the ground test point (Figure 11-board. Attach the ground lead to the ground test point (Figure 11-board. Attach the ground lea d to the ground test point (Figure 11-board. Attach the ground lead to the groun d test point (Figure 11-board. Attach the ground lead to the ground test point ( Figure 114). 4).4).4).4).4). Figure 11-4. Lead locations on the interface board. Placement of positive lead for analog input calibration test point PWM1. Position of ground lead for analog input calibration. 7) 7)7)7)7)7) When in the Calibration screen, press the arrow key to position When in the Calibration screen, press the arrow key to positionWhen in the Calib ration screen, press the arrow key to positionWhen in the Calibration screen, pr ess the arrow key to positionWhen in the Calibration screen, press the arrow key to positionWhen in the Calibration screen, press the arrow key to position the cursor so that it is in the A/O field.

the cursor so that it is in the A/O the cursor so that it is in the A/O the cursor so that it is in the A/O

field.the cursor so that it is in the field.the cursor so that it is in the field.

A/O A/O

field. field.

SECTION 11: CALIBRATION PROCEDURES PAGE 11-5

Revision B.001 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler

8) 8)8)8)8)8) Press <F1: Edit> to enter the Edit Mode. Enter a number between Press <F1: Edit> to enter the Edit Mode. Enter a number betweenPress <F1: Edit> to enter the Edit Mode. Enter a number betweenPress <F1: Edit> to enter the Edit Mode. Enter a number betweenPress <F1: Edit> to enter the Edit Mode. Enter a nu mber betweenPress <F1: Edit> to enter the Edit Mode. Enter a number between 0.050 and 0.150 volts and press the <ENTER> key. 0.050 and 0.150 volts and press the <ENTER> key. 0.050 and 0.150 volts and press the < ER> key. 0.050 and 0.150 volts and press the <ENTER> key. 0.050 and 0.150 volts and pre the <ENTER> key. 0.050 and 0.150 volts and press the <ENTER> key.

9) 9)9)9)9)9) Watch the value displayed in the row labeled A/I, under the Watch the value displayed in the row labeled A/I, under theWatch the value display ed in the row labeled A/I, under theWatch the value displayed in the row labeled A/ I, under theWatch the value displayed in the row labeled A/I, under theWatch the va lue displayed in the row labeled A/I, under the column labeled Calc. Ensure that this value does not vary by column labeled Calc. Ensure that this value does not vary bycolumn labeled Calc. Ens ure that this value does not vary bycolumn labeled Calc. Ensure that this value do es not vary bycolumn labeled Calc. Ensure that this value does not vary bycolumn l abeled Calc. Ensure that this value does not vary by more than 0.005 volts after watching it for 5 seconds. If this more than 0.005 volts after watching it for 5 seconds. If thismore than 0.005 volt s after watching it for 5 seconds. If thismore than 0.005 volts after watching it for 5 seconds. If thismore than 0.005 volts after watching it for 5 seconds. If thismore than 0.005 volts after watching it for 5 seconds. If this number is not stable, choose a new number for A/O between number is not stable, choose a new number for A/O betweennumber is not stable, cho ose a new number for A/O betweennumber is not stable, choose a new number for A/O be tweennumber is not stable, choose a new number for A/O betweennumber is not stable , choose a new number for A/O between 0.050 and 0.150 volts. 0.050 and 0.150 volts. 0.050 and 0.150 volts. 0.050 and 0.150 volts. 0.050 and 0. .150 volts. 10) 10)10)10)10)10) Read the voltage displayed on the multimeter. Read the voltage displayed on the multimeter.Read the voltage displayed on the m ultimeter.Read the voltage displayed on the multimeter.Read the voltage displaye d on the multimeter.Read the voltage displayed on the multimeter.

11) 11)11)11)11)11) Using the arrow keys, position the cursor so that it is in the r ow Using the arrow keys, position the cursor so that it is in the rowUsing the arro w keys, position the cursor so that it is in the rowUsing the arrow keys, positi on the cursor so that it is in the rowUsing the arrow keys, position the cursor so that it is in the rowUsing the arrow keys, position the cursor so that it is in the row labeled A/I under the column labeled Act. labeled A/I under the column labeled Act. labeled A/I under the column labeled Act. lab d A/I under the column labeled Act. labeled A/I under the column labeled Act. labeled der the column labeled Act.

12) 12)12)12)12)12) Press PressPressPressPressPress <F1: Edit> <F1: Edit><F1: Edit><F1: Edit><F1: Edit><F1: Edit> to enter the Edit Mode. Enter the voltage reading to enter the Edit Mode. Enter the voltage readingto enter the Edit Mode. Enter t he voltage readingto enter the Edit Mode. Enter the voltage readingto enter the Edit Mode. Enter the voltage readingto enter the Edit Mode. Enter the voltage re ading from the multimeter (to three digit accuracy, i.e., 0.xxx) in this from the multimeter (to three digit accuracy, i.e., 0.xxx) in thisfrom the multi meter (to three digit accuracy, i.e., 0.xxx) in thisfrom the multimeter (to thre e digit accuracy, i.e., 0.xxx) in thisfrom the multimeter (to three digit accura cy, i.e., 0.xxx) in thisfrom the multimeter (to three digit accuracy, i.e., 0.xx x) in this position and press the <ENTER> key. The unit will now calculate position and press the <ENTER> key. The unit will now calculateposition and pres s the <ENTER> key. The unit will now calculateposition and press the <ENTER> key . The unit will now calculateposition and press the <ENTER> key. The unit will n ow calculateposition and press the <ENTER> key. The unit will now calculate the Offset value. the Offset value.the Offset value.the Offset value.the Offset value.the Offset valu 13) 13)13)13)13)13) Ensure that the value now displayed in the row labeled A/I Ensure that the value now displayed in the row labeled A/I Ensure that the value no w displayed in the row labeled A/I Ensure that the value now displayed in the row l abeled A/I Ensure that the value now displayed in the row labeled A/I Ensure that the value now displayed in the row labeled A/I under the column labeled Calc matches the value displayed on under the column labeled Calc matches the value displayed onunder the column label ed Calc matches the value displayed onunder the column labeled Calc matches the valu e displayed onunder the column labeled Calc matches the value displayed onunder th e column labeled Calc matches the value displayed on the multimeter, within 0.005 volts. the multimeter, within 0.005 volts.the multimeter, within 0.005 volts.the multimet er, within 0.005 volts.the multimeter, within 0.005 volts.the multimeter, within 0. 005 volts. 14) 14)14)14)14)14) Using the arrow key, position the cursor so that it is in the A/O Using the arrow key, position the cursor so that it is in the A/O Using the arrow k ey, position the cursor so that it is in the A/O Using the arrow key, position the cursor so that it is in the A/O Using the arrow key, position the cursor so that it is in the A/O Using the arrow key, position the cursor so that it is in the A/O field. field.field.field.field.field.

15) 15)15)15)15)15) Press <F1: Edit> to enter the Edit Mode. Enter a number between Press <F1: Edit> to enter the Edit Mode. Enter a number betweenPress <F1: Edit> to enter the Edit Mode. Enter a number betweenPress <F1: Edit> to enter the Edit Mode. Enter a number betweenPress <F1: Edit> to enter the Edit Mode. Enter a nu mber betweenPress <F1: Edit> to enter the Edit Mode. Enter a number between 4.800 and 4.900 volts and press the <ENTER> key. 4.800 and 4.900 volts and press the <ENTER> key. 4.800 and 4.900 volts and press the < ER> key. 4.800 and 4.900 volts and press the <ENTER> key. 4.800 and 4.900 volts and pre the <ENTER> key. 4.800 and 4.900 volts and press the <ENTER> key. 16)

16)16)16)16)16) Observe the value displayed in the row labeled A/I under the Observe the value displayed in the row labeled A/I under theObserve the value disp layed in the row labeled A/I under theObserve the value displayed in the row label ed A/I under theObserve the value displayed in the row labeled A/I under theObserve the value displayed in the row labeled A/I under the column labeled Calc. Ensure that this value does not vary by column labeled Calc. Ensure that this value does not vary bycolumn labeled Calc. Ens ure that this value does not vary bycolumn labeled Calc. Ensure that this value do es not vary bycolumn labeled Calc. Ensure that this value does not vary bycolumn l abeled Calc. Ensure that this value does not vary by more than 0.005 volts after watching it for 5 seconds. If this more than 0.005 volts after watching it for 5 seconds. If thismore than 0.005 volt s after watching it for 5 seconds. If thismore than 0.005 volts after watching it for 5 seconds. If thismore than 0.005 volts after watching it for 5 seconds. If thismore than 0.005 volts after watching it for 5 seconds. If this number is not stable, choose a new number for A/O between number is not stable, choose a new number for A/O betweennumber is not stable, cho ose a new number for A/O betweennumber is not stable, choose a new number for A/O be tweennumber is not stable, choose a new number for A/O betweennumber is not stable , choose a new number for A/O between 4.800 and 4.900 volts. 4.800 and 4.900 volts. 4.800 and 4.900 volts. 4.800 and 4.900 volts. 4.800 and 4. .900 volts. 17) 17)17)17)17)17) Read the voltage displayed on the multimeter. Read the voltage displayed on the multimeter.Read the voltage displayed on the m ultimeter.Read the voltage displayed on the multimeter.Read the voltage displaye d on the multimeter.Read the voltage displayed on the multimeter.

18) 18)18)18)18)18) Using the arrow keys, position the cursor so that it is in the r ow Using the arrow keys, position the cursor so that it is in the rowUsing the arro w keys, position the cursor so that it is in the rowUsing the arrow keys, positi on the cursor so that it is in the rowUsing the arrow keys, position the cursor so that it is in the rowUsing the arrow keys, position the cursor so that it is in the row labeled A/I under the column labeled Act. labeled A/I under the column labeled Act. labeled A/I under the column labeled Act. lab d A/I under the column labeled Act. labeled A/I under the column labeled Act. labeled der the column labeled Act. 19) 19)19)19)19)19) Press <F1: Edit> to enter the Edit Mode. Enter the voltage readi ng Press <F1: Edit> to enter the Edit Mode. Enter the voltage readingPress <F1: Edi t> to enter the Edit Mode. Enter the voltage readingPress <F1: Edit> to enter th e Edit Mode. Enter the voltage readingPress <F1: Edit> to enter the Edit Mode. E nter the voltage readingPress <F1: Edit> to enter the Edit Mode. Enter the volta ge reading from the multimeter (to three digit accuracy, i.e., 0.xxx) in this from the multimeter (to three digit accuracy, i.e., 0.xxx) in thisfrom the multi meter (to three digit accuracy, i.e., 0.xxx) in thisfrom the multimeter (to thre e digit accuracy, i.e., 0.xxx) in thisfrom the multimeter (to three digit accura cy, i.e., 0.xxx) in thisfrom the multimeter (to three digit accuracy, i.e., 0.xx x) in this position and press the <ENTER> key. The unit will now calculate position and press the <ENTER> key. The unit will now calculateposition and pres s the <ENTER> key. The unit will now calculateposition and press the <ENTER> key

. The unit will now calculateposition and press the <ENTER> key. The unit will n ow calculateposition and press the <ENTER> key. The unit will now calculate the Span value. the Span value.the Span value.the Span value.the Span value.the Span value. 20) 20)20)20)20)20) Ensure that the value now displayed in the row labeled A/I Ensure that the value now displayed in the row labeled A/I Ensure that the value no w displayed in the row labeled A/I Ensure that the value now displayed in the row l abeled A/I Ensure that the value now displayed in the row labeled A/I Ensure that the value now displayed in the row labeled A/I under the column labeled Calc matches the value displayed on under the column labeled Calc matches the value displayed onunder the column label ed Calc matches the value displayed onunder the column labeled Calc matches the valu e displayed onunder the column labeled Calc matches the value displayed onunder th e column labeled Calc matches the value displayed on the multimeter within 0.005 volts. the multimeter within 0.005 volts.the multimeter within 0.005 volts.the multimeter within 0.005 volts.the multimeter within 0.005 volts.the multimeter within 0.005 v olts. SECTION 11: CALIBRATION PROCEDURES PAGE 11-6

Revision B.001 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler 21) 21)21)21)21)21) Remove the multimeter leads from the interface board, and the Remove the multimeter leads from the interface board, and theRemove the multimet er leads from the interface board, and theRemove the multimeter leads from the i nterface board, and theRemove the multimeter leads from the interface board, and theRemove the multimeter leads from the interface board, and the analog input calibration cable from the back of the electronics analog input calibration cable from the back of the electronicsanalog input cali bration cable from the back of the electronicsanalog input calibration cable fro m the back of the electronicsanalog input calibration cable from the back of the electronicsanalog input calibration cable from the back of the electronics compartment. compartment.compartment.compartment.compartment.compartment. 22) 22)22)22)22)22) After the user has performed the analog input calibration, they After the user has performed the analog input calibration, theyAfter the user ha s performed the analog input calibration, theyAfter the user has performed the a nalog input calibration, theyAfter the user has performed the analog input calib ration, theyAfter the user has performed the analog input calibration, they must now perform the temperature, pressure and flow calibramust now perform the temperature, pressure and flow calibra-must now perform the temperature, pressure and flow calibra-must now perform the temperature, pressu re and flow calibra-must now perform the temperature, pressure and flow calibramust now perform the temperature, pressure and flow calibrations. tions.tions.tions.tions.tions. NOTE: If the instrument has been reset and you have recorded the Offset and Span values for the flow, you may enter these numbers directly when in the Edit Mode. SECTION 11: CALIBRATION PROCEDURES PAGE 11-7

Revision B.001 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler 11.3. 11.3.11.3.11.3.11.3.11.3. A AAAAAMBIENT MBIENTMBIENTMBIENTMBIENTMBIENT T TTTTTEMPERATURE EMPERATUREEMPERATUREEMPERATUREEMPERATUREEMPERATURE C CCCCCALIBRATION ALIBRATIONALIBRATIONALIBRATIONALIBRATIONALIBRATION Follow these steps to calibrate the ambient temperature sensor: Follow these steps to calibrate the ambient temperature sensor:Follow these step s to calibrate the ambient temperature sensor:Follow these steps to calibrate th e ambient temperature sensor:Follow these steps to calibrate the ambient tempera ture sensor:Follow these steps to calibrate the ambient temperature sensor: NOTE: Refer to the U.S. EPA 2.12 Quality Assurance Handbook, Section 6. 1) 1)1)1)1)1) Return the sampler to the Main screen (Section 4.3). Return the sampler to the Main screen (Section 4.3).Return the sampler to the Ma in screen (Section 4.3).Return the sampler to the Main screen (Section 4.3).Retu rn the sampler to the Main screen (Section 4.3).Return the sampler to the Main s creen (Section 4.3). 2) 2)2)2)2)2) The device must be in the Stop Operating Mode (Section 5.3) to The device must be in the Stop Operating Mode (Section 5.3) toThe device must be in the Stop Operating Mode (Section 5.3) toThe device must be in the Stop Opera ting Mode (Section 5.3) toThe device must be in the Stop Operating Mode (Section 5.3) toThe device must be in the Stop Operating Mode (Section 5.3) to perform an ambient temperature calibration. perform an ambient temperature calibration.perform an ambient temperature calibr ation.perform an ambient temperature calibration.perform an ambient temperature calibration.perform an ambient temperature calibration. 3) 3)3)3)3)3) When in the Main screen, press <F5: Setup> and <F2: Calib> to When in the Main screen, press <F5: Setup> and <F2: Calib> toWhen in the Main sc reen, press <F5: Setup> and <F2: Calib> toWhen in the Main screen, press <F5: Se tup> and <F2: Calib> toWhen in the Main screen, press <F5: Setup> and <F2: Calib > toWhen in the Main screen, press <F5: Setup> and <F2: Calib> to display the Calibration screen (Figure 11-3). display the Calibration screen (Figure 11-3).display the Calibration screen (Fig ure 11-3).display the Calibration screen (Figure 11-3).display the Calibration s creen (Figure 11-3).display the Calibration screen (Figure 11-3). 4) 4)4)4)4)4) Determine the current temperature (C) at the ambient temperaDetermine the current temperature (C) at the ambient tempera-Determine the curren t temperature (C) at the ambient tempera-Determine the current temperature (C) at the ambient tempera-Determine the current temperature (C) at the ambient temperaDetermine the current temperature (C) at the ambient temperature sensor using an external thermometer, [C = 5/9 x (F - 32)]. ture sensor using an external thermometer, [C = 5/9 x (F - 32)].ture sensor using an external thermometer, [C = 5/9 x (F - 32)].ture sensor using an external thermo meter, [C = 5/9 x (F - 32)].ture sensor using an external thermometer, [C = 5/9 x (F

- 32)].ture sensor using an external thermometer, [C = 5/9 x (F - 32)]. 5) 5)5)5)5)5) Press <F1: Edit> to enter the Edit Mode, and move the cursor to Press <F1: Edit> to enter the Edit Mode, and move the cursor toPress <F1: Edit> to enter the Edit Mode, and move the cursor toPress <F1: Edit> to enter the Edit Mode, and move the cursor toPress <F1: Edit> to enter the Edit Mode, and move t he cursor toPress <F1: Edit> to enter the Edit Mode, and move the cursor to the row labeled AmbT under the Act (actual) column. the row labeled AmbT under the Act (actual) column.the row labeled AmbT under the Act ctual) column.the row labeled AmbT under the Act (actual) column.the row labeled AmbT under the Act (actual) column.the row labeled AmbT under the Act (actual) column. 6) 6)6)6)6)6) Enter the current ambient temperature (C) and press the <ENEnter the current ambient temperature (C) and press the <EN-Enter the current amb ient temperature (C) and press the <EN-Enter the current ambient temperature (C) a nd press the <EN-Enter the current ambient temperature (C) and press the <EN-Ente r the current ambient temperature (C) and press the <ENTER> key. If necessary, use the <F6: +/-> key (Shift F1>) to enter TER> key. If necessary, use the <F6: +/-> key (Shift F1>) to enterTER> key. If n ecessary, use the <F6: +/-> key (Shift F1>) to enterTER> key. If necessary, use the <F6: +/-> key (Shift F1>) to enterTER> key. If necessary, use the <F6: +/-> key (Shift F1>) to enterTER> key. If necessary, use the <F6: +/-> key (Shift F1> ) to enter negative temperatures when in the Edit Mode. negative temperatures when in the Edit Mode.negative temperatures when in the Ed it Mode.negative temperatures when in the Edit Mode.negative temperatures when i n the Edit Mode.negative temperatures when in the Edit Mode. 7) 7)7)7)7)7) Upon receiving the actual temperature, the system s microprocesUpon receiving the actual temperature, the system s microproces-Upon receiving the actual temperature, the system s microproces-Upon receiving the actual temperatur e, the system s microproces-Upon receiving the actual temperature, the system s micr oproces-Upon receiving the actual temperature, the system s microprocessor automatically computes the Span value for the ambient sor automatically computes the Span value for the ambientsor automatically compute s the Span value for the ambientsor automatically computes the Span value for the am bientsor automatically computes the Span value for the ambientsor automatically co mputes the Span value for the ambient temperature. Record this value for future reference. temperature. Record this value for future reference.temperature. Record this val ue for future reference.temperature. Record this value for future reference.temp erature. Record this value for future reference.temperature. Record this value f or future reference. NOTE: If the instrument has been reset and you have recorded the Span value for the ambient temperature, you may enter it directly in the Span column when in the Edit Mode. SECTION 11: CALIBRATION PROCEDURES PAGE 11-8

Revision B.001 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler 11.4. 11.4.11.4.11.4.11.4.11.4. F FFFFFILTER ILTERILTERILTERILTERILTER T TTTTTEMPERATURE EMPERATUREEMPERATUREEMPERATUREEMPERATUREEMPERATURE C CCCCCALIBRATION ALIBRATIONALIBRATIONALIBRATIONALIBRATIONALIBRATION Follow these steps to calibrate the filter temperature: Follow these steps to calibrate the filter temperature:Follow these steps to cal ibrate the filter temperature:Follow these steps to calibrate the filter tempera ture:Follow these steps to calibrate the filter temperature:Follow these steps t o calibrate the filter temperature: NOTE: Refer to the U.S. EPA 2.12 Quality Assurance Handbook, Section 6. 1) 1)1)1)1)1) Return the sampler to the Main screen (Section 4.3). Return the sampler to the Main screen (Section 4.3).Return the sampler to the Ma in screen (Section 4.3).Return the sampler to the Main screen (Section 4.3).Retu rn the sampler to the Main screen (Section 4.3).Return the sampler to the Main s creen (Section 4.3). 2) 2)2)2)2)2) The device must be in the Stop Operating Mode (Section 5.3) to The device must be in the Stop Operating Mode (Section 5.3) toThe device must be in the Stop Operating Mode (Section 5.3) toThe device must be in the Stop Opera ting Mode (Section 5.3) toThe device must be in the Stop Operating Mode (Section 5.3) toThe device must be in the Stop Operating Mode (Section 5.3) to perform a filter temperature calibration. perform a filter temperature calibration.perform a filter temperature calibratio n.perform a filter temperature calibration.perform a filter temperature calibrat ion.perform a filter temperature calibration. 3) 3)3)3)3)3) When in the Main screen, press <F5: Setup> and <F2: Calib> to When in the Main screen, press <F5: Setup> and <F2: Calib> toWhen in the Main sc reen, press <F5: Setup> and <F2: Calib> toWhen in the Main screen, press <F5: Se tup> and <F2: Calib> toWhen in the Main screen, press <F5: Setup> and <F2: Calib > toWhen in the Main screen, press <F5: Setup> and <F2: Calib> to display the Calibration screen (Figure 11-3). display the Calibration screen (Figure 11-3).display the Calibration screen (Fig ure 11-3).display the Calibration screen (Figure 11-3).display the Calibration s creen (Figure 11-3).display the Calibration screen (Figure 11-3). 4) 4)4)4)4)4) Determine the current temperature (C) at the location of the Determine the current temperature (C) at the location of theDetermine the current temperature (C) at the location of theDetermine the current temperature (C) at th e location of theDetermine the current temperature (C) at the location of theDete rmine the current temperature (C) at the location of the sample filter in the Partisol-FRM Sampler using an external sample filter in the Partisol-FRM Sampler using an externalsample filter in the Partisol-FRM Sampler using an externalsample filter in the Partisol-FRM Sampler using an externalsample filter in the Partisol-FRM Sampler using an externalsamp

le filter in thermometer, thermometer, 5/9 x (F -

the Partisol-FRM Sampler using an external [C = 5/9 x (F - 32)]. [C = 5/9 x (F - 32)].thermometer, [C = 5/9 x (F - 32)].thermometer, [C = 32)].thermometer, [C = 5/9 x (F - 32)].thermometer, [C = 5/9 x (F - 32)].

5) 5)5)5)5)5) Press <F1: Edit> to enter the Edit Mode, and move the cursor to Press <F1: Edit> to enter the Edit Mode, and move the cursor toPress <F1: Edit> to enter the Edit Mode, and move the cursor toPress <F1: Edit> to enter the Edit Mode, and move the cursor toPress <F1: Edit> to enter the Edit Mode, and move t he cursor toPress <F1: Edit> to enter the Edit Mode, and move the cursor to the row labeled FltT under the Act (actual) column. the row labeled FltT under the Act (actual) column.the row labeled FltT under the Act ctual) column.the row labeled FltT under the Act (actual) column.the row labeled FltT under the Act (actual) column.the row labeled FltT under the Act (actual) column. 6) 6)6)6)6)6) Enter the current filter temperature (C) and press the <ENTER> Enter the current filter temperature (C) and press the <ENTER>Enter the current f ilter temperature (C) and press the <ENTER>Enter the current filter temperature (C ) and press the <ENTER>Enter the current filter temperature (C) and press the <EN TER>Enter the current filter temperature (C) and press the <ENTER> key. If necessary, use the <F6: +/-> key to enter negative temperakey. If necessary, use the <F6: +/-> key to enter negative tempera-key. If neces sary, use the <F6: +/-> key to enter negative tempera-key. If necessary, use the <F6: +/-> key to enter negative tempera-key. If necessary, use the <F6: +/-> ke y to enter negative tempera-key. If necessary, use the <F6: +/-> key to enter ne gative temperatures when in the Edit Mode. tures when in the Edit Mode.tures when in the Edit Mode.tures when in the Edit M ode.tures when in the Edit Mode.tures when in the Edit Mode. 7) 7)7)7)7)7) Upon receiving the actual temperature, the system s microprocesUpon receiving the actual temperature, the system s microproces-Upon receiving the actual temperature, the system s microproces-Upon receiving the actual temperatur e, the system s microproces-Upon receiving the actual temperature, the system s micr oproces-Upon receiving the actual temperature, the system s microprocessor automatically computes the Span value for the filter sor automatically computes the Span value for the filtersor automatically computes the Span value for the filtersor automatically computes the Span value for the filt ersor automatically computes the Span value for the filtersor automatically comput es the Span value for the filter temperature. Record this value for future reference. temperature. Record this value for future reference.temperature. Record this val ue for future reference.temperature. Record this value for future reference.temp erature. Record this value for future reference.temperature. Record this value f or future reference. NOTE: If the instrument has been reset and you have recorded the Span value for the filter temperature, you may enter it directly in the Span column when in the Edit Mode. SECTION 11: CALIBRATION PROCEDURES PAGE 11-9

Revision B.001 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler 11.5. 11.5.11.5.11.5.11.5.11.5. A AAAAAMBIENT MBIENTMBIENTMBIENTMBIENTMBIENT P PPPPPRESSURE RESSURERESSURERESSURERESSURERESSURE C CCCCCALIBRATION ALIBRATIONALIBRATIONALIBRATIONALIBRATIONALIBRATION Follow these steps to calibrate the ambient pressure sensor: Follow these steps to calibrate the ambient pressure sensor:Follow these steps t o calibrate the ambient pressure sensor:Follow these steps to calibrate the ambi ent pressure sensor:Follow these steps to calibrate the ambient pressure sensor: Follow these steps to calibrate the ambient pressure sensor: NOTE: Refer to the U.S. EPA 2.12 Quality Assurance Handbook, Section 6. 1) 1)1)1)1)1) Return the sampler to the Main screen (Section 4.3). Return the sampler to the Main screen (Section 4.3).Return the sampler to the Ma in screen (Section 4.3).Return the sampler to the Main screen (Section 4.3).Retu rn the sampler to the Main screen (Section 4.3).Return the sampler to the Main s creen (Section 4.3). 2) 2)2)2)2)2) The device must be in the Stop Operating Mode (Section 5.3) to The device must be in the Stop Operating Mode (Section 5.3) toThe device must be in the Stop Operating Mode (Section 5.3) toThe device must be in the Stop Opera ting Mode (Section 5.3) toThe device must be in the Stop Operating Mode (Section 5.3) toThe device must be in the Stop Operating Mode (Section 5.3) to perform an ambient pressure calibration. perform an ambient pressure calibration.perform an ambient pressure calibration. perform an ambient pressure calibration.perform an ambient pressure calibration. perform an ambient pressure calibration. 3) 3)3)3)3)3) When in the Main screen, press <F5: Setup> and <F2: Calib> to When in the Main screen, press <F5: Setup> and <F2: Calib> toWhen in the Main sc reen, press <F5: Setup> and <F2: Calib> toWhen in the Main screen, press <F5: Se tup> and <F2: Calib> toWhen in the Main screen, press <F5: Setup> and <F2: Calib > toWhen in the Main screen, press <F5: Setup> and <F2: Calib> to display the Calibration screen (Figure 11-3). display the Calibration screen (Figure 11-3).display the Calibration screen (Fig ure 11-3).display the Calibration screen (Figure 11-3).display the Calibration s creen (Figure 11-3).display the Calibration screen (Figure 11-3). 4) 4)4)4)4)4) Determine the current ambient station pressure in mm Hg (absoDetermine the current ambient station pressure in mm Hg (abso-Determine the curr ent ambient station pressure in mm Hg (abso-Determine the current ambient statio n pressure in mm Hg (abso-Determine the current ambient station pressure in mm H g (abso-Determine the current ambient station pressure in mm Hg (absolute pressure, not corrected to sea level). lute pressure, not corrected to sea level).lute pressure, not corrected to sea l evel).lute pressure, not corrected to sea level).lute pressure, not corrected to sea level).lute pressure, not corrected to sea level).

To convert from Atmospheres @ 0 C to mm Hg, multiply by 760. To convert from millibars to mm Hg, multiply by 0.75012. To convert from inches Hg @ 32 F to mm Hg, multiply by 25.4. 5) 5)5)5)5)5) Press <F1: Edit> to enter the Edit Mode, and move the cursor to Press <F1: Edit> to enter the Edit Mode, and move the cursor toPress <F1: Edit> to enter the Edit Mode, and move the cursor toPress <F1: Edit> to enter the Edit Mode, and move the cursor toPress <F1: Edit> to enter the Edit Mode, and move t he cursor toPress <F1: Edit> to enter the Edit Mode, and move the cursor to the row labeled Pres under the Act (actual) column. the row labeled Pres under the Act (actual) column.the row labeled Pres under the Act ctual) column.the row labeled Pres under the Act (actual) column.the row labeled Pres under the Act (actual) column.the row labeled Pres under the Act (actual) column. 6) 6)6)6)6)6) Enter the current ambient pressure (mm Hg) and press the <ENEnter the current ambient pressure (mm Hg) and press the <EN-Enter the current a mbient pressure (mm Hg) and press the <EN-Enter the current ambient pressure (mm Hg) and press the <EN-Enter the current ambient pressure (mm Hg) and press the <EN-Enter the current ambient pressure (mm Hg) and press the <ENTER> key. TER> key.TER> key.TER> key.TER> key.TER> key. 7) 7)7)7)7)7) Upon receiving the actual pressure, the system s microprocessor Upon receiving the actual pressure, the system s microprocessorUpon receiving the actual pressure, the system s microprocessorUpon receiving the actual pressure, th e system s microprocessorUpon receiving the actual pressure, the system s microproce ssorUpon receiving the actual pressure, the system s microprocessor automatically computes the Span value for the ambient presautomatically computes the Span value for the ambient pres-automatically computes the Span value for the ambient pres-automatically computes the Span value for the am bient pres-automatically computes the Span value for the ambient pres-automaticall y computes the Span value for the ambient pressure. Record this value for future reference. sure. Record this value for future reference.sure. Record this value for future reference.sure. Record this value for future reference.sure. Record this value f or future reference.sure. Record this value for future reference. NOTE: If the instrument has been reset and you have recorded the Span value for the ambient pressure, you may enter it directly in the Span column when in the Edit Mode. SECTION 11: CALIBRATION PROCEDURES PAGE 11-10

Revision B.001 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler 11.6. 11.6.11.6.11.6.11.6.11.6. F FFFFFLOW LOWLOWLOWLOWLOW C CCCCCALIBRATION ALIBRATIONALIBRATIONALIBRATIONALIBRATIONALIBRATION The temperature and pressure calibrations described above must be performed befo re performing the flow calibration. In addition, the leak check discussed in Sectio n 9.2.4 must also be undertaken before executing the following instructions. The Partisol-FRM Sampler supports both a single-point and five-point flow calibr ation routine (refer to the U.S. EPA 2.12 Quality Assurance Handbook, Section 6). R&P recommends that the user perform the flow calibration whenever the sampler h as been transported, any electromechanical maintenance has been done, or the sample r flow deviates from the set flow by 5%. The sampler should be calibrated at least once per calendar year. 11.6.1. 11.6.1.11.6.1.11.6.1.11.6.1.11.6.1. S SSSSSINGLE INGLEINGLEINGLEINGLEINGLE-P -P-P-P-P-POINT OINTOINTOINTOINTOINT F FFFFFLOW LOWLOWLOWLOWLOW C CCCCCALIBRATION ALIBRATIONALIBRATIONALIBRATIONALIBRATIONALIBRATION Follow these steps to perform the single-point flow calibration: Follow these steps to perform the single-point flow calibration:Follow these ste ps to perform the single-point flow calibration:Follow these steps to perform th e single-point flow calibration:Follow these steps to perform the single-point f low calibration:Follow these steps to perform the single-point flow calibration: 1) 1)1)1)1)1) Return the sampler to the Main screen (Section 4.3). Return the sampler to the Main screen (Section 4.3).Return the sampler to the Ma in screen (Section 4.3).Return the sampler to the Main screen (Section 4.3).Retu rn the sampler to the Main screen (Section 4.3).Return the sampler to the Main s creen (Section 4.3). 2) 2)2)2)2)2) The device must be in the Stop Operating Mode (Section 5.3) to The device must be in the Stop Operating Mode (Section 5.3) toThe device must be in the Stop Operating Mode (Section 5.3) toThe device must be in the Stop Opera ting Mode (Section 5.3) toThe device must be in the Stop Operating Mode (Section 5.3) toThe device must be in the Stop Operating Mode (Section 5.3) to perform a single-point flow calibration.

perform a single-point flow calibration.perform a single-point flow calibration. perform a single-point flow calibration.perform a single-point flow calibration. perform a single-point flow calibration. 3) 3)3)3)3)3) Remove the Remove the Remove the Remove the PM-10 PM-10 inlet from PM-10 inlet from PM-10 inlet from inlet from the sampler. the sampler.Remove the PM-10 inlet from the sampler. the sampler.Remove the PM-10 inlet from the sampler. the sampler.

4) 4)4)4)4)4) Install a filter cassette containing a 47 mm filter into the filter Install a filter cassette containing a 47 mm filter into the filterInstall a fil ter cassette containing a 47 mm filter into the filterInstall a filter cassette containing a 47 mm filter into the filterInstall a filter cassette containing a 47 mm filter into the filterInstall a filter cassette containing a 47 mm filter into the filter holding mechanism. This filter will be thrown away at the end of holding mechanism. This filter will be thrown away at the end ofholding mechanis m. This filter will be thrown away at the end ofholding mechanism. This filter w ill be thrown away at the end ofholding mechanism. This filter will be thrown aw ay at the end ofholding mechanism. This filter will be thrown away at the end of this flow calibration. this flow calibration.this flow calibration.this flow calibration.this flow cali bration.this flow calibration. 5) 5)5)5)5)5) When in the Main screen, press <F5: Setup> and then <F2: Calib> When in the Main screen, press <F5: Setup> and then <F2: Calib>When in the Main screen, press <F5: Setup> and then <F2: Calib>When in the Main screen, press <F5 : Setup> and then <F2: Calib>When in the Main screen, press <F5: Setup> and then <F2: Calib>When in the Main screen, press <F5: Setup> and then <F2: Calib> to display the Calibration screen (Figure 11-3). to display the Calibration screen (Figure 11-3).to display the Calibration scree n (Figure 11-3).to display the Calibration screen (Figure 11-3).to display the C alibration screen (Figure 11-3).to display the Calibration screen (Figure 11-3). 6) 6)6)6)6)6) If you are using the Streamline Flow Transfer Standard (FTS) If you are using the Streamline Flow Transfer Standard (FTS)If you are using the Streamline Flow Transfer Standard (FTS)If you are using the Streamline Flow Tra nsfer Standard (FTS)If you are using the Streamline Flow Transfer Standard (FTS) If you are using the Streamline Flow Transfer Standard (FTS) (Figure 11-5) to calibrate the flow of the Partisol-FRM Sampler, go (Figure 11-5) to calibrate the flow of the Partisol-FRM Sampler, go(Figure 11-5) to calibrate the flow of the Partisol-FRM Sampler, go(Figure 11-5) to calibrate the flow of the Partisol-FRM Sampler, go(Figure 11-5) to calibrate the flow of the Partisol-FRM Sampler, go(Figure 11-5) to calibrate the flow of the PartisolFRM Sampler, go to step 7. If you are not useing the to step 7. If you are not useing theto step 7. If you are not useing theto step 7. If you are not useing theto step 7. If you are not useing theto step 7. If yo u are not useing the the Streamline Flow Transfer the Streamline Flow Transferthe Streamline Flow Transferthe Streamline Flow Tran sferthe Streamline Flow Transferthe Streamline Flow Transfer Standard (FTS) to calibrate the flow of the Partisol-FRM Sampler, Standard (FTS) to calibrate the flow of the Partisol-FRM Sampler,Standard (FTS) to calibrate the flow of the Partisol-FRM Sampler,Standard (FTS) to calibrate th

e flow of the Partisol-FRM Sampler,Standard (FTS) to calibrate the flow of the P artisol-FRM Sampler,Standard (FTS) to calibrate the flow of the Partisol-FRM Sam pler, go to step 14. go to step 14.go to step 14.go to step 14.go to step 14.go to step 14. SECTION 11: CALIBRATION PROCEDURES PAGE 11-11

Revision B.001 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler Figure 11-5. Calibrating the sampler s flow using the Streamline Flow Transfer Standard (FTS). 7) 7)7)7)7)7) Press the <ESC> key to display the Setup screen. Press the <ESC> key to display the Setup screen.Press the <ESC> key to display t he Setup screen.Press the <ESC> key to display the Setup screen.Press the <ESC> key to display the Setup screen.Press the <ESC> key to display the Setup screen. 8) 8)8)8)8)8) Press <F1: Edit>. Press <F1: Edit>.Press <F1: Edit>.Press <F1: Edit>.Press <F1: Edit>.Press <F1: E dit>. 9) 9)9)9)9)9) Press the arrow keys to s Press the arrow keys to sPress the arrow keys to sPress the arrow keys to sPress the arrow keys to sPress the arrow keys to scroll down to the FTS CONST field. croll down to the FTS CONST field.croll down to the FTS CONST field.croll down to th e FTS CONST field.croll down to the FTS CONST field.croll down to the FTS CONST field. 10) 10)10)10)10)10) Enter the m constant from the FTS Calibration sheet. Enter the m constant from the FTS Calibration sheet.Enter the m constant from the FT S Calibration sheet.Enter the m constant from the FTS Calibration sheet.Enter the m constant from the FTS Calibration sheet.Enter the m constant from the FTS Calibrat ion sheet. 11) 11)11)11)11)11) Enter the b constant from the FTS Calibration sheet. Enter the b constant from the FTS Calibration sheet.Enter the b constant from the FT S Calibration sheet.Enter the b constant from the FTS Calibration sheet.Enter the b constant from the FTS Calibration sheet.Enter the b constant from the FTS Calibrat ion sheet. 12) 12)12)12)12)12) Press the <ENTER> key. Press the <ENTER> key.Press the <ENTER> key.Press the <ENTER> key.Press the <ENT ER> key.Press the <ENTER> key. 13) 13)13)13)13)13) Press <F2:Calib> to return to the Calibration screen. Press <F2:Calib> to return to the Calibration screen.Press <F2:Calib> to return to the Calibration screen.Press <F2:Calib> to return to the Calibration screen.P ress <F2:Calib> to return to the Calibration screen.Press <F2:Calib> to return t o the Calibration screen. 14) 14)14)14)14)14) Attach the Streamline FTS or other flow metering device to the Attach the Streamline FTS or other flow metering device to theAttach the Streaml ine FTS or other flow metering device to theAttach the Streamline FTS or other f low metering device to theAttach the Streamline FTS or other flow metering devic e to theAttach the Streamline FTS or other flow metering device to the sample tube. Other flow meters may require the use of the flow sample tube. Other flow meters may require the use of the flowsample tube. Other flow meters may require the use of the flowsample tube. Other flow meters may r equire the use of the flowsample tube. Other flow meters may require the use of the flowsample tube. Other flow meters may require the use of the flow

audit adapter, which should be installed with its valve open. audit adapter, which should be installed with its valve open.audit adapter, whic h should be installed with its valve open.audit adapter, which should be install ed with its valve open.audit adapter, which should be installed with its valve o pen.audit adapter, which should be installed with its valve open. 15 1515151515) ))))) Leave the pump turned off. If it is currently on, press <F7: Flow> Leave the pump turned off. If it is currently on, press <F7: Flow>Leave the pump turned off. If it is currently on, press <F7: Flow>Leave the pump turned off. I f it is currently on, press <F7: Flow>Leave the pump turned off. If it is curren tly on, press <F7: Flow>Leave the pump turned off. If it is currently on, press <F7: Flow> to turn it off. to turn it off.to turn it off.to turn it off.to turn it off.to turn it off. 16) 16)16)16)16)16) Press <F1: Edit> to enter the Edit Mode, and move the cursor to Press <F1: Edit> to enter the Edit Mode, and move the cursor toPress <F1: Edit> to enter the Edit Mode, and move the cursor toPress <F1: Edit> to enter the Edit Mode, and move the cursor toPress <F1: Edit> to enter the Edit Mode, and move t he cursor toPress <F1: Edit> to enter the Edit Mode, and move the cursor to the row labeled Flow under the Act (actual) column. the row labeled Flow under the Act (actual) column.the row labeled Flow under the Act ctual) column.the row labeled Flow under the Act (actual) column.the row labeled Flow under the Act (actual) column.the row labeled Flow under the Act (actual) column. 17) 17)17)17)17)17) Enter 0 in this position and press the <ENTER> key. This Enter 0 in this position and press the <ENTER> key. ThisEnter 0 in this position and press the <ENTER> key. ThisEnter 0 in this position and press the <ENTER> key. Th isEnter 0 in this position and press the <ENTER> key. ThisEnter 0 in this position a nd press the <ENTER> key. This causes the microprocessor to compute the Offset value, which causes the microprocessor to compute the Offset value, whichcauses the microproces sor to compute the Offset value, whichcauses the microprocessor to compute the Offs et value, whichcauses the microprocessor to compute the Offset value, whichcauses t he microprocessor to compute the Offset value, which is the zero offset value for the mass flow controller. Record this is the zero offset value for the mass flow controller. Record thisis the zero of fset value for the mass flow controller. Record thisis the zero offset value for the mass flow controller. Record thisis the zero offset value for the mass flow controller. Record thisis the zero offset value for the mass flow controller. R ecord this value for future reference. value for future reference.value for future reference.value for future reference .value for future reference.value for future reference. 18) 18)18)18)18)18) Turn on the pump by pressing <F7: Flow>. Turn on the pump by pressing <F7: Flow>.Turn on the pump by pressing <F7: Flow>. Turn on the pump by pressing <F7: Flow>.Turn on the pump by pressing <F7: Flow>. Turn on the pump by pressing <F7: Flow>. SECTION 11: CALIBRATION PROCEDURES PAGE 11-12

Revision B.001 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler 19) 19)19)19)19)19) Press <F8: DecrFlow> to continuously decrease the flow, <F9: Press <F8: DecrFlow> to continuously decrease the flow, <F9:Press <F8: DecrFlow> to continuously decrease the flow, <F9:Press <F8: DecrFlow> to continuously dec rease the flow, <F9:Press <F8: DecrFlow> to continuously decrease the flow, <F9: Press <F8: DecrFlow> to continuously decrease the flow, <F9: HoldFlow> to maintain the current flow rate, and <F10: IncrFlow> HoldFlow> to maintain the current flow rate, and <F10: IncrFlow>HoldFlow> to mai ntain the current flow rate, and <F10: IncrFlow>HoldFlow> to maintain the curren t flow rate, and <F10: IncrFlow>HoldFlow> to maintain the current flow rate, and <F10: IncrFlow>HoldFlow> to maintain the current flow rate, and <F10: IncrFlow> to continuously increase the flow, until the flow rate displayed in to continuously increase the flow, until the flow rate displayed into continuous ly increase the flow, until the flow rate displayed into continuously increase t he flow, until the flow rate displayed into continuously increase the flow, unti l the flow rate displayed into continuously increase the flow, until the flow ra te displayed in the Calc column of the Calibration screen is approximately 16.7 the Calc column of the Calibration screen is approximately 16.7the Calc column of th e Calibration screen is approximately 16.7the Calc column of the Calibration scree n is approximately 16.7the Calc column of the Calibration screen is approximately 16.7the Calc column of the Calibration screen is approximately 16.7 l/min. l/min.l/min.l/min.l/min.l/min. 20) 20)20)20)20)20) Determine the flow in actual l/min using the external flow meter . If Determine the flow in actual l/min using the external flow meter. IfDetermine th e flow in actual l/min using the external flow meter. IfDetermine the flow in ac tual l/min using the external flow meter. IfDetermine the flow in actual l/min u sing the external flow meter. IfDetermine the flow in actual l/min using the ext ernal flow meter. If you are using the Streamline FTS, go to step 21. If you are not you are using the Streamline FTS, go to step 21. If you are notyou are using the Streamline FTS, go to step 21. If you are notyou are using the Streamline FTS, go to step 21. If you are notyou are using the Streamline FTS, go to step 21. If you are notyou are using the Streamline FTS, go to step 21. If you are not using the Streamline FTS, go to step 23. using the Streamline FTS, go to step 23.using the Streamline FTS, go to step 23. using the Streamline FTS, go to step 23.using the Streamline FTS, go to step 23. using the Streamline FTS, go to step 23. 21) 21)21)21)21)21) Enter the pressure (inches H Enter the pressure (inches HEnter the pressure (inches HEnter the pressure (inch es HEnter the pressure (inches HEnter the pressure (inches H2 22222O) in the FTS Pres field by pressO) in the FTS Pres field by press-O) in the FTS Pres field by press-O) in the FTS Pre s field by press-O) in the FTS Pres field by press-O) in the FTS Pres field by pressi ng <F1:Edit>, entering the value using the keypad, then pressing ing <F1:Edit>, entering the value using the keypad, then pressinging <F1:Edit>, entering the value using the keypad, then pressinging <F1:Edit>, entering the va

lue using the keypad, then pressinging <F1:Edit>, entering the value using the k eypad, then pressinging <F1:Edit>, entering the value using the keypad, then pre ssing the <ENTER> key. The sampler will calculate the volumetric flow the <ENTER> key. The sampler will calculate the volumetric flowthe <ENTER> key. The sampler will calculate the volumetric flowthe <ENTER> key. The sampler will calculate the volumetric flowthe <ENTER> key. The sampler will calculate the vol umetric flowthe <ENTER> key. The sampler will calculate the volumetric flow in l/min. in l/min.in l/min.in l/min.in l/min.in l/min.

22) 22)22)22)22)22) If you are using the Streamline FTS, the sampler will automatica lly If you are using the Streamline FTS, the sampler will automaticallyIf you are us ing the Streamline FTS, the sampler will automaticallyIf you are using the Strea mline FTS, the sampler will automaticallyIf you are using the Streamline FTS, th e sampler will automaticallyIf you are using the Streamline FTS, the sampler wil l automatically display the calculated flow in the ACT field and compute the display the calculated flow in the ACT field and compute thedisplay the calculated flow in the ACT field and compute thedisplay the calculated flow in the ACT field a nd compute thedisplay the calculated flow in the ACT field and compute thedisplay the calculated flow in the ACT field and compute the Span value. The Span value is the span offset value for the Span value. The Span value is the span offset value for the Span value. The Span value the span offset value for the Span value. The Span value is the span offset value fo r the Span value. The Span value is the span offset value for the Span value. The Span ue is the span offset value for the mass flow controller. Record this value for future reference. Go mass flow controller. Record this value for future reference. Gomass flow contro ller. Record this value for future reference. Gomass flow controller. Record thi s value for future reference. Gomass flow controller. Record this value for futu re reference. Gomass flow controller. Record this value for future reference. Go to step 25. to step 25.to step 25.to step 25.to step 25.to step 25. NOTE: If the instrument has been reset and you have recorded the Offset and Span values for the flow, you may enter these values directly when in the Edit Mode. 23) 23)23)23)23)23) Press <F1: Edit> to enter the Edit Mode, and moving the cursor t o Press <F1: Edit> to enter the Edit Mode, and moving the cursor toPress <F1: Edit > to enter the Edit Mode, and moving the cursor toPress <F1: Edit> to enter the Edit Mode, and moving the cursor toPress <F1: Edit> to enter the Edit Mode, and moving the cursor toPress <F1: Edit> to enter the Edit Mode, and moving the curs or to the row labeled Flow under the Act (actual) column. the row labeled Flow under the Act (actual) column.the row labeled Flow under the Act ctual) column.the row labeled Flow under the Act (actual) column.the row labeled Flow under the Act (actual) column.the row labeled Flow under the Act (actual) column. 24) 24)24)24)24)24) Enter the volumetric flow rate measured by the external flow Enter the volumetric flow rate measured by the external flowEnter the volumetric flow rate measured by the external flowEnter the volumetric flow rate measured by the external flowEnter the volumetric flow rate measured by the external flow

Enter the volumetric flow rate measured by the external flow meter and press the <ENTER> key. The unit will now compute the meter and press the <ENTER> key. The unit will now compute themeter and press th e <ENTER> key. The unit will now compute themeter and press the <ENTER> key. The unit will now compute themeter and press the <ENTER> key. The unit will now com pute themeter and press the <ENTER> key. The unit will now compute the Span value, which is the span offset value for the mass flow Span value, which is the span offset value for the mass flow Span value, which is the span offset value for the mass flow Span value, which is the span offset value for the mass flow Span value, which is the span offset value for the mass flow Span value , which is the span offset value for the mass flow controller. Record this value for future reference. Go to step 25. controller. Record this value for future reference. Go to step 25.controller. Re cord this value for future reference. Go to step 25.controller. Record this valu e for future reference. Go to step 25.controller. Record this value for future r eference. Go to step 25.controller. Record this value for future reference. Go t o step 25. NOTE: If the instrument has been reset and you have recorded the Offset and Span values for the flow, you may enter these values directly when in the Edit Mode. 25) 25)25)25)25)25) Return to the Main screen by pressing the <ESC> key twice. Return to the Main screen by pressing the <ESC> key twice.Return to the Main scr een by pressing the <ESC> key twice.Return to the Main screen by pressing the <E SC> key twice.Return to the Main screen by pressing the <ESC> key twice.Return t o the Main screen by pressing the <ESC> key twice. 26 2626262626) ))))) Restore the sampling hardware to its original state by removing Restore the sampling hardware to its original state by removingRestore the sampl ing hardware to its original state by removingRestore the sampling hardware to i ts original state by removingRestore the sampling hardware to its original state by removingRestore the sampling hardware to its original state by removing the flow metering hardware and reinstalling the PM-10 inlet on the flow metering hardware and reinstalling the PM-10 inlet onthe flow metering hardware and reinstalling the PM-10 inlet onthe flow metering hardware and reins talling the PM-10 inlet onthe flow metering hardware and reinstalling the PM-10 inlet onthe flow metering hardware and reinstalling the PM-10 inlet on the sample tube. Remove the filter cassette from the sampler, the sample tube. Remove the filter cassette from the sampler,the sample tube. Re move the filter cassette from the sampler,the sample tube. Remove the filter cas sette from the sampler,the sample tube. Remove the filter cassette from the samp ler,the sample tube. Remove the filter cassette from the sampler, and discard the installed filter. and discard the installed filter.and discard the installed filter.and discard th e installed filter.and discard the installed filter.and discard the installed fi lter. SECTION 11: CALIBRATION PROCEDURES PAGE 11-13

Revision B.001 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler 11.6.2. 11.6.2.11.6.2.11.6.2.11.6.2.11.6.2. F FFFFFIVE IVEIVEIVEIVEIVE-P -P-P-P-P-POINT OINTOINTOINTOINTOINT F FFFFFLOW LOWLOWLOWLOWLOW C CCCCCALIBRATION ALIBRATIONALIBRATIONALIBRATIONALIBRATIONALIBRATIONFollow these steps to perform the five-point flow calibration: Follow these steps to perform the five-point flow calibration:Follow these steps to perform the five-point flow calibration:Follow these steps to perform the fi ve-point flow calibration:Follow these steps to perform the five-point flow cali bration:Follow these steps to perform the five-point flow calibration: 1) 1)1)1)1)1) Return the sampler to the Main screen (Section 4.3). Return the sampler to the Main screen (Section 4.3).Return the sampler to the Ma in screen (Section 4.3).Return the sampler to the Main screen (Section 4.3).Retu rn the sampler to the Main screen (Section 4.3).Return the sampler to the Main s creen (Section 4.3). 2) 2)2)2)2)2) The device must be in the Stop Operating Mode (Section 5.3) to The device must be in the Stop Operating Mode (Section 5.3) toThe device must be in the Stop Operating Mode (Section 5.3) toThe device must be in the Stop Opera ting Mode (Section 5.3) toThe device must be in the Stop Operating Mode (Section 5.3) toThe device must be in the Stop Operating Mode (Section 5.3) to perform a five-point flow calibration. perform a five-point flow calibration.perform a five-point flow calibration.perf orm a five-point flow calibration.perform a five-point flow calibration.perform a five-point flow calibration. 3) 3)3)3)3)3) Carefully remove the PM-10 inlet from the sampler. Carefully remove the PM-10 inlet from the sampler.Carefully remove the PM-10 inl et from the sampler.Carefully remove the PM-10 inlet from the sampler.Carefully remove the PM-10 inlet from the sampler.Carefully remove the PM-10 inlet from th e sampler. 4) 4)4)4)4)4) Install a filter cassette containing a 47 mm filter into the filter Install a filter cassette containing a 47 mm filter into the filterInstall a fil ter cassette containing a 47 mm filter into the filterInstall a filter cassette containing a 47 mm filter into the filterInstall a filter cassette containing a 47 mm filter into the filterInstall a filter cassette containing a 47 mm filter into the filter holding mechanism. This filter will be thrown away at the end of holding mechanism. This filter will be thrown away at the end ofholding mechanis m. This filter will be thrown away at the end ofholding mechanism. This filter w ill be thrown away at the end ofholding mechanism. This filter will be thrown aw ay at the end ofholding mechanism. This filter will be thrown away at the end of this flow calibration. this flow calibration.this flow calibration.this flow calibration.this flow cali

bration.this flow calibration. 5) 5)5)5)5)5) When in the Main screen, press <F5: Setup>, <F2: Calib> and then When in the Main screen, press <F5: Setup>, <F2: Calib> and thenWhen in the Main screen, press <F5: Setup>, <F2: Calib> and thenWhen in the Main screen, press < F5: Setup>, <F2: Calib> and thenWhen in the Main screen, press <F5: Setup>, <F2: Calib> and thenWhen in the Main screen, press <F5: Setup>, <F2: Calib> and then <F2: FlowCal> to display the Flow Calibration screen (Figure 11<F2: FlowCal> to display the Flow Calibration screen (Figure 11-<F2: FlowCal> to display the Flow Calibration screen (Figure 11-<F2: FlowCal> to display the Flo w Calibration screen (Figure 11-<F2: FlowCal> to display the Flow Calibration sc reen (Figure 11-<F2: FlowCal> to display the Flow Calibration screen (Figure 116 ). 6).6).6).6).6). Figure 11-6. Flow Calibration screen. Flow Calibration Set Flow: 16.7 l/min Current Flow: 16.7 l/min Actual Flow: 16.7 l/min FTS Pres: 0.00 in H2O Press Start to begin flow calibration Flow Offset: 0.0000 Flow Span: 1.0000 Edit Start Abort Function Keys in Browse Mode Edit Start Abort Function Keys in Edit Mode --+ ++ Bksp > +/< SECTION 11: CALIBRATION PROCEDURES PAGE 11-14

Revision B.001 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler 6) 6)6)6)6)6) If you are using the Streamline Flow Transfer Standard (FTS) If you are using the Streamline Flow Transfer Standard (FTS)If you are using the Streamline Flow Transfer Standard (FTS)If you are using the Streamline Flow Tra nsfer Standard (FTS)If you are using the Streamline Flow Transfer Standard (FTS) If you are using the Streamline Flow Transfer Standard (FTS) (Figure 11-5) to calibrate the flow of the Partisol-FRM Sampler, go (Figure 11-5) to calibrate the flow of the Partisol-FRM Sampler, go(Figure 11-5) to calibrate the flow of the Partisol-FRM Sampler, go(Figure 11-5) to calibrate the flow of the Partisol-FRM Sampler, go(Figure 11-5) to calibrate the flow of the Partisol-FRM Sampler, go(Figure 11-5) to calibrate the flow of the PartisolFRM Sampler, go to step 7. If you are not using the Streamline FTS to calibrate the to step 7. If you are not using the Streamline FTS to calibrate theto step 7. If you are not using the Streamline FTS to calibrate theto step 7. If you are not using the Streamline FTS to calibrate theto step 7. If you are not using the Str eamline FTS to calibrate theto step 7. If you are not using the Streamline FTS t o calibrate the flow of the Partisol-FRM Sampler, go to step 14. flow of the Partisol-FRM Sampler, go to step 14.flow of the Partisol-FRM Sampler , go to step 14.flow of the Partisol-FRM Sampler, go to step 14.flow of the Part isol-FRM Sampler, go to step 14.flow of the Partisol-FRM Sampler, go to step 14. 7) 7)7)7)7)7) Press the <ESC> key to display the Setup screen. Press the <ESC> key to display the Setup screen.Press the <ESC> key to display t he Setup screen.Press the <ESC> key to display the Setup screen.Press the <ESC> key to display the Setup screen.Press the <ESC> key to display the Setup screen. 8) 8)8)8)8)8) Press <F1: Edit>. Press <F1: Edit>.Press <F1: Edit>.Press <F1: Edit>.Press <F1: Edit>.Press <F1: E dit>. 9) 9)9)9)9)9) Press the arrow keys to scroll down to the FTS CONST field. Press the arrow keys to scroll down to the FTS CONST field.Press the arrow keys to scroll down to the FTS CONST field.Press the arrow keys to scroll down to the FTS CONST field.Press the arrow keys to scroll down to the FTS CONST field.Press the ar row keys to scroll down to the FTS CONST field. 10) 10)10)10)10)10) Enter the m constant from the FTS Calibration sheet. Enter the m constant from the FTS Calibration sheet.Enter the m constant from the FT S Calibration sheet.Enter the m constant from the FTS Calibration sheet.Enter the m constant from the FTS Calibration sheet.Enter the m constant from the FTS Calibrat ion sheet. 11) 11)11)11)11)11) Enter the b constant from the FTS Calibration sheet. Enter the b constant from the FTS Calibration sheet.Enter the b constant from the FT S Calibration sheet.Enter the b constant from the FTS Calibration sheet.Enter the b constant from the FTS Calibration sheet.Enter the b constant from the FTS Calibrat

ion sheet. 12) 12)12)12)12)12) Press the <ENTER> key. Press the <ENTER> key.Press the <ENTER> key.Press the <ENTER> key.Press the <ENT ER> key.Press the <ENTER> key. 13) 13)13)13)13)13) Press <F2:Calib> to return to the Calibration screen. Press <F2:Calib> to return to the Calibration screen.Press <F2:Calib> to return to the Calibration screen.Press <F2:Calib> to return to the Calibration screen.P ress <F2:Calib> to return to the Calibration screen.Press <F2:Calib> to return t o the Calibration screen. 14) 14)14)14)14)14) Attach the Streamline FTS or other flow metering device to the Attach the Streamline FTS or other flow metering device to theAttach the Streaml ine FTS or other flow metering device to theAttach the Streamline FTS or other f low metering device to theAttach the Streamline FTS or other flow metering devic e to theAttach the Streamline FTS or other flow metering device to the sample tube. Other flow meters may require the use of the flow sample tube. Other flow meters may require the use of the flowsample tube. Other flow meters may require the use of the flowsample tube. Other flow meters may r equire the use of the flowsample tube. Other flow meters may require the use of the flowsample tube. Other flow meters may require the use of the flow audit adapter, which should be installed with its valve open. audit adapter, which should be installed with its valve open.audit adapter, whic h should be installed with its valve open.audit adapter, which should be install ed with its valve open.audit adapter, which should be installed with its valve o pen.audit adapter, which should be installed with its valve open. 15) 15)15)15)15)15) Press <F2: Start> to begin the five-point flow calibration routi ne. Press <F2: Start> to begin the five-point flow calibration routine.Press <F2: St art> to begin the five-point flow calibration routine.Press <F2: Start> to begin the five-point flow calibration routine.Press <F2: Start> to begin the five-poi nt flow calibration routine.Press <F2: Start> to begin the five-point flow calib ration routine. 16 1616161616) ))))) With the pump turned off, the sampler first computes the flow With the pump turned off, the sampler first computes the flowWith the pump turne d off, the sampler first computes the flowWith the pump turned off, the sampler first computes the flowWith the pump turned off, the sampler first computes the flowWith the pump turned off, the sampler first computes the flow offset value before automatically starting the span calibration offset value before automatically starting the span calibrationoffset value befo re automatically starting the span calibrationoffset value before automatically starting the span calibrationoffset value before automatically starting the span calibrationoffset value before automatically starting the span calibration using five flow rates around the default sample flow rate of 16.7 l/ using five flow rates around the default sample flow rate of 16.7 l/using five f low rates around the default sample flow rate of 16.7 l/using five flow rates ar ound the default sample flow rate of 16.7 l/using five flow rates around the def ault sample flow rate of 16.7 l/using five flow rates around the default sample flow rate of 16.7 l/ min.

min.min.min.min.min. NOTE: Follow the instructions displayed by the sampler at the bottom of the Flow Calibration screen. 17) 17)17)17)17)17) Determine the flow in actual l/min using the external flow meter . If Determine the flow in actual l/min using the external flow meter. IfDetermine th e flow in actual l/min using the external flow meter. IfDetermine the flow in ac tual l/min using the external flow meter. IfDetermine the flow in actual l/min u sing the external flow meter. IfDetermine the flow in actual l/min using the ext ernal flow meter. If you are using the Streamline FTS, go to step 18. If you are not you are using the Streamline FTS, go to step 18. If you are notyou are using the Streamline FTS, go to step 18. If you are notyou are using the Streamline FTS, go to step 18. If you are notyou are using the Streamline FTS, go to step 18. If you are notyou are using the Streamline FTS, go to step 18. If you are not using the Streamline FTS, go to step 20. using the Streamline FTS, go to step 20.using the Streamline FTS, go to step 20. using the Streamline FTS, go to step 20.using the Streamline FTS, go to step 20. using the Streamline FTS, go to step 20. 18) 18)18)18)18)18) Press <F1:Edit>. Press <F1:Edit>.Press <F1:Edit>.Press <F1:Edit>.Press <F1:Edit>.Press <F1:Edit>. 19) 19)19)19)19)19) Enter the pressure (inches H Enter the pressure (inches HEnter the pressure (inches HEnter the pressure (inch es HEnter the pressure (inches HEnter the pressure (inches H2 22222O) in the FTS Pres field, then press O) in the FTS Pres field, then pressO) in the FTS Pres field, then pressO) in the FTS Pres field, then pressO) in the FTS Pres field, then pressO) in the FTS Pres field, then press the <ENTER> key. The sampler will now calculate the volumetric the <ENTER> key. The sampler will now calculate the volumetricthe <ENTER> key. T he sampler will now calculate the volumetricthe <ENTER> key. The sampler will no w calculate the volumetricthe <ENTER> key. The sampler will now calculate the vo lumetricthe <ENTER> key. The sampler will now calculate the volumetric flow in l/min. flow in l/min.flow in l/min.flow in l/min.flow in l/min.flow in l/min. 20) 20)20)20)20)20) The unit will now operate at flow rates of 16.7, 17.5, 15.8, 18. 3 and The unit will now operate at flow rates of 16.7, 17.5, 15.8, 18.3 andThe unit wi ll now operate at flow rates of 16.7, 17.5, 15.8, 18.3 andThe unit will now oper ate at flow rates of 16.7, 17.5, 15.8, 18.3 andThe unit will now operate at flow rates of 16.7, 17.5, 15.8, 18.3 andThe unit will now operate at flow rates of 1 6.7, 17.5, 15.8, 18.3 and 15.0 l/min in succession. If you are using the Streamline FTS, go 15.0 l/min in succession. If you are using the Streamline FTS, go15.0 l/min in s uccession. If you are using the Streamline FTS, go15.0 l/min in succession. If y ou are using the Streamline FTS, go15.0 l/min in succession. If you are using th e Streamline FTS, go15.0 l/min in succession. If you are using the Streamline FT S, go to step 21. If you are not using the Streamline FTS, go to step 22.

to step 21. If you are not using the Streamline FTS, go to step 22.to step 21. I f you are not using the Streamline FTS, go to step 22.to step 21. If you are not using the Streamline FTS, go to step 22.to step 21. If you are not using the St reamline FTS, go to step 22.to step 21. If you are not using the Streamline FTS, go to step 22. 21) 21)21)21)21)21) The sampler will automatically enter the calculated flow into th e The sampler will automatically enter the calculated flow into theThe sampler wil l automatically enter the calculated flow into theThe sampler will automatically enter the calculated flow into theThe sampler will automatically enter the calc ulated flow into theThe sampler will automatically enter the calculated flow int o the ACT field and compute Span value, which is the span offset ACT field and compute Span value, which is the span offset ACT field and compute Span ue, which is the span offset ACT field and compute Span value, which is the span offs et ACT field and compute Span value, which is the span offset ACT field and compute Span alue, which is the span offset for the mass flow controller. Go to step 23. for the mass flow controller. Go to step 23.for the mass flow controller. Go to step 23.for the mass flow controller. Go to step 23.for the mass flow controller . Go to step 23.for the mass flow controller. Go to step 23. SECTION 11: CALIBRATION PROCEDURES PAGE 11-15

Revision B.001 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler NOTE: If the instrument has been reset and you have recorded the Offset and Span values for the flow, you may enter these numbers directly when in the Edit Mode. 22) 22)22)22)22)22) When in the Flow Calibration screen, wait for the Current Flow When in the Flow Calibration screen, wait for the Current Flow When in the Flow Cal ibration screen, wait for the Current Flow When in the Flow Calibration screen, wai t for the Current Flow When in the Flow Calibration screen, wait for the Current Flo w When in the Flow Calibration screen, wait for the Current Flow value to stabilize at each of these levels (16.7, 17.5, 15.8, 18.3 and value to stabilize at each of these levels (16.7, 17.5, 15.8, 18.3 andvalue to s tabilize at each of these levels (16.7, 17.5, 15.8, 18.3 andvalue to stabilize a t each of these levels (16.7, 17.5, 15.8, 18.3 andvalue to stabilize at each of these levels (16.7, 17.5, 15.8, 18.3 andvalue to stabilize at each of these leve ls (16.7, 17.5, 15.8, 18.3 and 15.0 l/min). When Current Flow value stabilizes at each of these 15.0 l/min). When Current Flow value stabilizes at each of these15.0 l/min). When C urrent Flow value stabilizes at each of these15.0 l/min). When Current Flow value s tabilizes at each of these15.0 l/min). When Current Flow value stabilizes at each of these15.0 l/min). When Current Flow value stabilizes at each of these levels, press <F1: Edit>, move the cursor to the Actual Flow levels, press <F1: Edit>, move the cursor to the Actual Flow levels, press <F1: Edi t>, move the cursor to the Actual Flow levels, press <F1: Edit>, move the cursor to the Actual Flow levels, press <F1: Edit>, move the cursor to the Actual Flow levels, press <F1: Edit>, move the cursor to the Actual Flow field, and enter the flow rate displayed by the external flow meter. field, and enter the flow rate displayed by the external flow meter.field, and e nter the flow rate displayed by the external flow meter.field, and enter the flo w rate displayed by the external flow meter.field, and enter the flow rate displ ayed by the external flow meter.field, and enter the flow rate displayed by the external flow meter. Then press the <ENTER> key. The sampler uses this information Then press the <ENTER> key. The sampler uses this informationThen press the <ENT ER> key. The sampler uses this informationThen press the <ENTER> key. The sample r uses this informationThen press the <ENTER> key. The sampler uses this informa tionThen press the <ENTER> key. The sampler uses this information to compute the proper flow span value. Go to step 23. to compute the proper flow span value. Go to step 23.to compute the proper flow span value. Go to step 23.to compute the proper flow span value. Go to step 23.t o compute the proper flow span value. Go to step 23.to compute the proper flow s pan value. Go to step 23. NOTE: If the instrument has been reset and you have recorded the Offset and Span values for the flow, you may enter these numbers directly when in the Edit Mode. 23) 23)23)23)23)23) Return to the Main screen by pressing the <ESC> key three times. Return to in screen ssing the key three the Main screen by pressing the <ESC> key three times.Return to by pressing the <ESC> key three times.Return to the Main screen <ESC> key three times.Return to the Main screen by pressing the times.Return to the Main screen by pressing the <ESC> key three the Ma by pre <ESC> times.

24) 24)24)24)24)24) Restore the sampling hardware to its original state by removing Restore the sampling hardware to its original state by removingRestore the sampl ing hardware to its original state by removingRestore the sampling hardware to i ts original state by removingRestore the sampling hardware to its original state by removingRestore the sampling hardware to its original state by removing the flow metering hardware and reinstalling the PM-10 inlet on the flow metering hardware and reinstalling the PM-10 inlet onthe flow metering hardware and reinstalling the PM-10 inlet onthe flow metering hardware and reins talling the PM-10 inlet onthe flow metering hardware and reinstalling the PM-10 inlet onthe flow metering hardware and reinstalling the PM-10 inlet on the sample tube. Remove the filter cassette from the sampler, the sample tube. Remove the filter cassette from the sampler,the sample tube. Re move the filter cassette from the sampler,the sample tube. Remove the filter cas sette from the sampler,the sample tube. Remove the filter cassette from the samp ler,the sample tube. Remove the filter cassette from the sampler, and discard the installed filter. and discard the installed filter.and discard the installed filter.and discard th e installed filter.and discard the installed filter.and discard the installed fi lter. SECTION 11: CALIBRATION PROCEDURES PAGE 11-16

Revision B.000 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler Section 12: Section 12:Section 12:Section 12:Section 12:Section 12: Resetting the Sampler Resetting the SamplerResetting the SamplerResetting the SamplerResetting the Sam plerResetting the Sampler . Use great care when performing the reset commands described in this section. . A complete hardware reset requires <F3: HReset> to be pressed twice. Figure 12-1. Title screen. The Partisol-FRM Sampler provides a straightforward means of resetting its param eters to their default values. This section reviews the different types of reset capabilities available to the user. The Title screen (Figure 12-1) provides the user access to the unit s reset functi ons (Section 4.2). With this screen displayed on the instrument, the user can initia te reset functions by making use of the function keys in the manner described below. The user should exercise these capabilities with care, as information can be lost inadver tently if making an improper choice. 12.1. 12.1.12.1.12.1.12.1.12.1. R RRRRRESETTING ESETTINGESETTINGESETTINGESETTINGESETTING O OOOOOPERATING PERATINGPERATINGPERATINGPERATINGPERATING P PPPPPARAMETERS ARAMETERSARAMETERSARAMETERSARAMETERSARAMETERS Pressing <F1: RDefs> with the Title screen displayed (Figure 12-1) causes the sampler to reset its operating parameters to their default settings. The system generates a single beep after the Title screen disappears to confirm that it has executed this command. 12.2. 12.2.12.2.12.2.12.2.12.2. R RRRRRESETTING ESETTINGESETTINGESETTINGESETTINGESETTING D DDDDDATA ATAATAATAATAATA S SSSSSTORAGE TORAGETORAGETORAGETORAGETORAGE Pressing <F2: RData> with the Title screen displayed (Figure 12-1) causes the

sampler to clear its filter data and interval data storage buffers (Section 7). The unit generates two beeps after the Title screen disappears to confirm that it has exe cuted this command. Partisol-FRM Model 2000 Air Sampler ***Candidate PM-2.5 Reference Method*** Version 1.000 Copyright 1996 Rupprecht & Patashnick Co., Inc. RDefs RData HReset SECTION 12: RESETTING THE SAMPLER PAGE 12-1

Revision B.000 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler 12.3. 12.3.12.3.12.3.12.3.12.3. P PPPPPERFORMING ERFORMINGERFORMINGERFORMINGERFORMINGERFORMING A AAAAA H HHHHHARDWARE ARDWAREARDWAREARDWAREARDWAREARDWARE R RRRRRESET ESETESETESETESETESET IMPORTANT: IMPORTANT:IMPORTANT:IMPORTANT:IMPORTANT:IMPORTANT: Record all calibration consta nts (offset and span) before resetting the sampler. Pressing <F3: HReset> twice with the Title screen displayed (Figure 12-1) perfor ms the function of both the <F1: RDefs> and <F2: RData> keys above, and additionall y resets the system s EPROM. The sampler generates three beeps after the Title scree n disappears to confirm that it has executed this command. As a safeguard, the <F3 : HReset> key must be pressed twice with the Title screen displayed to reset the hardware. NOTE: This command erases the calibration constants for temperature, pressure and flow calculations (Section 11), which must be reentered in the Calibration screen (Section 11) before operating the system again. 12.4. 12.4.12.4.12.4.12.4.12.4. R RRRRRESETTING ESETTINGESETTINGESETTINGESETTINGESETTING P PPPPPASSWORD ASSWORDASSWORDASSWORDASSWORDASSWORD P PPPPPROTECTION ROTECTIONROTECTIONROTECTIONROTECTIONROTECTION Pressing <F4> twice with the Title screen displayed sets the current password protection to off. This can be useful if the user has misplaced the code used to t urn on password protection, or if the user encounters any difficulties in turning pa ssword protection off. The sampler beeps four times upon successful deactivation of pas sword protection. SECTION 12: RESETTING THE SAMPLER PAGE 12-2

Revision B.001 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler Appendix AppendixAppendixAppendixAppendixAppendix A: A:A:A:A:A: Overview of Screens Overview of ScreensOverview of ScreensOverview of ScreensOverview of ScreensOver view of Screens This appendix contains all the instrument software screens displayed by the Part isolFRM Sampler, along with the hierarchy of screens. Figure A-1. Hierarchy of screens. Title Screen Main Screen Filter Setup Screen Statistics Screen Filter Data Screen

Power Outages Screen

Interval Data Screen

Setup Screen Calibration Screen Diagnostics Screen RS232 Setup Screen Audit Screen

Flow Calibration Screen APPENDIX A: OVERVIEW OF SCREENS PAGE A-1

Revision B.001 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler Figure A-2. Title screen. Figure A-3. Main screen. Figure A-4. Filter Setup screen. Partisol-FRM Model 2000 Air Sampler ***Candidate PM-2.5 Reference Method*** Version 1.000 Copyright 1996 Rupprecht & Patashnick Co., Inc. RDefs RData HReset Stat:Ok Main Screen Mode:SAMP Current Time: 19.36 96/11/07 Sample Start: 0.00 96/11/07 Sample Stop: 0.00 96/11/08 Amb Temp: 23.2 C Flow Rate: 16.7 l/min Filt Temp: 23.6 C Volume: 19.6 m^3 Amb Pres: 760 mmHg SampTime: 19.36 FiltSet Stats Data Run/Stp Setup Stat:Ok Filter Setup Mode:SAMP Current Time: 19.36 96/11/07 Start Time: 0.00 End Time: 0.00 Start Date: 96/11/07 End Date: 96/11/08 Set Flow: 16.7 l/min ID1: "96 " ID2: "00154 " Edit Next Hr NextDay + Day Set Def Function Keys in Browse Mode Edit Next Hr NextDay + Day Set Def Function Keys in Edit Mode -+ ++ Bksp <---> Bksp > < APPENDIX A: OVERVIEW OF SCREENS PAGE A-2

Revision B.001 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler Figure A-5. Statistics screen. Stat:Ok Statistics Mode:SAMP Current Time: 19.36 96/11/07 Inst Temp: 27.3 Filt Fan: ON Amb Temp: 23.2 Encl Fan: ON Filt Temp: 23.6 Heater: OFF Amb Pres: 760 Cur Flow: 16.7 Version: 1.202 Figure A-6. Filter Data screen. Stat:Ok Filter Data Rec: 937 Set: 0.00 96/11/05 Min Ave Max Strt: 0.00 96/11/05 AmbT: 11.5 16.8 21.9 Stop: 0.00 96/11/06 FltT: 11.6 17.0 22.4 Tot: 24.00 Pres: 759 760 761 TempDiff: 0.8 AveFlow: 16.7 Vol: 24.0 14.07 96/11/05 %CV: 0.1 + PwrDat IntvDat > Function Keys in Browse Mode + PwrDat IntvDat > First Last Output < APPENDIX A: OVERVIEW OF SCREENS PAGE A-3

Revision B.001 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler Figure A-7. Power Outages screen. Power Outages/Misc Rec: 937 9.53 xx.xx xx.xx xx.xx xx.xx xx.xx xx.xx xx.xx xx.xx xx.xx ID1: "96 " ID2: "00154 " + FiltDat IntvDat > Function Keys in Browse Mode + FiltDat IntvDat > First Last < Figure A-8. Interval Data screen. Interval Data Rec: 5674 Time: 10.35 96/11/07 Average Amb Temp: 17.2 C Average Filt Temp: 17.4 C Average Amb Pres: 760 mmHg Average Flow: 16.7 l/min -+ ++ FiltDat > Function Keys in Browse Mode -+ ++ FiltDat > First --+++ Last Output < APPENDIX A: OVERVIEW OF SCREENS PAGE A-4

Revision B.001 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler Figure A-9. Setup screen. Stat:Ok Setup Mode:SAMP Cur Time: 19.36.37 Def Start: 0.00 Cur Date: 96/11/07 Def Dur: 24.00 Set Flow: 16.7 l/min Std Temp: 99.9 Std Press: 99.9 FTS Const M: 0.0000 Soft Ver: 1.202 FTS Const B: 0.0000 Ser Num: 1001 Edit Calib Diag RS232 Audit > Function Keys in Browse Mode Edit Calib Diag RS232 Audit > Passwd < Function Keys in Edit Mode ---+ ++ Bksp > +/< Figure A-10. Calibration screen. Stat:Ok Calibration Mode:SAMP Calc Act Offset Span A/I: 0.000 0.000 0.0000 1.0000 A/O:0.00 AmbT: 23.2 0.0 0.0000 FltT: 23.6 0.0 0.0000 FTS Pres: Pres: 760 0 0.0000 0.00 Flow: 16.7 0.0 0.0000 1.0000 Edit FlowCal > Function Keys in Browse Mode Edit FlowCal > Edit Flow DecFlow HldFlow IncFlow < Function Keys in Edit Mode --+ ++ Bksp > +/< APPENDIX A: OVERVIEW OF SCREENS PAGE A-5

Revision B.001 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler Figure A-11. Flow Calibration screen. Flow Calibration Set Flow: 16.7 l/min Current Flow: 16.7 l/min Actual Flow: 16.7 l/min FTS Pres: 0.00 in H2O Press Start to begin flow calibration Flow Offset: 0.0000 Flow Span: 1.0000 Edit Start Abort Function Keys in Browse Mode Edit Start Abort Function Keys in Edit Mode --+ ++ Bksp > +/< Figure A-12. Diagnostics screen. Diagnostics Analog I/O Digital I/O Pres: 4.062 FltT: 3.019 Val:ON FnP:OFF InsT: 3.128 Aux1: 0.000 Aux:OFF Pmp:ON AmbT: 3.016 Aux2: 0.000 Aux:OFF Lcd:ON 3: 2.644 Flow: 3.991 FnF:ON Htr:OFF A/O1: 2.50 A/O2: 1.66 Rev: 1 Edit Off On Function Keys in Browse Mode Edit Off On Function Keys in Edit Mode --+ ++ Bksp APPENDIX A: OVERVIEW OF SCREENS PAGE A-6

Revision B.001 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler Figure A-13. RS232 Setup screen. RS232 Setup Baud Rate: 9600 Config: 8-N-1 XOn/XOff Cont: OFF AK Station: 52 "4" AK Channel: 75048 "K0" AK Append: 13010 Edit Function Keys in Browse Mode Edit Function Keys in Edit Mode -+ ++ Bksp Figure A-14. Audit screen. Audit Amb Temp: 25.4 C Amb Pres: 753 mm Hg Filt Temp: 25.6 C Sys Pres: N/A mm Hg FTS Pres: 0.00 in H2O Cur Flow: -0.3 l/min FTS Flow: 0.00 l/min Edit Valve Pump LeakCk APPENDIX A: OVERVIEW OF SCREENS PAGE A-7

Revision B.001 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler This page left intentionally blank. APPENDIX A: OVERVIEW OF SCREENS PAGE A-8

Revision B.001 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler Appendix B: Appendix B:Appendix B:Appendix B:Appendix B:Appendix B: Program Register Codes Program Register CodesProgram Register CodesProgram Register CodesProgram Regist er CodesProgram Register Codes This appendix contains a listing of the most important program register codes (P RCs) used in the software of the Partisol-FRM Sampler. The user would use these codes when using the hardware s two-way serial communication capability (Appendix D) to request the current value of variables, to change the value of certain system parameters, and to download data from the sampler s internal data logger. MAIN PROGRAM REGISTER CODES Code Description Units Range Default Re-Init Edit Modes 1 Software Version N/A N/A N/A N/A not editable 2 Serial Number N/A 0-1000000 N/A N/A anytime 3 Operating Mode Code* 0-1 0 0 not editable 4 Status Code Code* 0-511 0 0 not editable 7 Instrument Electronics Temperature C N/A N/A N/A not editable 8 Ambient Temperature C N/A N/A N/A not editable 9 Ambient Temperature (5-min average) C N/A N/A N/A not editable 10 Filter Temperature C N/A N/A N/A not editable 11 Filter Temperature (5-min average) C N/A N/A N/A not editable 12 Ambient Pressure mmHg N/A N/A N/A not editable 13 Ambient Pressure (5-min average) mmHg N/A N/A N/A not editable 14 Flow Rate Set Point l/min 0 - 20 16.7 16.7 Stop 15 Current Flow Rate l/min N/A N/A N/A not editable 16 Current Flow Rate (5-min average) l/min N/A N/A N/A not editable 17 Volume Sampled m N/A N/A N/A not editable 27 Default Start Time sec 0 - 86400 0 0 Stop 28 Default Duration sec 0 - 1.45E7 86400 86400 Stop 29 Start Time (sec since 70/1/1) sec 0 - 2.147E9 0 0 Stop 30 Stop Time (sec since 70/1/1) sec 0 - 2.147E9 0 0 Stop 38 Storage Download Type Code* 1 - 2 0 0 anytime * Codes are described later in this appendix. APPENDIX B: PROGRAM REGISTER CODES PAGE B-1

Revision B.001 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler Program register codes (PRCs) whose values are defined by codes are detailed bel ow. PRC 3: PRC 3:PRC 3:PRC 3:PRC 3:PRC 3: Operating Mode Operating ModeOperating ModeOperating ModeOperating ModeOperating Mode 0 1 2 3 5 STOP Stop WAIT Wait SAMP Sampling DONE Done ERR Error

PRC 4: PRC 4:PRC 4:PRC 4:PRC 4:PRC 4: Status Code Status CodeStatus CodeStatus CodeStatus CodeStatus Code 0 Ok No Status Conditions 0 &H1 F Flow Rate 1 &H2 X Flow Cutoff 2 &H4 S Ambient Temperature 4 &H8 P Ambient Pressure 8 &H10 T Filter Temperature 16 &H20 I Instrument Electronics Temperature 32 &H40 V Power Outage (Voltage) 64 &H80 E Elapsed Sampling Time 128 &H100 C Coefficient of Variation 256 The current status code is the sum of all conditions that currently apply. PRC 38: PRC 38:PRC 38:PRC 38:PRC 38:PRC 38: Storage Download Type Storage Download TypeStorage Download TypeStorage Download TypeStorage Download TypeStorage Download Type 1 Filter Data 2 Interval Data APPENDIX B: PROGRAM REGISTER CODES PAGE B-2

Revision B.000 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler Appendix Appendix Hardware Hardware C: C:Appendix C:Appendix C:Appendix C:Appendix C: Hardware Connections ConnectionsHardware ConnectionsHardware ConnectionsHardware Connections Connections

The Partisol-FRM Air Sampler contains two connectors for communicating analog and serial information with external devices: Figure C-1. Pin assign ments of user output User Output This 4-pin connector, located on the back panel of connector. the sampler, transmits an analog voltage level in accordance with the current flow rate and the exist

ence of any status conditions (Section 8). The pin layout, as viewed from the end of the connecting cable, is shown in Figure C-1 and is defined below: Pin Pin Pin Pin 1 2 3 4 Cable shield Ground Analog voltage (0-5 VDC) Not used

Each sampler is supplied with one cable connector for the 4-pin user output connector. Figure C-2 contains an assembly drawing that shows the internal construction of this connector. Figure C-2. Internal construction of 4-pin user output cable connector. APPENDIX C: HARDWARE CONNECTIONS PAGE C-1

Revision B.000 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler RS232 This 9-pin connector, located on the keypad panel of the sampler, allows for two-way serial communication between the sampler and an external device (Section 8). The nine pins in the RS232 connector are defined in the following manner (Figure C-3): Pin Pin Pin Pin Pin 1 2 3 4 5 CD Pin 6 DSR TXD Pin 7 RTS RXD Pin 8 Not used Not used Pin 9 Not used GND

The connection between the RS232 connector and a personal computer is accomplish ed using a straight 9-to-9 pin cable that R&P supplies as part of the sampler s basic configuration. Figure C-3. 9-Pin RS232 connector. APPENDIX C: HARDWARE CONNECTIONS PAGE C-2

Revision B.000 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler Appendix D: Appendix D:Appendix D:Appendix D:Appendix D:Appendix D: T TTTTTwo-W wo-Wwo-Wwo-Wwo-Wwo-Way Serial Communication ay Serial Communicationay Serial Communicationay Serial Communicationay Serial C ommunicationay Serial Communication The Partisol-FRM Sampler supports advanced two-way serial communication capabili ties through its implementation of the German automobile industry s AK Protocol. Refer to Section 8 for a description of the RS232 Setup screen, which determines the hardware and software communication parameters of the sampler. Section 7 describ es the fields downloaded when the user retrieves records from the filter data and i nterval data storage buffers using the ASTO command. D.1. D.1.D.1.D.1.D.1.D.1. AK P AK PAK PAK PAK PAK PROTOCOL ROTOCOLROTOCOLROTOCOLROTOCOLROTOCOL The AK Protocol for serial communication not only allows the user to query the present value of system variables remotely, but also permits the user to change the values of system variables and download information from the sampler s internal da ta logger. The AKCOMM software provided with the sampler uses this protocol for two way communication directly to a computer or through a modem. The following commands of the AK Protocol are presented in detail in the following pages: AREG Ask Register Command. This allows the user to query the Partisol-FRM Sampler for the current value of system variables (Program Register Codes, Appendix B). EREG Enter Register Command. This allows the user to assign a new value to any system variable. Great care must be exercised in using this command, as the value of variables should only be changed when the unit is in the appropriate operating mode. ASTO Ask Storage Command. This allows the user to download a specified number of records from the internal data logger, from the current position of the AK storage pointer. The initial location of this storage pointer is defined by the SSTO command. The values contained on each line of output are delimited by commas, and are described in detail in Section 7. SSTO Set Storage Command. This allows the user to change the location of the AK storage pointer in the internal data logger, and is used in conjunction with the ASTO command described above. The AK storage pointer is always located just following the last record transmitted through the RS-232 port via

the AK Protocol. If the circular buffer overwrites APPENDIX D: TWO-WAY SERIAL COMMUNICATION PAGE D-1

Revision B.000 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler this location or if the ASTO or SSTO commands have not been used, the AK storage pointer resides at the oldest record in the internal database. IMPORTANT NOTE: The Partisol-FRM Sampler contains two internal databases one for filter data and the other for interval data (Section 7). When downloading stored information using the ASTO and SSTO commands of the AK Protocol, the user must specify which database is to be accessed by setting the value of Program Register Code 38 (Appendix B) to either 1 for Filter data or 2 for Interval data. The following pages detail the format of the transmission and response messages of the commands listed above. APPENDIX D: TWO-WAY SERIAL COMMUNICATION PAGE D-2

Revision B.000 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................... AK Protocol Ask Register Command (AREG) ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................... COM 2-WAY SETTINGS AK Station 52 ASCII code for the 1-digit Station Number (for example "4": 052). The Station Number is always 1 digit in length. AK Chan 75048 ASCII code representation of the 2-digit Channel Number (for examp le: "K0": 075, 048). The Channel Number is always 2 digits in length. AK Append 13010 Optional: Up to 3 ASCII codes can be added to response from inst rument. In this case, <CR> and <LF> (ASCII codes 013 and 010) are appended to the response. Enter 0 if nothing is to be appended. Transmission to Instrument...................................................... ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................. Response from Instrument Byte Example Description B No Err Error Description 1 <STX> ASCII code 002. 1 <STX> <STX> ASCII code 002. 2 4 1-digit Station Number, AK Station. 2 4 4 1-digit Station Number, AK Station . 3 A Ask Register command. Enter the Program Register Code of the desired variable in bytes 21 to 23 below. 3 A A 4-digit Ask Register command. 4 R 4 R R 5 E 5 E E 6 G 6 G G 7 <space> Space. 7 <space> <space> Space. 8 K 2-digit Channel Number, as defined by AK Channel. 8 0 0 Number of current status conditions. 9 0 9 <space> <space> Space. 10 <space> Space. 10 4 S Program Register Code of the

variable whose value is being requested. The PRC may be 1 to 3 characters long, and is not right-filled in the response. 11 4 Program Register Code of the variable whose value is being requested. The PRC may be up to 3 digits long. Do not right-fill if the PRC is less than 3 characters long. 11 E 12 12 <ETX> 13 13 <space> <CR> Space. 14 <ETX> ASCII code 003. 14 3 <LF> Current value of the variable referenced by the Ask Register command. This can vary in length. 15 15 2 16 16 <ETX> ASCII code 003. 17 17 <CR> Up to 3 digits appended to the end of the response transmission, according to the entry for AK Append. 18 18 <LF> 19 19 APPENDIX D: TWO-WAY SERIAL COMMUNICATION PAGE D-3

Revision B.000 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................... AK Protocol Enter Register Command (EREG) ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................... COM 2-WAY SETTINGS AK Station 52 ASCII code for the 1-digit Station Number (for example "4": 052). The Station Number is always 1 digit in length. AK Chan 75048 ASCII code representation of the 2-digit Channel Number (for examp le: "K0": 075, 048). The Channel Number is always 2 digits in length. AK Append 13010 Optional: Up to 3 ASCII codes can be added to response from inst rument. In this case, <CR> and <LF> (ASCII codes 013 and 010) are appended to the response. Enter 0 if nothing is to be appended. ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ .................... Transmission to Instrument ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................... Response from Instrument Byte Example Description B No Err Error Description 1 <STX> ASCII code 002. 1 <STX> <STX> ASCII code 002. 2 4 1-digit Station Number, AK Station. 2 4 4 1-digit Station Number, AK Station . 3 E Enter Register command. Enter the Program Register Code in bytes 21 to 23 below, and the new value of the variable in bytes 15 and following. 3 E E 4-digit Enter Register command. 4 R 4 R R 5 E 5 E E 6 G 6 G G 7 <space> Space. 7 <space> <space> Space. 8 K 2-digit Channel Number, as defined by AK Channel.

8 0 0 Number of current status conditions. 9 0 9 <space> <space> Space. 10 <space> Space. 10 1 S Program Register Code of the variable whose value was entered. The PRC may be 1 to 3 characters long, and is not right-filled in the response. 11 1 Program Register Code of the variable whose value is being entered. The PRC may be up to 3 digits long. Do not right-fill if the PRC is less than 3 characters long. 11 4 E 12 4 12 <ETX> 13 13 <ETX> <CR> ASCII code 003 14 <space> Space. 14 <CR> <LF> Up to 3 digits appended to the end of the response transmission, according to the entry for AK Append. 15 1 New value to be entered for variable referenced by Program Register Code in bytes 11 to 13 above. NOTE: The value entered may be of varying length. 15 <LF> 16 6 16 17 . 17 18 7 18 19 <ETX> ASCII code 003. 19 APPENDIX D: TWO-WAY SERIAL COMMUNICATION PAGE D-4

Revision B.000 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................... AK Protocol Ask Storage Command (ASTO) ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................... COM 2-WAY SETTINGS AK Station 52 ASCII code for the 1-digit Station Number (for example "4": 052). The Station Number is always 1 digit in length. AK Chan 75048 ASCII code representation of the 2-digit Channel Number (for examp le: "K0": 075, 048). The Channel Number is always 2 digits in length. AK Append 13010 Optional: Up to 3 ASCII codes can be added to response from inst rument. In this case, <CR> and <LF> (ASCII codes 013 and 010) are appended to the response. Enter 0 if nothing is to be appended. ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ .................... Transmission to Instrument ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................... Response from Instrument Byte Example Description B No Err Error Description 1 <STX> ASCII code 002. 1 <STX> <STX> ASCII code 002. 2 4 1-digit Station Number, RS-Para 1. 2 4 4 1-digit Station Number, RS-Para 1. 3 A Ask Storage command. Enter the number of records to be downloaded from storage in bytes 11 to 13 below. 3 A A 4-digit Ask Storage command. 4 S 4 S S 5 T 5 T T 6 O 6 O O 7 <space> Space. 7 <space> <space> Space. 8 K 2-digit Channel Number, as defined by RS-Para 2. 8 0 0 Number of current status conditions. 9 0 9 <space> <space> Space.

10 <space> Space. 10 3 S Records to be downloaded from storage. This can be smaller than requested number due to end of file. Storage marker moved to after last record transmitted. Not right-filled. 11 5 The number of records to be downloaded from the instrument's storage. Downloading begins at the storage marker, which can be set using the SSTO command. 11 1 E 12 0 12 <ETX> 13 13 <ETX> <CR> ASCII code 003. 14 <ETX> ASCII code 003. 14 <CR> <LF> Up to 3 digits appended to the end of the response transmission, according to the entry for RS-Para 3. SET CURRENT DATA STORAGE BUFFER 15 <LF> 1 in PRC 38 2 in PRC 38 Filter Data Interval Data 16 The instrument then transmits the number of storage records shown in response bytes 10 to 12 above. Each record is followed by <CR><LF>. Refer to Section 7 for the format of the downloaded data records. APPENDIX D: TWO-WAY SERIAL COMMUNICATION PAGE D-5

Revision B.000 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................... AK Protocol Set Storage Marker Command (SSTO) ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................... COM 2-WAY SETTINGS AK Station 52 ASCII code for the 1-digit Station Number (for example "4": 052). The Station Number is always 1 digit in length. AK Chan 75048 ASCII code representation of the 2-digit Channel Number (for examp le: "K0": 075, 048). The Channel Number is always 2 digits in length. AK Append 13010 Optional: Up to 3 ASCII codes can be added to response from inst rument. In this case, <CR> and <LF> (ASCII codes 013 and 010) are appended to the response. Enter 0 if nothing is to be appended. ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ .................... Transmission to Instrument ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................... Response from Instrument Byte Example Description B No Err Error Description 1 <STX> ASCII code 002. 1 <STX> <STX> ASCII code 002. 2 4 1-digit Station Number, AK Station. 2 4 4 1-digit Station Number, AK Station . 3 S 4-digit Set Storage Marker command. 3 S S 4-digit Set Storage Marker command. 4 S 4 S S 5 T 5 T T 6 O 6 O O 7 <space> Space. 7 <space> <space> Space. 8 K 2-digit Channel Number, as defined by AK Channel. 8 0 0 Number of current status conditions. 9 0 9 <ETX> <space> ASCII code 003.

10 <space> Space. 10 <CR> S Up to 3 digits appended to the end of the response transmission, according to the entry for AK Append. 11 B New location of the Storage Marker. B: move to beginning of storage buffer, E: move to end of storage buffer. Enter positive numbers such as 250 to move forward by n records, and negative numbers such as -1000 to move backwards by n records. Do not right-fill. 11 <LF> E 12 12 <ETX> 13 13 <CR> 14 14 <LF> 15 15 16 <ETX> ASCII code 003. 16 17 17 18 18 19 19 APPENDIX D: TWO-WAY SERIAL COMMUNICATION PAGE D-6

Revision B.000 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................... AK Protocol Response if Command Addressed to Instrument is Unrecognizable ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................... COM 2-WAY SETTINGS AK Station 52 ASCII code for the 1-digit Station Number (for example "4": 052). The Station Number is always 1 digit in length. AK Chan 75048 ASCII code representation of the 2-digit Channel Number (for examp le: "K0": 075, 048). The Channel Number is always 2 digits in length. AK Append 13010 Optional: Up to 3 ASCII codes can be added to response from inst rument. In this case, <CR> and <LF> (ASCII codes 013 and 010) are appended to the response. Enter 0 if nothing is to be appended. ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ .................... Transmission to Instrument ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................... Response from Instrument Byte Example Description B No Err Error Description 1 1 <STX> ASCII code 002. 2 2 4 1-digit Station Number, AK Station. 3 3 ? Question marks inserted in place of unrecognized command. 4 4 ? 5 5 ? 6 6 ? 7 7 <space> Space. 8 8 0 Number of current status conditions. 9 9 <space> Space. 10 10 S Syntax error. 11 11 E 12 12 <ETX> ASCII code 003. 13 13 <CR> Up to 3 digits appended to the end of the response transmission,

according to the entry for AK Append. 14 14 <LF> 15 15 16 16 17 17 18 18 19 19 APPENDIX D: TWO-WAY SERIAL COMMUNICATION PAGE D-7

Revision B.000 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler This page left intentionally blank. APPENDIX D: TWO-WAY SERIAL COMMUNICATION PAGE D-8

Revision B.001 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler Appendix E: Appendix E:Appendix E:Appendix E:Appendix E:Appendix E: Installing New System So ftware Installing New System SoftwareInstalling New System SoftwareInstalling New Syste m SoftwareInstalling New System SoftwareInstalling New System Software The software that operates the Partisol-FRM Sampler is stored on a hardware component known as an electrically erasable, programmable read-only memory (EPROM) chip. Software upgrade kits, which include the EPROM and installation instructions, can be ordered from R&P with the following part number: Partisol-FRM EPROM upgrade kit 59-005146-0FRM Other equipment required to install the EPROM include a ground strap (R&P part # 13-002601) and EPROM extraction tool (R&P part #12-002579), which also can be ordered from R&P. Follow these steps to install new system software: Follow these steps to install new system software:Follow these steps to install new system software:Follow these steps to install new system software:Follow the se steps to install new system software:Follow these steps to install new system software: IMPORTANT: IMPORTANT:IMPORTANT:IMPORTANT:IMPORTANT:IMPORTANT: Be sure to download any impor tant data contained in the internal data logger before executing these steps. 1) 1)1)1)1)1) Attach one end of the ground strap around your wrist. Attach one end of the ground strap around your wrist.Attach one end of the groun d strap around your wrist.Attach one end of the ground strap around your wrist.A ttach one end of the ground strap around your wrist.Attach one end of the ground strap around your wrist. Attach the Attach theAttach theAttach theAttach theAttach the other end of the strap to a ground source such as the Partisol other end of the strap to a ground source such as the Partisolother end of the s trap to a ground source such as the Partisolother end of the strap to a ground s ource such as the Partisolother end of the strap to a ground source such as the Partisolother end of the strap to a ground source such as the Partisol enclosure. enclosure.enclosure.enclosure.enclosure.enclosure.

2) 2)2)2)2)2) Record the values in the Offset and Span columns of the Record the values in the Offset and Span columns of theRecord the values in the Offse t and Span columns of theRecord the values in the Offset and Span columns of theRecord the values in the Offset and Span columns of theRecord the values in the Offset and Sp n columns of the Calibration screen (Section 10). Calibration screen (Section 10).Calibration screen (Section 10).Calibration scre en (Section 10).Calibration screen (Section 10).Calibration screen (Section 10).

3) 3)3)3)3)3) With the system in its Stop Operating Mode, turn off the hub unit With the system in its Stop Operating Mode, turn off the hub unitWith the system in its Stop Operating Mode, turn off the hub unitWith the system in its Stop Op erating Mode, turn off the hub unitWith the system in its Stop Operating Mode, t urn off the hub unitWith the system in its Stop Operating Mode, turn off the hub unit at the power switch next to the keypad, and unplug the sampler. at the power switch next to the keypad, and unplug the sampler.at the power swit ch next to the keypad, and unplug the sampler.at the power switch next to the ke ypad, and unplug the sampler.at the power switch next to the keypad, and unplug the sampler.at the power switch next to the keypad, and unplug the sampler. 4) 4)4)4)4)4) Open the electrical compartment behind the keypad. Open the electrical compartment behind the keypad.Open the electrical compartmen t behind the keypad.Open the electrical compartment behind the keypad.Open the e lectrical compartment behind the keypad.Open the electrical compartment behind t he keypad. 5) 5)5)5)5)5) Locate the EPROM at position U3 on the computer board that is Locate the EPROM at position U3 on the computer board that isLocate the EPROM at p osition U3 on the computer board that isLocate the EPROM at position U3 on the compu ter board that isLocate the EPROM at position U3 on the computer board that isLoca te the EPROM at position U3 on the computer board that is mounted on the back wall of the electrical compartment (Figures mounted on the back wall of the electrical compartment (Figuresmounted on the ba ck wall of the electrical compartment (Figuresmounted on the back wall of the el ectrical compartment (Figuresmounted on the back wall of the electrical compartm ent (Figuresmounted on the back wall of the electrical compartment (Figures E-1 and E-2). E-1 and E-2).E-1 and E-2).E-1 and E-2).E-1 and E-2).E-1 and E-2). The chip will have a sticker attached to it stating its The chip will have a sticker attached to it stating itsThe chip will have a stic ker attached to it stating itsThe chip will have a sticker attached to it statin g itsThe chip will have a sticker attached to it stating itsThe chip will have a sticker attached to it stating its current software revision number. current software revision number.current software revision number.current softwa re revision number.current software revision number.current software revision nu mber. 6) 6)6)6)6)6) Using the chip extraction tool, grip the top and bottom of the old Using the chip extraction tool, grip the top and bottom of the oldUsing the chip extraction tool, grip the top and bottom of the oldUsing the chip extraction to ol, grip the top and bottom of the oldUsing the chip extraction tool, grip the t op and bottom of the oldUsing the chip extraction tool, grip the top and bottom of the old EPROM and pull outward. EPROM and pull outward.EPROM and pull outward.EPROM and pull outward.EPROM and p ull outward.EPROM and pull outward. Be sure to pull the EPROM out Be sure to pull the EPROM outBe sure to pull the EPROM outBe sure to pull the EP ROM outBe sure to pull the EPROM outBe sure to pull the EPROM out straight straightstraightstraightstraightstraight. Do not twist or turn the chip while ex tracting it from the . Do not twist or turn the chip while extracting it from the. Do not twist or tu rn the chip while extracting it from the. Do not twist or turn the chip while ex

tracting it from the. Do not twist or turn the chip while extracting it from the . Do not twist or turn the chip while extracting it from the board. board.board.board.board.board. 7) 7)7)7)7)7) Return the old EPROM chip to R&P with the appropriate return Return the old EPROM chip to R&P with the appropriate returnReturn the old EPROM chip to R&P with the appropriate returnReturn the old EPROM chip to R&P with th e appropriate returnReturn the old EPROM chip to R&P with the appropriate return Return the old EPROM chip to R&P with the appropriate return number indicated by the Service Department. number indicated by the Service Department.number indicated by the Service Depar tment.number indicated by the Service Department.number indicated by the Service Department.number indicated by the Service Department. 8) 8)8)8)8)8) Note the silk-screened outline of the EPROM on the computer Note the silk-screened outline of the EPROM on the computerNote the silk-screene d outline of the EPROM on the computerNote the silk-screened outline of the EPRO M on the computerNote the silk-screened outline of the EPROM on the computerNote the silk-screened outline of the EPROM on the computer board in the mounting location. board in the mounting location.board in the mounting location.board in the mount ing location.board in the mounting location.board in the mounting location. Note the position of the notch. Note the position of the notch.Note the position of the notch.Note the position of the notch.Note the position of the notch.Note the position of the notch. 9) 9)9)9)9)9) Examine the new EPROM and locate its notch. Examine the new EPROM and locate its notch.Examine the new EPROM and locate its notch.Examine the new EPROM and locate its notch.Examine the new EPROM and locat e its notch.Examine the new EPROM and locate its notch. 10) 10)10)10)10)10) Line up the notch on the EPROM and the silk-screened notch on Line up the notch on the EPROM and the silk-screened notch onLine up the notch o n the EPROM and the silk-screened notch onLine up the notch on the EPROM and the silk-screened notch onLine up the notch on the EPROM and the silk-screened notc h onLine up the notch on the EPROM and the silk-screened notch on the board. the board.the board.the board.the board.the board. The notch should face The notch should faceThe notch should faceThe notch should faceThe notch should faceThe notch should face downward. downward.downward.downward.downward.downward. Press the new Press the newPress the newPress the newPress the newPress the new EPROM into this position. EPROM into this position.EPROM into this position.EPROM into this position.EPROM into this position.EPROM into this position. APPENDIX E: INSTALLING NEW SYSTEM SOFTWARE PAGE E-1

Revision B.001 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler Figure E-1. Location of the EPROM (A) on the computer board. Figure E-2. Drawing of computer board, displaying the location of U3. 11) 11)11)11)11)11) Return power to the hardware. Return power to the hardware.Return power to the hardware.Return power to the ha rdware.Return power to the hardware.Return power to the hardware. 12) 12)12)12)12)12) Press SW1 on the CPU board and then <F3> Press SW1 on the CPU board and then <F3>Press SW1 on the CPU board and then <F3> Press SW1 on the CPU board and then <F3>Press SW1 on the CPU board and then <F3> Press SW1 on the CPU board and then <F3> twice twicetwicetwicetwicetwice when the Title when the Titlewhen the Titlewhen the Titlewhen the Titlewhen the Title screen appears to reset the Partisol Sampler, including its interscreen appears to reset the Partisol Sampler, including its inter-screen appears to reset the Partisol Sampler, including its inter-screen appears to reset the Partisol Sampler, including its inter-screen appears to reset the Partisol Sampl er, including its inter-screen appears to reset the Partisol Sampler, including its internal data logger. nal data logger.nal data logger.nal data logger.nal data logger.nal data logger. APPENDIX E: INSTALLING NEW SYSTEM SOFTWARE PAGE E-2

Revision B.001 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler 13) 13)13)13)13)13) Enter the values recorded in step 2 above in the Calibration Enter the values recorded in step 2 above in the CalibrationEnter the values rec orded in step 2 above in the CalibrationEnter the values recorded in step 2 abov e in the CalibrationEnter the values recorded in step 2 above in the Calibration Enter the values recorded in step 2 above in the Calibration screen (Section 10). screen (Section 10).screen (Section 10).screen (Section 10).screen (Section 10). screen (Section 10). 14) 14)14)14)14)14) Enter the appropriate system parameters in the Setup screen Enter the appropriate system parameters in the Setup screenEnter the appropriate system parameters in the Setup screenEnter the appropriate system parameters in the Setup screenEnter the appropriate system parameters in the Setup screenEnte r the appropriate system parameters in the Setup screen (Section 4). (Section 4).(Section 4).(Section 4).(Section 4).(Section 4). APPENDIX E: INSTALLING NEW SYSTEM SOFTWARE PAGE E-3

Revision B.001 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler This page left intentionally blank. APPENDIX E: INSTALLING NEW SYSTEM SOFTWARE PAGE E-4

Revision B.001 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler Appendix F: Appendix F:Appendix F:Appendix F:Appendix F:Appendix F: Consumables and Parts Consumables and PartsConsumables and PartsConsumables and PartsConsumables and P artsConsumables and Parts This section contains the parts and accessories for the Partisol-FRM Sampler. F.1. F.1.F.1.F.1.F.1.F.1. C CCCCCONSUMABLES ONSUMABLESONSUMABLESONSUMABLESONSUMABLESONSUMABLES Teflon filters, 2.0 m pore size, box of 50 10-002322-0050 Single filter carrier 55-004847 Dual-filter transport container 20-004996 Partisol-FRM filter cassette for 47 mm filters 59-004648-0001 5 Partisol-FRM filter cassettes for 47 mm filters 59-004648-0005 10 Partisol-FRM filter cassettes for 47 mm filters 59-004648-0010 Filter cassette screens, package of 5 30-005147-0005 Solid filter leak check/separator disk 36-004768 Tweezers 30-002566 Filter cassette separator tool 38-004892 Inlets and Accessories WINS PM-2.5 impactor 57-004006 Impactor assembly 55-004289 WINS O-ring, 2 3/8" ID x 2 1/2 OD x 1/16", BUNA 22-0002853-3036 Box of 25 glass fiber filters, 37 mm 32-004294 Bottle of WINS impactor oil, 30 ml 59-004292 Bottle of WINS impactor oil, 100 ml 59-004792-0100 PM-10 inlet 57-004742 PM-10 inlet O-ring 22-00485-1026 1 1/4" ID x 1 3/8" OD x 1/16", BUNA PM-10 inlet O-ring 22-000485-1036 2 3/8" ID x 2 1/2" OD x 1/16", BUNA Aside from the 47 mm collection filters and 37 mm WINS impactor filters used in the Partisol-FRM Sampler, the only regular consumable item in the hardware is the la rge in-line filter located in the pump compartment. This item should be exchanged ev ery six months. Large in-line filter 32-002643 The batteries on the computer board at the back of the electronics compartment m ust be exchanged as needed. The computer board uses a 25 mm diameter round battery (Panasonic CR2330) and a socket battery at location U4 (Dallas Semiconductor DS1213C). Round battery for computer board 06-002545 Battery for socket at U4 06-002565

APPENDIX F: CONSUMABLES AND PARTS PAGE F-1

Revision B.001 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler Perform the following procedures to check these batteries: 1. Measure the voltage across the ground ( GND ) test point in the center of the interface board and the top surface of the round battery on the computer board. This voltage should be at least 2.5 VDC. 2. Measure the voltage across pins 14 and 28 on U4 for part number 06002565. This voltage should be at least 2.5 VDC. APPENDIX F: CONSUMABLES AND PARTS PAGE F-2

Revision B.001 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler F.2. F.2.F.2.F.2.F.2.F.2. P PPPPPARTS ARTSARTSARTSARTSARTS Basic Hardware Dome connector for sample tube 13-004300 Viton upper cassette seal 22-002680 Lower cassette seal 22-004276 Power switch 04-002649 Cooling fan 10-002251 Foam fan covers 10-003092 Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) 10-002254 Rubber foot 33-002262 Sample tube 36-004293 Power line filter 02-002400 Transformer 03-002402 Interface board 50-003709 Computer board 50-002407 Standard Partisol pump, 120 VAC 10-002418 Standard Partisol pump, 240 VAC 10-002452 Partisol pump rebuild kit (2 required) 59-002642 Solenoid valve 59-002456 Flow control assembly 55-002663 Streamline FTS 57-004506 Streamline FTS with manometer 57-004506-001 Flow audit adapter 57-000618 Accumulator assembly 55-002555 Ambient temperature sensor package 59-002640 Latch for filter exchange mechanism 33-004221 Large rain hood 38-004011 Gasket for large rain hood 33-004201 Small rain hood 36-003817 Gasket for small rain hood 33-002371 AKCOMM software diskette 41-004001 Connectors and Cables 9-to-9 pin RS-232 cable 07-000587 9-pin D connector 06-000590-0009 Shell for 9-pin D connector 06-000592-0009 9-to-25 pin serial adapter 51-001079 4-pin cable connector 06-002453 Analog input calibration cable 51-004282 APPENDIX F: CONSUMABLES AND PARTS PAGE F-3

Revision B.001 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler Manuals Partisol-FRM Operating Manual 42-004298 Partisol-FRM Service Manual 42-004278 Partisol-FRM Quick Start Guide 42-004299 Other Products Support stand 57-004644 Partisol-FRM EPROM software revision kit 59-004302 Insulating jacket 10-004359 APPENDIX F: CONSUMABLES AND PARTS PAGE F-4

Revision B.000 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler Appendix G: Appendix G:Appendix G:Appendix G:Appendix G:Appendix G: Filter Log Filter LogFilter LogFilter LogFilter LogFilter Log This appendix contains a filter log to keep track of all important readings asso ciated with each exposed filter. R&P encourages users to make photocopies of the form o r to use a similar format. APPENDIX G: FILTER LOG PAGE G-1

Revision B.000 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler Filter LogR&P Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air SamplerFilterNumber InitialConditioning Initial Weighing Filter Exposure Post-CollectionConditioning Post-Collection Weighing DWW(F)-W(I) ConcentrationDWx10^6/VolumeConditions Weights Conditions ExposurePeriod Exposure Stats Conditions Weights Conditions RH: Temp: Date: Time: W1: W2: W3: W(I): RH: Temp: Date: Time: Val Time: Tot Time: Volume: RH: Temp: Date: Time: W1: W2: W3: W(F): RH: Temp: Date: Time: RH: Temp: Date: Time: W1: W2: W3: W(I): RH: Temp: Date: Time: Val Time: Tot Time: Volume: RH: Temp: Date: Time: W1:

W2: W3: W(F): RH: Temp: Date: Time: RH: Temp: Date: Time: W1: W2: W3: W(I): RH: Temp: Date: Time: Val Time: Tot Time: Volume: RH: Temp: Date: Time: W1: W2: W3: W(F): RH: Temp: Date: Time: RH: Temp: Date: Time: W1: W2: W3: W(I): RH: Temp: Date: Time: Val Time: Tot Time: Volume: RH: Temp: Date: Time: W1: W2: W3: W(F): RH: Temp: Date:

Time: RH: Temp: Date: Time: W1: W2: W3: W(I): RH: Temp: Date: Time: Val Time: Tot Time: Volume: RH: Temp: Date: Time: W1: W2: W3: W(F): RH: Temp: Date: Time: RH: Temp: Date: Time: W1: W2: W3: W(I): RH: Temp: Date: Time: Val Time: Tot Time: Volume: RH: Temp: Date: Time: W1: W2: W3: W(F): RH: Temp: Date: Time: RH: Temp: Date: Time: W1:

W2: W3: W(I): RH: Temp: Date: Time: Val Time: Tot Time: Volume: RH: Temp: Date: Time: W1: W2: W3: W(F): RH: Temp: Date: Time: RH: Temp: Date: Time: W1: W2: W3: W(I): RH: Temp: Date: Time: Val Time: Tot Time: Volume: RH: Temp: Date: Time: W1: W2: W3: W(F): RH: Temp: Date: Time: APPENDIX G: FILTER LOG PAGE G-2

Revision B.001 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler Appendix H: Appendix H:Appendix H:Appendix H:Appendix H:Appendix H: Inlet Maintenance Inlet MaintenanceInlet MaintenanceInlet MaintenanceInlet MaintenanceInlet Mainte nance This appendix contains the maintenance procedures for the PM-10 inlet and the PM 2.5 WINS impactor used in the Partisol-FRM Sampler. H.1. H.1.H.1.H.1.H.1.H.1. M MMMMMAINTENANCE AINTENANCEAINTENANCEAINTENANCEAINTENANCEAINTENANCE OF OFOFOFOFOF PM-10 I PM-10 IPM-10 IPM-10 IPM-10 IPM-10 INLET NLETNLETNLETNLETNLET Recommended Supplies for Maintenance Alcohol or ammonia-based, general-purpose cleaner Cotton swabs Small soft-bristle brush Paper towels Distilled water Silicone-based, stopcock grease. Recommended Tools for Maintenance Small Philips-blade screwdriver Small crescent wrench Pocket knife. Maintenance Frequency R&P recommends that the user remove and clean the PM-10 inlet, and check its Oring after every 14 days of inlet usage. H.1.1. H.1.1.H.1.1.H.1.1.H.1.1.H.1.1. R RRRRREMOVING EMOVINGEMOVINGEMOVINGEMOVINGEMOVING THE THETHETHETHETHE PM-10 I PM-10 IPM-10 IPM-10 IPM-10 IPM-10 INLET NLETNLETNLETNLETNLET Follow these steps to remove the PM-10 inlet from the sampler: Follow these steps to remove the PM-10 inlet from the sampler:Follow these steps to remove the PM-10 inlet from the sampler:Follow these steps to remove the PM10 inlet from the sampler:Follow these steps to remove the PM-10 inlet from the sampler:Follow these steps to remove the PM-10 inlet from the sampler: 1) 1)1)1)1)1) Lift the PM-10 inlet upward off the aluminum sample inlet tube. Lift the PM-10 inlet upward off the aluminum sample inlet tube.Lift the PM-10 in let upward off the aluminum sample inlet tube.Lift the PM-10 inlet upward off th e aluminum sample inlet tube.Lift the PM-10 inlet upward off the aluminum sample inlet tube.Lift the PM-10 inlet upward off the aluminum sample inlet tube. 2)

2)2)2)2)2) Disassemble the upper and lower inlet halves by unscrewing Disassemble the upper and lower inlet halves by unscrewingDisassemble the upper and lower inlet halves by unscrewingDisassemble the upper and lower inlet halves by unscrewingDisassemble the upper and lower inlet halves by unscrewingDisassem ble the upper and lower inlet halves by unscrewing counterclockwise the top acceleration assembly from the lower counterclockwise the top acceleration assembly from the lowercounterclockwise th e top acceleration assembly from the lowercounterclockwise the top acceleration assembly from the lowercounterclockwise the top acceleration assembly from the l owercounterclockwise the top acceleration assembly from the lower collector assembly (Figure H-1). collector assembly (Figure H-1).collector assembly (Figure H-1).collector assemb ly (Figure H-1).collector assembly (Figure H-1).collector assembly (Figure H-1). APPENDIX H: MAINTENANCE OF INLETS PAGE H-1

Revision B.001 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler Figure H-1. Main sections of the PM-10 inlet. APPENDIX H: MAINTENANCE OF INLETS PAGE H-2

Revision B.001 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler H.1.2. H.1.2.H.1.2.H.1.2.H.1.2.H.1.2. M MMMMMAINTAINING AINTAININGAINTAININGAINTAININGAINTAININGAINTAINING THE THETHETHETHETHE T TTTTTOP OPOPOPOPOP A AAAAACCELERATION CCELERATIONCCELERATIONCCELERATIONCCELERATIONCCELERATION A AAAAASSEMBLY SSEMBLYSSEMBLYSSEMBLYSSEMBLYSSEMBLY Follow these steps to maintain the top acceleration assembly: Follow these steps to maintain the top acceleration assembly:Follow these steps to maintain the top acceleration assembly:Follow these steps to maintain the top acceleration assembly:Follow these steps to maintain the top acceleration assem bly:Follow these steps to maintain the top acceleration assembly: 1) 1)1)1)1)1) Mark the top plate deflector cone and lower plate with a pencil Mark the top plate deflector cone and lower plate with a pencilMark the top plat e deflector cone and lower plate with a pencilMark the top plate deflector cone and lower plate with a pencilMark the top plate deflector cone and lower plate w ith a pencilMark the top plate deflector cone and lower plate with a pencil scribe to indicate proper orientation for easier reassembly after scribe to indicate proper orientation for easier reassembly afterscribe to indic ate proper orientation for easier reassembly afterscribe to indicate proper orie ntation for easier reassembly afterscribe to indicate proper orientation for eas ier reassembly afterscribe to indicate proper orientation for easier reassembly after cleaning and maintenance. cleaning and maintenance.cleaning and maintenance.cleaning and maintenance.clean ing and maintenance.cleaning and maintenance. 2) 2)2)2)2)2) Using a Philips-blade screwdriver, remove the four pan head Using a Philips-blade screwdriver, remove the four pan headUsing a Philips-blade screwdriver, remove the four pan headUsing a Philips-blade screwdriver, remove the four pan headUsing a Philips-blade screwdriver, remove the four pan headUsin g a Philips-blade screwdriver, remove the four pan head screws from the top of the top plate, and lift the top plate off the screws from the top of the top plate, and lift the top plate off thescrews from the top of the top plate, and lift the top plate off thescrews from the top of t he top plate, and lift the top plate off thescrews from the top of the top plate , and lift the top plate off thescrews from the top of the top plate, and lift t he top plate off the four threaded spacer standoffs and set aside. four threaded spacer standoffs and set aside.four threaded spacer standoffs and set aside.four threaded spacer standoffs and set aside.four threaded spacer stan doffs and set aside.four threaded spacer standoffs and set aside. 3) 3)3)3)3)3) Inspect the insect screen for contamination and clean Inspect the insect screen for contamination and cleanInspect the insect screen f or contamination and cleanInspect the insect screen for contamination and cleanI nspect the insect screen for contamination and cleanInspect the insect screen fo

r contamination and clean by lifting by liftingby liftingby liftingby liftingby lifting the thethethethethe screen off the lower plate rain deflector and brush or rinse screen off the lower plate rain deflector and brush or rinsescreen off the lower plate rain deflector and brush or rinsescreen off the lower plate rain deflecto r and brush or rinsescreen off the lower plate rain deflector and brush or rinse screen off the lower plate rain deflector and brush or rinse with water until clean. Dry and reinstall. with water until clean. Dry and reinstall.with water until clean. Dry and reinst all.with water until clean. Dry and reinstall.with water until clean. Dry and re install.with water until clean. Dry and reinstall. 4) 4)4)4)4)4) Using a general-purpose cleaner and paper towel, clean the top Using a general-purpose cleaner and paper towel, clean the topUsing a general-pu rpose cleaner and paper towel, clean the topUsing a general-purpose cleaner and paper towel, clean the topUsing a general-purpose cleaner and paper towel, clean the topUsing a general-purpose cleaner and paper towel, clean the top plate deflector cone and internal wall surface of the acceleration plate deflector cone and internal wall surface of the accelerationplate deflecto r cone and internal wall surface of the accelerationplate deflector cone and int ernal wall surface of the accelerationplate deflector cone and internal wall sur face of the accelerationplate deflector cone and internal wall surface of the ac celeration assembly. assembly.assembly.assembly.assembly.assembly. NOTE: Be sure that after cleaning the acceleration nozzle is clean. If not, use a cotton swab and cleaner to remove contamination. 5) 5)5)5)5)5) Inspect the large diameter impactor nozzle O-ring for wear. ReInspect the large diameter impactor nozzle O-ring for wear. Re-Inspect the large diameter impactor nozzle O-ring for wear. Re-Inspect the large diameter impacto r nozzle O-ring for wear. Re-Inspect the large diameter impactor nozzle O-ring f or wear. Re-Inspect the large diameter impactor nozzle O-ring for wear. Replace, if necessary, or using a light coating of silicone grease, place, if necessary, or using a light coating of silicone grease,place, if neces sary, or using a light coating of silicone grease,place, if necessary, or using a light coating of silicone grease,place, if necessary, or using a light coating of silicone grease,place, if necessary, or using a light coating of silicone gr ease, apply a thin film on the O-ring itself, and likewise a light coating apply a thin film on the O-ring itself, and likewise a light coatingapply a thin film on the O-ring itself, and likewise a light coatingapply a thin film on the O-ring itself, and likewise a light coatingapply a thin film on the O-ring itse lf, and likewise a light coatingapply a thin film on the O-ring itself, and like wise a light coating on the aluminum threads of the acceleration assembly. on the aluminum threads of the acceleration assembly.on the aluminum threads of the acceleration assembly.on the aluminum threads of the acceleration assembly.o n the aluminum threads of the acceleration assembly.on the aluminum threads of t he acceleration assembly. 6) 6)6)6)6)6) After reinstalling the insect screen, align the top plate markings After reinstalling the insect screen, align the top plate markingsAfter reinstal ling the insect screen, align the top plate markingsAfter reinstalling the insec

t screen, align the top plate markingsAfter reinstalling the insect screen, alig n the top plate markingsAfter reinstalling the insect screen, align the top plat e markings with the lower plate markings. The four holes in the top plate with the lower plate markings. The four holes in the top platewith the lower pla te markings. The four holes in the top platewith the lower plate markings. The f our holes in the top platewith the lower plate markings. The four holes in the t op platewith the lower plate markings. The four holes in the top plate should align with the four spacer standoffs. Insert and securely should align with the four spacer standoffs. Insert and securelyshould align wit h the four spacer standoffs. Insert and securelyshould align with the four space r standoffs. Insert and securelyshould align with the four spacer standoffs. Ins ert and securelyshould align with the four spacer standoffs. Insert and securely tighten the four pan-head screws. tighten the four pan-head screws.tighten the four pan-head screws.tighten the fo ur pan-head screws.tighten the four pan-head screws.tighten the four pan-head sc rews. APPENDIX H: MAINTENANCE OF INLETS PAGE H-3

Revision B.001 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler H.1.3. H.1.3.H.1.3.H.1.3.H.1.3.H.1.3. M MMMMMAINTAINING AINTAININGAINTAININGAINTAININGAINTAININGAINTAINING THE THETHETHETHETHE L LLLLLOWER OWEROWEROWEROWEROWER C CCCCCOLLECTOR OLLECTOROLLECTOROLLECTOROLLECTOROLLECTOR A AAAAASSEMBLY SSEMBLYSSEMBLYSSEMBLYSSEMBLYSSEMBLY Follow these steps to maintain the lower collector assembly: Follow these steps to maintain the lower collector assembly:Follow these steps t o maintain the lower collector assembly:Follow these steps to maintain the lower collector assembly:Follow these steps to maintain the lower collector assembly: Follow these steps to maintain the lower collector assembly: NOTE: Most of the contamination in the inlet generally will be found on the collector plate. 1) 1)1)1)1)1) Using a general-purpose cleaner with a paper towel, clean the Using a general-purpose cleaner with a paper towel, clean theUsing a general-pur pose cleaner with a paper towel, clean theUsing a general-purpose cleaner with a paper towel, clean theUsing a general-purpose cleaner with a paper towel, clean theUsing a general-purpose cleaner with a paper towel, clean the collector assembly walls and three vent tubes. You may need to collector assembly walls and three vent tubes. You may need tocollector assembly walls and three vent tubes. You may need tocollector assembly walls and three v ent tubes. You may need tocollector assembly walls and three vent tubes. You may need tocollector assembly walls and three vent tubes. You may need to use a cotton swab to clean the vent tubes. use a cotton swab to clean the vent tubes.use a cotton swab to clean the vent tu bes.use a cotton swab to clean the vent tubes.use a cotton swab to clean the ven t tubes.use a cotton swab to clean the vent tubes. 2) 2)2)2)2)2) Clean the bottom side of the collector assembly. Clean the bottom side of the collector assembly.Clean the bottom side of the col lector assembly.Clean the bottom side of the collector assembly.Clean the bottom side of the collector assembly.Clean the bottom side of the collector assembly. 3) 3)3)3)3)3) Using a cotton swab, clean the weep hole in the collector plate Using a cotton swab, clean the weep hole in the collector plateUsing a cotton sw ab, clean the weep hole in the collector plateUsing a cotton swab, clean the wee p hole in the collector plateUsing a cotton swab, clean the weep hole in the col lector plateUsing a cotton swab, clean the weep hole in the collector plate where the moisture runs into the moisture trap. where the moisture runs into the moisture trap.where the moisture runs into the moisture trap.where the moisture runs into the moisture trap.where the moisture runs into the moisture trap.where the moisture runs into the moisture trap.

4) 4)4)4)4)4) Remove the rain jar and clean it. Remove the rain jar and clean it.Remove the rain jar and clean it.Remove the rai n jar and clean it.Remove the rain jar and clean it.Remove the rain jar and clea n it. 5) 5)5)5)5)5) Inspect the brass nipple fitting on the rain jar to ensure tightness Inspect the brass nipple fitting on the rain jar to ensure tightnessInspect the brass nipple fitting on the rain jar to ensure tightnessInspect the brass nipple fitting on the rain jar to ensure tightnessInspect the brass nipple fitting on the rain jar to ensure tightnessInspect the brass nipple fitting on the rain jar to ensure tightness and non-blockage. and non-blockage.and non-blockage.and non-blockage.and non-blockage.and non-bloc kage. 6) 6)6)6)6)6) Place a light coating of silicone grease on the cork gasket inside Place a light coating of silicone grease on the cork gasket insidePlace a light coating of silicone grease on the cork gasket insidePlace a light coating of sil icone grease on the cork gasket insidePlace a light coating of silicone grease o n the cork gasket insidePlace a light coating of silicone grease on the cork gas ket inside the cap of the rain jar. the cap of the rain jar.the cap of the rain jar.the cap of the rain jar.the cap of the rain jar.the cap of the rain jar. 7) 7)7)7)7)7) Reinstall the rain jar onto the lower collector assembly. Reinstall the rain jar onto the lower collector assembly.Reinstall the rain jar onto the lower collector assembly.Reinstall the rain jar onto the lower collecto r assembly.Reinstall the rain jar onto the lower collector assembly.Reinstall th e rain jar onto the lower collector assembly. 8) 8)8)8)8)8) Inspect the two inlet-to-inlet tube sealing O-rings for wear. ReInspect the two inlet-to-inlet tube sealing O-rings for wear. Re-Inspect the two inlet-to-inlet tube sealing O-rings for wear. Re-Inspect the two inlet-to-inlet tube sealing O-rings for wear. Re-Inspect the two inlet-to-inlet tube sealing O -rings for wear. Re-Inspect the two inlet-to-inlet tube sealing O-rings for wear . Replace, if necessary. place, if necessary.place, if necessary.place, if necessary.place, if necessary. place, if necessary. 9) 9)9)9)9)9) Plase a light coating of silicone grease on the two inlet-to-inlet Plase a light coating of silicone grease on the two inlet-to-inletPlase a light coating of silicone grease on the two inlet-to-inletPlase a light coating of sil icone grease on the two inlet-to-inletPlase a light coating of silicone grease o n the two inlet-to-inletPlase a light coating of silicone grease on the two inle t-to-inlet tube sealing O-rings to ensure that a proper seal is made when tube sealing O-rings to ensure that a proper seal is made whentube sealing O-rin gs to ensure that a proper seal is made whentube sealing O-rings to ensure that a proper seal is made whentube sealing O-rings to ensure that a proper seal is m ade whentube sealing O-rings to ensure that a proper seal is made when

the PM-10 inlet is reinstalled on the sample inlet tube. the PM-10 inlet is reinstalled on the sample inlet tube.the PM-10 inlet is reins talled on the sample inlet tube.the PM-10 inlet is reinstalled on the sample inl et tube.the PM-10 inlet is reinstalled on the sample inlet tube.the PM-10 inlet is reinstalled on the sample inlet tube. 10 1010101010) ))))) Clean the threads on the top and bottom inlet assemblies. Clean the threads on the top and bottom inlet assemblies.Clean the threads on th e top and bottom inlet assemblies.Clean the threads on the top and bottom inlet assemblies.Clean the threads on the top and bottom inlet assemblies.Clean the th reads on the top and bottom inlet assemblies. 11) 11)11)11)11)11) Reassemble the top and bottom inlet assemblies until the Reassemble the top and bottom inlet assemblies until theReassemble the top and b ottom inlet assemblies until theReassemble the top and bottom inlet assemblies u ntil theReassemble the top and bottom inlet assemblies until theReassemble the t op and bottom inlet assemblies until the t ttttthreads hreadshreadshreadshreadshreads tighten. Hand-tighten only. tighten. Hand-tighten only.tighten. Hand-tighten only.tighten. Hand-tighten only .tighten. Hand-tighten only.tighten. Hand-tighten only. 12 1212121212) ))))) Place the PM-10 inlet back on top of the sample inlet tube. Take Place the PM-10 inlet back on top of the sample inlet tube. TakePlace the PM-10 inlet back on top of the sample inlet tube. TakePlace the PM-10 inlet back on to p of the sample inlet tube. TakePlace the PM-10 inlet back on top of the sample inlet tube. TakePlace the PM-10 inlet back on top of the sample inlet tube. Take care not to damage the internal O-rings. care not to damage the internal O-rings.care not to damage the internal O-rings. care not to damage the internal O-rings.care not to damage the internal O-rings. care not to damage the internal O-rings. NOTE: For further information or parts, please contact R&P, its distributors or representatives. APPENDIX H: MAINTENANCE OF INLETS PAGE H-4

Revision B.001 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler H.2. H.2.H.2.H.2.H.2.H.2. M MMMMMAINTENANCE AINTENANCEAINTENANCEAINTENANCEAINTENANCEAINTENANCE OF OFOFOFOFOF THE THETHETHETHETHE PM-2.5 WINS I PM-2.5 WINS IPM-2.5 WINS IPM-2.5 WINS IPM-2.5 WINS IPM-2.5 WINS IMPACTOR MPACTORMPACTORMPACTORMPACTORMPACTOR The procedures below describe the removal, cleaning, and reinstallation of the P M 2.5 WINS impactor. H.2.1. H.2.1.H.2.1.H.2.1.H.2.1.H.2.1. R RRRRREMOVING EMOVINGEMOVINGEMOVINGEMOVINGEMOVING THE THETHETHETHETHE WINS I WINS IWINS IWINS IWINS IWINS IMPACTOR MPACTORMPACTORMPACTORMPACTORMPACTOR Follow these steps to remove the WINS impactor from the sampler: Follow these steps to remove the WINS impactor from the sampler:Follow these ste ps to remove the WINS impactor from the sampler:Follow these steps to remove the WINS impactor from the sampler:Follow these steps to remove the WINS impactor f rom the sampler:Follow these steps to remove the WINS impactor from the sampler: 1) 1)1)1)1)1) Open the door of the Partisol-FRM Sampler. Open the door of the Partisol-FRM Sampler.Open the door of the Partisol-FRM Samp ler.Open the door of the Partisol-FRM Sampler.Open the door of the Partisol-FRM Sampler.Open the door of the Partisol-FRM Sampler. 2) 2)2)2)2)2) Open the filter exchange mechanism by pulling on its handle Open the filter exchange mechanism by pulling on its handleOpen the filter excha nge mechanism by pulling on its handleOpen the filter exchange mechanism by pull ing on its handleOpen the filter exchange mechanism by pulling on its handleOpen the filter exchange mechanism by pulling on its handle (Figures H-2 and H-3). (Figures H-2 and H-3).(Figures H-2 and H-3).(Figures H-2 and H-3).(Figures H-2 a nd H-3).(Figures H-2 and H-3). Figure H-2. Grasping the handle of the filter exchange mechanism. Figure H-3. Pulling backward on the handle of the filter exchange mechanism. APPENDIX H: MAINTENANCE OF INLETS PAGE H-5

Revision B.001 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler 3) 3)3)3)3)3) Release the handle and allow it to drop down. Release the handle and allow it to drop down.Release the handle and allow it to drop down.Release the handle and allow it to drop down.Release the handle and al low it to drop down.Release the handle and allow it to drop down. 4 44444) ))))) Remove the filter cassette carrier from the filter platform (Figure Remove the filter cassette carrier from the filter platform (FigureRemove the fi lter cassette carrier from the filter platform (FigureRemove the filter cassette carrier from the filter platform (FigureRemove the filter cassette carrier from the filter platform (FigureRemove the filter cassette carrier from the filter p latform (Figure H-4). H-4).H-4).H-4).H-4).H-4). Figure H-4. Removing the filter cassette carrier from the filter platform. 5 55555) ))))) Push the filter exchange mechanism toward the back slightly, and Push the filter exchange mechanism toward the back slightly, andPush the filter exchange mechanism toward the back slightly, andPush the filter exchange mechani sm toward the back slightly, andPush the filter exchange mechanism toward the ba ck slightly, andPush the filter exchange mechanism toward the back slightly, and lift the rollers through the slots in the left-hand and right-hand lift the rollers through the slots in the left-hand and right-handlift the rolle rs through the slots in the left-hand and right-handlift the rollers through the slots in the left-hand and right-handlift the rollers through the slots in the left-hand and right-handlift the rollers through the slots in the left-hand and right-hand guides (Figure H-5). guides (Figure H-5).guides (Figure H-5).guides (Figure H-5).guides (Figure H-5). guides (Figure H-5). Figure H-5. Lifting the rollers through the guide slots. 6 66666) ))))) Allow the filter platform to settle downward, and remove the WINS Allow the filter platform to settle downward, and remove the WINSAllow the filte r platform to settle downward, and remove the WINSAllow the filter platform to s ettle downward, and remove the WINSAllow the filter platform to settle downward, and remove the WINSAllow the filter platform to settle downward, and remove the WINS impactor and adapter. impactor and adapter.impactor and adapter.impactor and adapter.impactor and adap

ter.impactor and adapter. 7 77777) ))))) Separate the adapter from the WINS impactor (Figure H-6). Separate the adapter from the WINS impactor (Figure H-6).Separate the adapter fr om the WINS impactor (Figure H-6).Separate the adapter from the WINS impactor (F igure H-6).Separate the adapter from the WINS impactor (Figure H-6).Separate the adapter from the WINS impactor (Figure H-6). APPENDIX H: MAINTENANCE OF INLETS PAGE H-6

Revision B.001 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler Figure H-6. Adapter (left) and WINS impactor (right). H.2.2. H.2.2.H.2.2.H.2.2.H.2.2.H.2.2. C CCCCCLEANING LEANINGLEANINGLEANINGLEANINGLEANING THE THETHETHETHETHE WINS I WINS IWINS IWINS IWINS IWINS IMPACTOR MPACTORMPACTORMPACTORMPACTORMPACTOR Follow these steps to clean the WINS impactor: Follow these steps to clean the WINS impactor:Follow these steps to clean the WI NS impactor:Follow these steps to clean the WINS impactor:Follow these steps to clean the WINS impactor:Follow these steps to clean the WINS impactor: 1) 1)1)1)1)1) Unscrew the middle section of the WINS impactor to remove its Unscrew the middle section of the WINS impactor to remove itsUnscrew the middle section of the WINS impactor to remove itsUnscrew the middle section of the WINS impactor to remove itsUnscrew the middle section of the WINS impactor to remove itsUnscrew the middle section of the WINS impactor to remove its top piece from its bottom piece. This will expose the impactor top piece from its bottom piece. This will expose the impactortop piece from its bottom piece. This will expose the impactortop piece from its bottom piece. Thi s will expose the impactortop piece from its bottom piece. This will expose the impactortop piece from its bottom piece. This will expose the impactor assembly. assembly.assembly.assembly.assembly.assembly. 2) 2)2)2)2)2) Remove the impactor assembly from the bottom section of the Remove the impactor assembly from the bottom section of theRemove the impactor a ssembly from the bottom section of theRemove the impactor assembly from the bott om section of theRemove the impactor assembly from the bottom section of theRemo ve the impactor assembly from the bottom section of the WINS impactor (Figure H-7). WINS impactor (Figure H-7).WINS impactor (Figure H-7).WINS impactor (Figure H-7) .WINS impactor (Figure H-7).WINS impactor (Figure H-7). Figure H-7. Upper (left) and lower (right) sections of the impactor assembly . APPENDIX H: MAINTENANCE OF INLETS PAGE H-7

Revision B.001 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler 3) 3)3)3)3)3) Using a dry paper towel, wipe off the inside surfaces of the WINS Using a dry paper towel, wipe off the inside surfaces of the WINSUsing a dry pap er towel, wipe off the inside surfaces of the WINSUsing a dry paper towel, wipe off the inside surfaces of the WINSUsing a dry paper towel, wipe off the inside surfaces of the WINSUsing a dry paper towel, wipe off the inside surfaces of the WINS impactor. You may use a general purpose cleaner, if necessary. impactor. You may use a general purpose cleaner, if necessary.impactor. You may use a general purpose cleaner, if necessary.impactor. You may use a general purp ose cleaner, if necessary.impactor. You may use a general purpose cleaner, if ne cessary.impactor. You may use a general purpose cleaner, if necessary. 4) 4)4)4)4)4) Inspect all O-rings in the top and bottom sections of the WINS Inspect all O-rings in the top and bottom sections of the WINSInspect all O-ring s in the top and bottom sections of the WINSInspect all O-rings in the top and b ottom sections of the WINSInspect all O-rings in the top and bottom sections of the WINSInspect all O-rings in the top and bottom sections of the WINS impactor for damage and replace, if necessary. impactor for damage and replace, if necessary.impactor for damage and replace, i f necessary.impactor for damage and replace, if necessary.impactor for damage an d replace, if necessary.impactor for damage and replace, if necessary. 5) 5)5)5)5)5) Place a thin coating of O-ring lubricant onto the O-rings, if necesPlace a thin coating of O-ring lubricant onto the O-rings, if neces-Place a thin coating of O-ring lubricant onto the O-rings, if neces-Place a thin coating of O-ring lubricant onto the O-rings, if neces-Place a thin coating of O-ring lubri cant onto the O-rings, if neces-Place a thin coating of O-ring lubricant onto th e O-rings, if necessary. sary.sary.sary.sary.sary. 6 66666) ))))) Remove the top of the impactor assembly by lifting it upward. Remove the top of the impactor assembly by lifting it upward.Remove the top of t he impactor assembly by lifting it upward.Remove the top of the impactor assembl y by lifting it upward.Remove the top of the impactor assembly by lifting it upw ard.Remove the top of the impactor assembly by lifting it upward. 7 77777) ))))) Remove any filter that was previously installed. Remove any filter that was previously installed.Remove any filter that was previ ously installed.Remove any filter that was previously installed.Remove any filte r that was previously installed.Remove any filter that was previously installed. 8) 8)8)8)8)8) Clean the top and bottom of the impactor assembly using a dry Clean the top and bottom of the impactor assembly using a dryClean the top and b ottom of the impactor assembly using a dryClean the top and bottom of the impact or assembly using a dryClean the top and bottom of the impactor assembly using a dryClean the top and bottom of the impactor assembly using a dry

paper towel. You may use a general purpose cleaner, if necespaper towel. You may use a general purpose cleaner, if neces-paper towel. You ma y use a general purpose cleaner, if neces-paper towel. You may use a general pur pose cleaner, if neces-paper towel. You may use a general purpose cleaner, if ne ces-paper towel. You may use a general purpose cleaner, if neces sary. sary.sary.sary.sary.sary. 9 99999) ))))) Inspect the O-ring in the top section of the impactor assembly for Inspect the O-ring in the top section of the impactor assembly forInspect the Oring in the top section of the impactor assembly forInspect the O-ring in the to p section of the impactor assembly forInspect the O-ring in the top section of t he impactor assembly forInspect the O-ring in the top section of the impactor as sembly for damage and replace, if necessary. damage and replace, if necessary.damage and replace, if necessary.damage and rep lace, if necessary.damage and replace, if necessary.damage and replace, if neces sary. 10) 10)10)10)10)10) Place a thin coating of O-ring lubricant onto the O-ring, if nec esPlace a thin coating of O-ring lubricant onto the O-ring, if neces-Place a thin coating of O-ring lubricant onto the O-ring, if neces-Place a thin coating of Oring lubricant onto the O-ring, if neces-Place a thin coating of O-ring lubrican t onto the O-ring, if neces-Place a thin coating of O-ring lubricant onto the Oring, if necessary. sary.sary.sary.sary.sary. 11 1111111111) ))))) Place a new 37 mm borosilicate glass fiber filter onto the bottom Place a new 37 mm borosilicate glass fiber filter onto the bottomPlace a new 37 mm borosilicate glass fiber filter onto the bottomPlace a new 37 mm borosilicate glass fiber filter onto the bottomPlace a new 37 mm borosilicate glass fiber fi lter onto the bottomPlace a new 37 mm borosilicate glass fiber filter onto the b ottom of the impactor assembly (Figure H-8). of the impactor assembly (Figure H-8).of the impactor assembly (Figure H-8).of t he impactor assembly (Figure H-8).of the impactor assembly (Figure H-8).of the i mpactor assembly (Figure H-8). Figure H-8. Installing a 37 mm glass filter into the impactor assembly. 12 1212121212) ))))) Place 42 to 44 drops of impactor oil onto the filter. Place 42 to 44 drops of impactor oil onto the filter.Place 42 to 44 drops of imp actor oil onto the filter.Place 42 to 44 drops of impactor oil onto the filter.P lace 42 to 44 drops of impactor oil onto the filter.Place 42 to 44 drops of impa ctor oil onto the filter.

13) 13)13)13)13)13) Place the top of the impactor assembly onto the bottom of the Place the top of the impactor assembly onto the bottom of thePlace the top of th e impactor assembly onto the bottom of thePlace the top of the impactor assembly onto the bottom of thePlace the top of the impactor assembly onto the bottom of thePlace the top of the impactor assembly onto the bottom of the assembly. assembly.assembly.assembly.assembly.assembly. APPENDIX H: MAINTENANCE OF INLETS PAGE H-8

Revision B.001 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler 14) 14)14)14)14)14) Place the impactor assembly into the bottom section of the WINS Place the impactor assembly into the bottom section of the WINSPlace the impacto r assembly into the bottom section of the WINSPlace the impactor assembly into t he bottom section of the WINSPlace the impactor assembly into the bottom section of the WINSPlace the impactor assembly into the bottom section of the WINS impactor. impactor.impactor.impactor.impactor.impactor. 15) 15)15)15)15)15) Screw the top of the WINS impactor onto the bottom section. Screw the top of the WINS impactor onto the bottom section.Screw the top of the WINS impactor onto the bottom section.Screw the top of the WINS impactor onto th e bottom section.Screw the top of the WINS impactor onto the bottom section.Scre w the top of the WINS impactor onto the bottom section. Ensure that the WINS impactor remains in the upright orientation Ensure that the WINS impactor remains in the upright orientationEnsure that the WINS impactor remains in the upright orientationEnsure that the WINS impactor re mains in the upright orientationEnsure that the WINS impactor remains in the upr ight orientationEnsure that the WINS impactor remains in the upright orientation so that the oil in the impactor assembly does not spill. so that the oil in the impactor assembly does not spill.so that the oil in the i mpactor assembly does not spill.so that the oil in the impactor assembly does no t spill.so that the oil in the impactor assembly does not spill.so that the oil in the impactor assembly does not spill. 16) 16)16)16)16)16) Multiple WINS impactors can be prepared in this manner at one Multiple WINS impactors can be prepared in this manner at oneMultiple WINS impac tors can be prepared in this manner at oneMultiple WINS impactors can be prepare d in this manner at oneMultiple WINS impactors can be prepared in this manner at oneMultiple WINS impactors can be prepared in this manner at one time and kept for later use. time and kept for later use.time and kept for later use.time and kept for later use.time and kept for later use.time and kept for later use. APPENDIX H: MAINTENANCE OF INLETS PAGE H-9

Revision B.001 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler H.2.3. H.2.3.H.2.3.H.2.3.H.2.3.H.2.3. R RRRRREINSTALLING EINSTALLINGEINSTALLINGEINSTALLINGEINSTALLINGEINSTALLING THE THETHETHETHETHE WINS I WINS IWINS IWINS IWINS IWINS IMPACTOR MPACTORMPACTORMPACTORMPACTORMPACTOR Follow these steps to reinstall the WINS Impactor: Follow these steps to reinstall the WINS Impactor:Follow these steps to reinstal l the WINS Impactor:Follow these steps to reinstall the WINS Impactor:Follow the se steps to reinstall the WINS Impactor:Follow these steps to reinstall the WINS Impactor: 1) 1)1)1)1)1) Attach the adapter to the lower section of the WINS impactor. Attach the adapter to the lower section of the WINS impactor.Attach the adapter to the lower section of the WINS impactor.Attach the adapter to the lower sectio n of the WINS impactor.Attach the adapter to the lower section of the WINS impac tor.Attach the adapter to the lower section of the WINS impactor. 2) 2)2)2)2)2) Push the WINS impactor (with its adapter attached) upward into Push the WINS impactor (with its adapter attached) upward intoPush the WINS impa ctor (with its adapter attached) upward intoPush the WINS impactor (with its ada pter attached) upward intoPush the WINS impactor (with its adapter attached) upw ard intoPush the WINS impactor (with its adapter attached) upward into the WINS impactor mounting sleeve. the WINS impactor mounting sleeve.the WINS impactor mounting sleeve.the WINS imp actor mounting sleeve.the WINS impactor mounting sleeve.the WINS impactor mounti ng sleeve. 3) 3)3)3)3)3) Pass the rollers of the filter exchange mechanism through the Pass the rollers of the filter exchange mechanism through thePass the rollers of the filter exchange mechanism through thePass the rollers of the filter exchang e mechanism through thePass the rollers of the filter exchange mechanism through thePass the rollers of the filter exchange mechanism through the slots in the left-hand and right-hand guides. slots in the left-hand and right-hand guides.slots in the left-hand and right-ha nd guides.slots in the left-hand and right-hand guides.slots in the left-hand an d right-hand guides.slots in the left-hand and right-hand guides. 4) 4)4)4)4)4) Allow the filter exchange mechanism to open fully. Allow the filter exchange mechanism to open fully.Allow the filter exchange mech anism to open fully.Allow the filter exchange mechanism to open fully.Allow the filter exchange mechanism to open fully.Allow the filter exchange mechanism to o pen fully. 5) 5)5)5)5)5) Insert the filter cassette carrier (with a filter cassette installed) Insert the filter cassette carrier (with a filter cassette installed)Insert the filter cassette carrier (with a filter cassette installed)Insert the filter cass ette carrier (with a filter cassette installed)Insert the filter cassette carrie

r (with a filter cassette installed)Insert the filter cassette carrier (with a f ilter cassette installed) into the filter platform by matching the slot and hole in the filter into the filter platform by matching the slot and hole in the filterinto the fil ter platform by matching the slot and hole in the filterinto the filter platform by matching the slot and hole in the filterinto the filter platform by matching the slot and hole in the filterinto the filter platform by matching the slot an d hole in the filter cassette carrier with the appropriate hardware. cassette carrier with the appropriate hardware.cassette carrier with the appropr iate hardware.cassette carrier with the appropriate hardware.cassette carrier wi th the appropriate hardware.cassette carrier with the appropriate hardware. 6) 6)6)6)6)6) Push the handle of the filter exchange mechanism toward the Push the handle of the filter exchange mechanism toward thePush the handle of th e filter exchange mechanism toward thePush the handle of the filter exchange mec hanism toward thePush the handle of the filter exchange mechanism toward thePush the handle of the filter exchange mechanism toward the back to install the filter cassette. back to install the filter cassette.back to install the filter cassette.back to install the filter cassette.back to install the filter cassette.back to install the filter cassette. APPENDIX H: MAINTENANCE OF INLETS PAGE H-10

Revision B.001 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler Appendix I: Inlet Conversion Appendix I: Inlet ConversionAppendix I: Inlet ConversionAppendix I: Inlet Conver sionAppendix I: Inlet ConversionAppendix I: Inlet Conversion The Partisol-FRM Sampler can be configured with a variety of inlet systems. This appendix describes the components of the PM-2.5 WINS impactor sampler configurat ion and the PM-10 sampler configuration, and the procedures for converting the Partisol-FRM from a PM-2.5 to a PM-10 sampler. I.1. I.1.I.1.I.1.I.1.I.1. P PPPPPARTISOL ARTISOLARTISOLARTISOLARTISOLARTISOL-FRM PM-2.5 C -FRM PM-2.5 C-FRM PM-2.5 C-FRM PM-2.5 C-FRM PM-2.5 C-FRM PM-2.5 COMPONENTS OMPONENTSOMPONENTSOMPONENTSOMPONENTSOMPONENTS This following components comprise the PM-2.5 WINS inlet configuration as shown in Figure I-1. PM-10 inlet Sample tube WINS impactor WINS adapter Figure I-1. Partisol-FRM with WINS impactor (A), WINS adapter (B), sample tube (C) and modified PM10 inlet (D). A CB D APPENDIX I: INLET CONVERSION PAGE I-1

Revision B.001 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler Figure I-2. Partisol-FRM with modified PM-10 inlet and WINS impactor installed. APPENDIX I: INLET CONVERSION PAGE I-2

Revision B.001 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler I.2. I.2.I.2.I.2.I.2.I.2. P PPPPPARTISOL ARTISOLARTISOLARTISOLARTISOLARTISOL-FRM PM-10 C -FRM PM-10 C-FRM PM-10 C-FRM PM-10 C-FRM PM-10 C-FRM PM-10 COMPONENTS OMPONENTSOMPONENTSOMPONENTSOMPONENTSOMPONENTS The following components comprise the PM-10 inlet configuration as shown in Figure I-3. PM-10 inlet Sample tube Straight tube Straight tube adapter Figure I-3. Partisol-FRM straight tube (A), straight tube adapter (B), sample tube (C) and original PM-10 inlet (D). A CB D APPENDIX I: INLET CONVERSION PAGE I-3

Revision B.001 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler Figure I-4. Partisol-FRM with straight tube and original PM-10 inlet installed.

APPENDIX I: INLET CONVERSION PAGE I-4

Revision B.001 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler I.3. I.3.I.3.I.3.I.3.I.3.C CCCCCONVERTING ONVERTINGONVERTINGONVERTINGONVERTINGONVERTING THE THETHETHETHETHE P PPPPPARTISOL ARTISOLARTISOLARTISOLARTISOLARTISOL-FRM -FRM-FRM-FRM-FRM-FRM FROM FROMFROMFROMFROMFROM A AAAAA PM-2.5 S PM-2.5 SPM-2.5 SPM-2.5 SPM-2.5 SPM-2.5 SAMPLER AMPLERAMPLERAMPLERAMPLERAMPLER TO TOTOTOTOTO A AAAAA PM-10 S PM-10 SPM-10 SPM-10 SPM-10 SPM-10 SAMPLER AMPLERAMPLERAMPLERAMPLERAMPLER Follow these steps to convert a PM-2.5 sampler to a PM-10 sampler: Follow these steps to convert a PM-2.5 sampler to a PM-10 sampler:Follow these s teps to convert a PM-2.5 sampler to a PM-10 sampler:Follow these steps to conver t a PM-2.5 sampler to a PM-10 sampler:Follow these steps to convert a PM-2.5 sam pler to a PM-10 sampler:Follow these steps to convert a PM-2.5 sampler to a PM-1 0 sampler: 1) 1)1)1)1)1) Open the Partisol-FRM enclosure door to access the filter exOpen the Partisol-FRM enclosure door to access the filter ex-Open the Partisol-F RM enclosure door to access the filter ex-Open the Partisol-FRM enclosure door t o access the filter ex-Open the Partisol-FRM enclosure door to access the filter ex-Open the Partisol-FRM enclosure door to access the filter exchange mechanism. change mechanism.change mechanism.change mechanism.change mechanism.change mecha nism. 2) 2)2)2)2)2) Pull the filter exchange mechanism toward you to open the filter Pull the filter exchange mechanism toward you to open the filterPull the filter exchange mechanism toward you to open the filterPull the filter exchange mechani sm toward you to open the filterPull the filter exchange mechanism toward you to open the filterPull the filter exchange mechanism toward you to open the filter exchange mechanism. exchange mechanism.exchange mechanism.exchange mechanism.exchange mechanism.exch ange mechanism. 3) 3)3)3)3)3) Lift the rollers through the slots in the left-hand and right-hand Lift the rollers through the slots in the left-hand and right-handLift the rolle rs through the slots in the left-hand and right-handLift the rollers through the slots in the left-hand and right-handLift the rollers through the slots in the left-hand and right-handLift the rollers through the slots in the left-hand and right-hand guides (Figure I-5). guides (Figure I-5).guides (Figure I-5).guides (Figure I-5).guides (Figure I-5). guides (Figure I-5).

Figure I-5. Opening the filter exchange mechanism. 4) 4)4)4)4)4) Allow the filter platform to settle downward, and remove the WINS Allow the filter platform to settle downward, and remove the WINSAllow the filte r platform to settle downward, and remove the WINSAllow the filter platform to s ettle downward, and remove the WINSAllow the filter platform to settle downward, and remove the WINSAllow the filter platform to settle downward, and remove the WINS impactor and adapter by pulling them straight downward. impactor and adapter by pulling them straight downward.impactor and adapter by p ulling them straight downward.impactor and adapter by pulling them straight down ward.impactor and adapter by pulling them straight downward.impactor and adapter by pulling them straight downward. 5) 5)5)5)5)5) Remove the PM-10 inlet from the sample downtube by pulling it Remove the PM-10 inlet from the sample downtube by pulling itRemove the PM-10 in let from the sample downtube by pulling itRemove the PM-10 inlet from the sample downtube by pulling itRemove the PM-10 inlet from the sample downtube by pullin g itRemove the PM-10 inlet from the sample downtube by pulling it straight upward. straight upward.straight upward.straight upward.straight upward.straight upward. 6) 6)6)6)6)6) Remove the WINS adapter (Figure I-6) from the WINS impactor Remove the WINS adapter (Figure I-6) from the WINS impactorRemove the WINS adapt er (Figure I-6) from the WINS impactorRemove the WINS adapter (Figure I-6) from the WINS impactorRemove the WINS adapter (Figure I-6) from the WINS impactorRemo ve the WINS adapter (Figure I-6) from the WINS impactor and attach it to the straight tube. and attach it to the straight tube.and attach it to the straight tube.and attach it to the straight tube.and attach it to the straight tube.and attach it to the straight tube. APPENDIX I: INLET CONVERSION PAGE I-5

Revision B.001 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler Figure I-6. Adapter for the WINS impactor and straight tube. 7) 7)7)7)7)7) Install the straight tube with the adapter into the Partisol-FRM Install the straight tube with the adapter into the Partisol-FRMInstall the stra ight tube with the adapter into the Partisol-FRMInstall the straight tube with t he adapter into the Partisol-FRMInstall the straight tube with the adapter into the Partisol-FRMInstall the straight tube with the adapter into the Partisol-FRM enclosure by pushing them straight upward until they hit a stop enclosure by pushing them straight upward until they hit a stopenclosure by push ing them straight upward until they hit a stopenclosure by pushing them straight upward until they hit a stopenclosure by pushing them straight upward until the y hit a stopenclosure by pushing them straight upward until they hit a stop (Figure I-7). (Figure I-7).(Figure I-7).(Figure I-7).(Figure I-7).(Figure I-7). Figure I-7. Straight tube and adapter installed inside the enclosure. APPENDIX I: INLET CONVERSION PAGE I-6

Revision B.001 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler 8) 8)8)8)8)8) Install a filter carrier (with filter cassette) into the filter excha nge Install a filter carrier (with filter cassette) into the filter exchangeInstall a filter carrier (with filter cassette) into the filter exchangeInstall a filter carrier (with filter cassette) into the filter exchangeInstall a filter carrier (with filter cassette) into the filter exchangeInstall a filter carrier (with f ilter cassette) into the filter exchange mechanism and close the mechanism by pushing the handle mechanism and close the mechanism by pushing the handlemechanism and close the m echanism by pushing the handlemechanism and close the mechanism by pushing the h andlemechanism and close the mechanism by pushing the handlemechanism and close the mechanism by pushing the handle toward the back of the enclosure (Figure I-7). toward the back of the enclosure (Figure I-7).toward the back of the enclosure ( Figure I-7).toward the back of the enclosure (Figure I-7).toward the back of the enclosure (Figure I-7).toward the back of the enclosure (Figure I-7). Figure I-7. Filter cassette installed in the sampler. 9) 9)9)9)9)9) Install the sample tube by pushing it down until it hits a stop. Install the sample tube by pushing it down until it hits a stop.Install the samp le tube by pushing it down until it hits a stop.Install the sample tube by pushi ng it down until it hits a stop.Install the sample tube by pushing it down until it hits a stop.Install the sample tube by pushing it down until it hits a stop. 10) 10)10)10)10)10) Tighten the bulkhead fitting. Tighten the bulkhead fitting.Tighten the bulkhead fitting.Tighten the bulkhead f itting.Tighten the bulkhead fitting.Tighten the bulkhead fitting. 11) 11)11)11)11)11) Install the PM-10 inlet onto the sample tube (Figure I-8) by pre ssInstall the PM-10 inlet onto the sample tube (Figure I-8) by press-Install the P M-10 inlet onto the sample tube (Figure I-8) by press-Install the PM-10 inlet on to the sample tube (Figure I-8) by press-Install the PM-10 inlet onto the sample tube (Figure I-8) by press-Install the PM-10 inlet onto the sample tube (Figure I-8) by press ing it downward until it hits a stop. ing it downward until it hits a stop.ing it downward until it hits a stop.ing it downward until it hits a stop.ing it downward until it hits a stop.ing it downw ard until it hits a stop. APPENDIX I: INLET CONVERSION PAGE I-7

Revision B.001 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler Figure I-8. Installing the original PM-10 inlet onto the sample tube. 12) 12)12)12)12)12) The Partisol-FRM is now configured as a PM-10 sampler (Figure IThe Partisol-FRM is now configured as a PM-10 sampler (Figure I-The Partisol-FRM is now configured as a PM-10 sampler (Figure I-The Partisol-FRM is now configur ed as a PM-10 sampler (Figure I-The Partisol-FRM is now configured as a PM-10 sa mpler (Figure I-The Partisol-FRM is now configured as a PM-10 sampler (Figure I9 ). There is no difference in sampler programming or operation 9). There is no difference in sampler programming or operation9). There is no di fference in sampler programming or operation9). There is no difference in sample r programming or operation9). There is no difference in sampler programming or o peration9). There is no difference in sampler programming or operation with the PM-10 inlet installed on the unit. with the PM-10 inlet installed on the unit.with the PM-10 inlet installed on the unit.with the PM-10 inlet installed on the unit.with the PM-10 inlet installed on the unit.with the PM-10 inlet installed on the unit. NOTE: Make sure that the filter cassettes, transport containers and data sheets are clearly labeled as PM-10 sampling filters or sampling data when you install the PM-10 inlet and straight tube onto the Partisol-FRM sampler. APPENDIX I: INLET CONVERSION PAGE I-8

Revision B.001 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler Figure I-9. Partisol-FRM in the PM-10 configuration. APPENDIX I: INLET CONVERSION PAGE I-9

Revision B.001 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler I.4. I.4.I.4.I.4.I.4.I.4.C CCCCCONVERTING ONVERTINGONVERTINGONVERTINGONVERTINGONVERTING THE THETHETHETHETHE P PPPPPARTISOL ARTISOLARTISOLARTISOLARTISOLARTISOL-FRM -FRM-FRM-FRM-FRM-FRM FROM FROMFROMFROMFROMFROM A AAAAA PM-10 S PM-10 SPM-10 SPM-10 SPM-10 SPM-10 SAMPLER AMPLERAMPLERAMPLERAMPLERAMPLER TO TOTOTOTOTO A AAAAA PM-2.5 S PM-2.5 SPM-2.5 SPM-2.5 SPM-2.5 SPM-2.5 SAMPLER AMPLERAMPLERAMPLERAMPLERAMPLER Follow these steps to convert a PM-10 sampler to a PM-2.5 sampler: Follow these steps to convert a PM-10 sampler to a PM-2.5 sampler:Follow these s teps to convert a PM-10 sampler to a PM-2.5 sampler:Follow these steps to conver t a PM-10 sampler to a PM-2.5 sampler:Follow these steps to convert a PM-10 samp ler to a PM-2.5 sampler:Follow these steps to convert a PM-10 sampler to a PM-2. 5 sampler: 1) 1)1)1)1)1) Remove the PM-10 inlet and straight tube from the sampler. Remove the PM-10 inlet and straight tube from the sampler.Remove the PM-10 inlet and straight tube from the sampler.Remove the PM-10 inlet and straight tube fro m the sampler.Remove the PM-10 inlet and straight tube from the sampler.Remove t he PM-10 inlet and straight tube from the sampler. 2) 2)2)2)2)2) Separate the adapter from the straight tube. Separate the adapter from the straight tube.Separate the adapter from the straig ht tube.Separate the adapter from the straight tube.Separate the adapter from th e straight tube.Separate the adapter from the straight tube. 3) 3)3)3)3)3) Install the adapter onto the WINS impactor. Install the adapter onto the WINS impactor.Install the adapter onto the WINS imp actor.Install the adapter onto the WINS impactor.Install the adapter onto the WI NS impactor.Install the adapter onto the WINS impactor. 4) 4)4)4)4)4) Install the WINS impactor with the adapter into the enclosure by Install the WINS impactor with the adapter into the enclosure byInstall the WINS impactor with the adapter into the enclosure byInstall the WINS impactor with t he adapter into the enclosure byInstall the WINS impactor with the adapter into the enclosure byInstall the WINS impactor with the adapter into the enclosure by pushing them straight upward until they hit a stop. pushing them straight upward until they hit a stop.pushing them straight upward until they hit a stop.pushing them straight upward until they hit a stop.pushing them straight upward until they hit a stop.pushing them straight upward until t hey hit a stop. 5) 5)5)5)5)5) Install a filter carrier (with filter cassette) into the filter excha

nge Install a filter carrier (with filter cassette) into the filter exchangeInstall a filter carrier (with filter cassette) into the filter exchangeInstall a filter carrier (with filter cassette) into the filter exchangeInstall a filter carrier (with filter cassette) into the filter exchangeInstall a filter carrier (with f ilter cassette) into the filter exchange mechanism and close the mechanism by pushing the handle mechanism and close the mechanism by pushing the handlemechanism and close the m echanism by pushing the handlemechanism and close the mechanism by pushing the h andlemechanism and close the mechanism by pushing the handlemechanism and close the mechanism by pushing the handle toward the back of the enclosure. toward the back of the enclosure.toward the back of the enclosure.toward the bac k of the enclosure.toward the back of the enclosure.toward the back of the enclo sure. 6 66666) ))))) Install the sample tube by pushing it down until it hits a stop. Install the sample tube by pushing it down until it hits a stop.Install the samp le tube by pushing it down until it hits a stop.Install the sample tube by pushi ng it down until it hits a stop.Install the sample tube by pushing it down until it hits a stop.Install the sample tube by pushing it down until it hits a stop. 7) 7)7)7)7)7) Tighten the bulkhead fitting. Tighten the bulkhead fitting.Tighten the bulkhead fitting.Tighten the bulkhead f itting.Tighten the bulkhead fitting.Tighten the bulkhead fitting. 8) 8)8)8)8)8) Install the PM-10 inlet onto the sample tube by pressing it downInstall the PM-10 inlet onto the sample tube by pressing it down-Install the PM10 inlet onto the sample tube by pressing it down-Install the PM-10 inlet onto t he sample tube by pressing it down-Install the PM-10 inlet onto the sample tube by pressing it down-Install the PM-10 inlet onto the sample tube by pressing it down ward until it hits a stop. ward until it hits a stop.ward until it hits a stop.ward until it hits a stop.wa rd until it hits a stop.ward until it hits a stop. 9) 9)9)9)9)9) The Partisol-FRM is now configured as a PM-2.5 sampler (Figure IThe Partisol-FRM is now configured as a PM-2.5 sampler (Figure I-The Partisol-FR M is now configured as a PM-2.5 sampler (Figure I-The Partisol-FRM is now config ured as a PM-2.5 sampler (Figure I-The Partisol-FRM is now configured as a PM-2. 5 sampler (Figure I-The Partisol-FRM is now configured as a PM-2.5 sampler (Figu re I10). There is no difference in sampler programming or operation 10). There is no difference in sampler programming or operation10). There is no difference in sampler programming or operation10). There is no difference in sam pler programming or operation10). There is no difference in sampler programming or operation10). There is no difference in sampler programming or operation with the PM-2.5 inlet installed on the unit. with the PM-2.5 inlet installed on the unit.with the PM-2.5 inlet installed on t he unit.with the PM-2.5 inlet installed on the unit.with the PM-2.5 inlet instal led on the unit.with the PM-2.5 inlet installed on the unit.

APPENDIX I: INLET CONVERSION PAGE I-10

Revision B.001 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler Figure I-10. Partisol-FRM in the PM-2.5 WINS impactor configuration. APPENDIX I: INLET CONVERSION PAGE I-11

Revision B.001 Operating Manual, Partisol-FRM Model 2000 PM-2.5 Air Sampler This page left intentionally blank. APPENDIX I: INLET CONVERSION PAGE I-12